Home

AMX NXT-CV7

1. Wire Connector 1 Connector2 Connector3 1 White Orange White Orange Red 2 Orange White Orange White Black 3 White Green White Green 4 Blue White Blue White 5 White Blue White Blue 6 Green White Green White 7 White Brown White Brown 8 Brown White Brown White The following figures provide a cross section view FIG 12 and a description FIG 13 of the Modero Table Top Cable Connector 1 amp 2 FIG 12 Table Top va Element 1 f Binder Element 2 L Jacket Cable cross section view DESCRIPTION 9 PAIRS COMPOSITE CABLE CONSISTING OF ELEMENT 1 TWO 4 PAIR 24 AWG STRANDED TINNED COPPER POLYETHYLENE INSULATION ELEMENT 2 1 PAIR 18 AWG STRANDED TNNED COPPER PVC INSULATION AND FOIL SHIELDED OVERALL PAPER BINDER AND FLEX PVC JACKET ELEMENT 1 2 X 4 PAIRS 24 AWG STRANDED COPPER CONDUCTOR 24 AWG 7 32 TINNED COPPER OD 024 NOMINAL INSULATION 0075 WALL POLYETHYLENE OD 039 NOMINAL COLOR CODE P1 WHITE BLUE BLUE P2 WHITE ORANGE ORANGE P3 WHITE GREEN GREEN P4 WHITE BROWN BROWN PAIR 2 CONDUCTORS TWINNED LEFT HAND LAY TWISTED AT VARIED LAYS TO MINIMIZE CROSS TALK CABLE 4 P CABLED LEFT HAND LAY BLUE BINDER ORANGE BINDER BINDER PAPER TAPE ELEMENT 2 1 PAIR 18 AWG SHIELDED CONDUCTOR 18 AWG 16 30 TINNED COPPER OD 046 NOMINAL INSULATION 010 WALL PVC OD 066 NOMINAL COLOR CODE BLACK RED DRAIN WIRE 22 7 30
2. 12345678 y female K male RJ 45 connector pin configurations Ethernet RJ 45 Port Connections and Wiring FIG 43 describes the blink activity for the Ethernet 10 100 Base T RJ 45 connector and cable The Ethernet cable is connected to the rear of Table Top and side of the Wall Mount panels A Activity LED yellow A L L Link LED green lights when lights when receiving Or the Ethernet cables are connected transmitting Ethernet and terminated correctly data packets ALOAN ETHERNET 10 100 FIG 43 Ethernet connector showing communication and connection LEDs 2 k NOTE The following table lists the pinouts signals and pairing associated with the Ethernet connector Ethernet RJ 45 Pinouts and Signals a N 2 5678 Pin Signals Connections Pairing Color 1e 3 4 1 1 TX 1 1 1 2 Orange White L U L 2 TX 2 2 Orange 2 S 2 3 RX Ja 3 t 6 Green White gt 2 Q 4 no connection 4 4 Blue S S S 5 no connection 5 5 4 5 Blue White Q 6 RX Green a A P 7 no connection 7 8 Brown White 12345678 8 no connection Brown FIG 44 diagrams the RJ 45 pinouts and signals for the Ethernet RJ 45 connector and cable White Orange Stripe Orange IA White Green Stripe Blue
3. Escape Sequences The RAF and RMF commands support the replacement of any special escape sequences in the filename specified by the F embedded code with the corresponding data obtained from the system as outlined in the table below Escape Sequences Sequence Panel Information DV Device Number SY System Number IP IP Address HN Host Name MC Mac Address ID Neuron ID Only supported on panels that use ICSNet ignored on all other panels PX X resolution of current panel mode file PY Y resolution of current panel mode file ST Current state AC Address code AP Address port CC Channel code CP Channel port LC Level code LP Level port BX X Resolution of Current button BY Y Resolution of Current button BN Name of Button For instance http www amx com img asp device DV would become http www amx com img asp device 10001 Appendix A Text Formatting Codes for Bargraphs Joysticks Text formatting codes for bargraphs provide a mechanism to allow a portion of a bargraphs text to be dynamically provided information about the current status of the level multistate and traditional These codes would be entered into the text field along with any other text The following is a code list used for bargraphs Bargraph Text Code Inputs Code Bargraph Multi State Bargraph P Display the current percenta
4. Audio In Left Channel 6 pin captive wire Audio In Right Channel 6 pin captive wire Microphone Out 4 pin captive wire xog Inoyealg LANYSHL3 SAV VXN Comp Y BNC C BNC gt Ethernet RJ 45 Ethernet Out CAT5 12 VDC power mmm ower a supply ouch pa FIG 7 NXA AVB ETHERNET Breakout Box connector wiring diagram The rear panel wiring connections are described below from left to right AUDIO IN 6 pin mini Phoenix connector divided into left and right audio channels Each channel is divided into GND IN and IN terminal cable connectors 2 sets of 3 for each channel An example of this cable is to strip the ends of 2 RCA audio cables and insert them into their respective locations on the Audio In port Either a balanced and GND or unbalanced and GND audio signal can be connected to this input e MIC OUT 4 pin mini Phoenix connector divided into GND OUT and OUT terminal connectors An example of this cable is to strip the terminal ends of a 3 5mm mini jack and insert them into their respective locations on the Mic Out port This signal can be fed as a Line Level In to either an amplifier or an AMX VOL card Either a balanced and GND or unbalanced and GND audio signal can be connected to this output e Video In BNCs Feeds either Composite S Video Luma or S Video Chroma signals into the NXA AVB ETHERNET This feed is then redirected out
5. Virtual NetLinx Master Settings The Virtual NetLinx Master connection allows G4 touch panels to connect directly to NetLinx Studio instead of a physical NetLinx Master for file transfers System Number i To use set the panels to connect ether via USB if availd TCPAP to System 0 or to the above System Number and a following IP addresses IP Address of computer not needed as this is a direct USB connection NOTE Changes to the System Number of the Virtual NetLinx Master will not take effect until af communications have been stopped and N Co coes FIG 56 Assigning Communication Settings for a Virtual Master 4 Click the Communications Settings button to open the Communications Settings dialog 5 Click on the NetLinx Master radio button from the Platform Selection section to indicate that you are working as a NetLinx Master 6 Click on the Virtual Master radio box from the Transport Connection Option section to indicate you are wanting to configure the PC to communicate directly with a panel Everything else such as the Authentication is greyed out because you are not going through the Master s UI 7 Click the Edit Settings button on the Communications Settings dialog to open the Virtual NetLinx Master Settings dialog FIG 56 8 From within this dialog enter the System number default is 1 9 Click OK three times to close the open dialogs save your settings and return to th
6. es il Wireless Settings Page Security Options EAP TLS EAP Extensible Authentication Protocol is a Enterprise authentication protocol that can be used in both a wired and wireless network environment EAP requires the use of an 802 1x Authentication Server also known as a Radius server Most of the configuration fields described below take variable length strings as inputs Whenever these fields are selected an on screen keyboard appears which allows the string to then be entered TLS Transport Layer Security was the original standard wireless LAN EAP authentication protocol TLS requires additional work during the deployment phase but provides additional security since even a compromised password is not enough to break into an EAP TLS protected wireless network environment An EAP TLS security method is designed for wireless environments where its necessary to securely transmit data over a wireless network by adding an additional level of security protocol via the use of a private key Refer to the EAP Authentication section on page 193 for further details on these security options Refer to the Using the Site Survey tool section on page 59 for more information on using this feature Pressing the EAP TLS button opens the EAP TLS Settings dialog FIG 110 SAAS S50 Required Information SSID Network Name used by the Target WAP Identity similar to the Username used for network access Client Certificate file vali
7. GN lt bargraph slider name gt Set the bargraph slider name Joystick cursor name GC lt bargraph slider color gt Set the bargraph slider color Joystick cursor color A Button Commands Cont ABMF Cont Gl lt bargraph invert gt Set the bargraph invert noninvert or joystick coordinate 0 1 2 3 See the GIV command on page 157 for more information GU lt bargraph ramp up gt Set the bargraph ramp up time in intervals of 1 10 second GD lt bargraph ramp down gt Set the bargraph ramp down time in 1 10 second GG lt bargraph drag increment gt Set the bargraph drag increment Refer to the GDI command on page 157 for more information YN lt video ON OFF gt Set the Video either ON value 1 or OFF value 0 OT lt feedback type gt Set the Feedback Output Type to one of the following None Channel Invert ON Always ON Momentary or Blink SM Submit a text for text area button SF lt 1 or O gt Set the focus for text area button OP lt 0 255 gt Set the button opacity to either Invisible value 0 or Opaque value 255 OP lt 00 FF gt Set the button opacity to either Invisible value 00 or Opaque value FF UN lt Unicode text gt Set the Unicode text See the UN section on page 162 for the text format LN lt 0 240 gt Set the lines of video being removed See the BLN section on page 147 for
8. 2 Download this executable file to a known location on your computer Launch the Setup exe and follow the on screen prompts to complete the installation eS 2 k NOTE NOTE Step 2 Confirm the Installation of the USB Driver on the PC The first time each AMX touch panel is connected to the PC it is detected as a new hardware device and the USBLAN driver becomes associated with it panel specific Each time thereafter the panel is recognized as a unique USBLAN device and the association to the driver is done in the background When the panel is detected for the first time some user intervention is required during the association between panel and driver 1 After the installation of the USB driver has been completed confirm the proper installation of the large Type A USB connector to the PC s USB port and restart your machine If the panel is already powered continue with steps 3 The panel MUST be powered and configured for USB communication before connecting the mini USB connector to the panel s Program Port 2 Connect the terminal end of the power cable to the 12 VDC power connector on the side rear of the pane and supply power If using an MVP that is installed onto a docking station feed power to the docked panel by connecting the appropriate power supply to the docking station 3 After the panel powers up access the firmware setup pages by either MVP Pressing and holding the two lower buttons on both si
9. e The USB connections are not detected until after the particular USB connection plugged into the corresponding port on the panel and power is cycled to the panel Calibration is not working After the Modero touch panel has been updated with a new firmware kit downloaded to the panel through NetLinx Studio the calibration could need to be reset Cycling power to the panel should provide a baseline calibration for the particular touch panel Proceed to the Calibration page and reset the on screen calibration Panel doesn t respond to my touches e The protective cover acts to press on the entire LCD and makes calibration difficult because the user can t calibrate on specific crosshairs when the sheet is pressing on the whole LCD e Verify that the protective laminate coating on the LCD is removed before beginning any calibration process There is a crawling dashed line on the left border of the graphics On some units at some resolutions there are wavy lines across the entire screen This has been seen on middle resolutions and is referred to as the Mid Range Fallout problem e This is due to the graphics controller settings in the firmware Update to the latest v2 XX XX firmware e Visit the www amx com gt Tech Center gt Downloadable Files gt Firmware Files gt Modero panels Then Download the KIT file to your computer I was using the power from PSN and when I connected my NXA BASE
10. c c ccccciecsitdicscssecterssecsonsbessecusavesesveseccsecossoectoererseeds 185 INpUt Mask OPeratiOns lt iicicseccceccecceseedeessclenntecccnececnvcdccuesevessbuoesceecssseveusudsavsseuucscocersees 185 Input mask literals 3 625icSce cece sci becstens svessssctacebecncssscechecesdsedvouseecors ostesesies EE 185 Input mask output examples sicisc ecisssdsdisesseneiccedinteiseccecscattocdversoucenveudiedopenssrsecuecreesdenes 186 URL Resources ccccscccsetsscccietncteccscecassececsncnstecssadssossesnsssasnsaccseadubeseseasdecesucaseteaseseesees 187 Special Escape SEQUENCES i oiisc cece ccesteces sete svetstescecatesececes sias rrii aea irie 187 Appendix B Wireless Technology sssssssssssssssseseesssseseesseeesceesceeeseeeeseesseeesee 189 Overview of Wireless Technology sssssssssssssseececeeessessssscsssesseceeeeseseessseseseees 189 Terminology tociisiccsscvssncencecetosts aisina senses nanosa sees EEr EEEE ES Ea aiiai SEEE 190 EAP A thenticatiOMssssss sessi dices cedcnceeccacecudexossensuccubebiencebuoavdvns evden bat dadesemmexmvsccocneutes 193 EAP characteristics tcccseccsctdciceze2s cee detsssedencuansetsuGueususteshevcbenceleevecs conscestaesndunsasssstaveuseasse s 193 EAP communication overview i 5 ccccccncesececenicnesousecencoodonsseetedcocsnasectse cocetsecertececsasecerie 194 AMX Certificate Upload Utility cicccccvesessescctccvcteiscdasstvexestsanssbatatecnsensstexaiesusahourcnstecd 195 Configuring your G4 Touch
11. 0 100 e The Internal Sound Level bargraph indicates the current sound level The Mute button mutes the volume Volume Page Elements Cont Analog Breakout Box Line In Level Allows you to adjust the current Line In volume level being received from the communicating breakout box Use the UP DN buttons to adjust the Line In volume level range 0 100 e The Line In Level bargraph indicates the current Line In level The Mute button mutes the Line In volume Mic Out Level Allows you to adjust the current Microphone volume level being received from the communicating breakout box Use the UP DN buttons to adjust the Microphone volume level range 0 100 e The Mic Out Level bargraph indicates the current Mic Out level Supported sampling rates for WAV The following is a listing of supported sampling rates associated for WAV files played on CV7 panels Some WAV files currently played on Modero s may not work on these panels The supported sampling rates for WAV files are Supported WAV Sampling Rates 48000 Hz 16000 Hz 44100 Hz 12000 Hz 32000 Hz e 11025 Hz e 24000 Hz 8000 Hz 22050 Hz Protected Setup Page This button opens the Protected Setup page which centers around the properties used by the panel to properly communicate with the NetLinx Master Refer to both the Protected Setup Navigation Buttons section on page 98 and the Protecte
12. Bitmap name text length should be 9 Example SEND COMMAND Panel BMP 529 1 Gets the button OFF state bitmap information The result sent to the Master would be ButtonGet Id 529 Type 1002 Flag VALUE1 VALUE2 VALUE3 I oUF SO TEXT Buggs png TEXT LENGTH 9 Button Query Commands Cont BOP Syntax Get the overall 2BOP lt vt addr range gt lt button states range gt button opacity Variable variable text address range 1 4000 button states range 1 256 for multi state buttons 0 All states for General buttons 1 Off state and 2 On state custom event type 1015 Flag Zero Value1 Button state number Value2 Opacity Value3 Zero Text Blank Text length Zero Example SEND COMMAND Panel BOP 529 1 Gets the button OFF state opacity information The result sent to the Master would be ButtonGet Id 529 Type 1015 Flag 0 VALUE1 1 VALUE2 200 VALUE3 0 TEXT TEXT LENGTH 0 BRD Syntax Get the current 2BRD lt vt addr range gt lt button states range gt border name Variable variable text address range 1 4000 button states range 1 256 for multi state buttons 0 All states for General buttons 1 Off state and 2 On state custom event type 1014 Flag Zero Value1 Button state number Value2 Actual length of string Value3 Zero Text String that represents border name Text length Border nam
13. Text CUSTOM_EVENT TP 529 1002 Bitmap CUSTOM_EVENT TP 529 1003 Icon CUSTOM_EVENT TP 529 1004 Text Justification CUSTOM_EVENT TP 529 1005 Bitmap Justification CUSTOM_EVENT TP 529 1006 Icon Justification CUSTOM_EVENT TP 529 1007 Font CUSTOM_EVENT TP 529 1008 Text Effect Name CUSTOM_EVENT TP 529 1009 Text Effect Color CUSTOM_EVENT TP 529 1010 Word Wrap CUSTOM_EVENT TP 529 1011 ON state Border Color CUSTOM_EVENT TP 529 1012 ON state Fill Color CUSTOM_EVENT TP 529 1013 ON state Text Color CUSTOM_EVENT TP 529 1014 Border Name TL CUSTOM_EVENT TP 529 1015 Opacity Send_String 0 ButtonGet Id ITOA CUSTOM ID Type ITOA CUSTOM TYPE Send_String 0 Flag ITOA CUSTOM FLAG Send_String 0 VALUE1 ITOA CUSTOM VALUE1 Send_String 0 VALUE2 ITOA CUSTOM VALUE2 Send_String 0 VALUE3 ITOA CUSTOM VALUE3 Send_String 0 TEXT CUSTOM TEXT Send_String 0 TEXT LENGTH ITOA LENGTH_STRING CUSTOM TEXT All custom events have the following 6 fields Custom Event Fields Field Description Uint Flag 0 means text is a standard string 1 means Unicode encoded string slong value1 button state number slong value2 actual length of string this is not encoded size slong value3 index of first character usually 1 or same as optional index string text the text from the button text length string encode button text length The
14. al EA Operation Reference Guide NXD T CV7 7 Modero Touch Panel Touch Panels Last Revised 7 2 2012 AMX Limited Warranty and Disclaimer This Limited Warranty and Disclaimer extends only to products purchased directly from AMX or an AMX Authorized Partner which include AMX Dealers Distributors VIP s or other AMX authorized entity AMX warrants its products to be free of defects in material and workmanship under normal use for three 3 years from the date of purchase with the following exceptions Electroluminescent and LCD Control Panels are warranted for three 3 years except for the display and touch overlay compo nents are warranted for a period of one 1 year Disk drive mechanisms pan tilt heads power supplies and MX Series products are warranted for a period of one 1 year AMX lighting products are guaranteed to switch on and off any load that is properly connected to our lighting products as long as the AMX lighting products are under warranty AMX also guarantees the control of dimmable loads that are properly con nected to our lighting products The dimming performance or quality there of is not guaranteed impart due to the random combi nations of dimmers lamps and ballasts or transformers AMX software is warranted for a period of ninety 90 days Batteries and incandescent lamps are not covered under the warranty AMX AutoPatch Epica Modula Modula Series4 Modula CatPro Series
15. 0 19 mm e Panel type TFT Color Active Matrix e Screen resolution 800 x 480 pixels HV 60 Hz frame frequency e Video format NTSC PAL and SECAM e Viewing angles 100 total viewing angle Vertical 50 up from center and 50 down from center Active Screen Area 6 00 x 3 60 15 24cm x 9 14cm IR Reception Angle Horizontal 50 left and right from center e Vertical 30 up and down from center Supported Audio Sample Rates e 48000Hz 44100Hz 32000Hz 24000Hz 22050Hz 16000Hz 12000Hz 11025Hz and 8000Hz Front Panel Components Light sensor Motion sensor PIR e Photosensitive light detector for automatic adjustment of the panel brightness a dim room results in a dimmer LCD display and a bright room results in a brighter LCD display Note The light sensor can be adjusted via the Sensor Setup page page 103 e Proximity Infrared Detector to wake the panel when the panel is approached e Activation range 45 left and right from center and 20 up and down from center Note This sensor can be adjusted via the Sensor Setup page see page 103 Specifications for 7 Widescreen Video Touch Panels Cont IR Receiver IR reception 38 KHz IR frequency e The IR receiver is located beneath the translucent Front Setup button When an IR code is detected it is sent to the NetLinx Master as a push on the appropriate AMX IR channel e IR
16. 510 515 AUNI For the UNI command UN and BMF command the Unicode text is sent as Set Unicode text ASCII HEX nibbles Syntax UNI lt vt addr range gt lt button states range gt lt unicode text gt Variable variable text address range 1 4000 button states range 1 256 for multi state buttons 0 All states for General buttons 1 Off state and 2 On state unicode text Unicode HEX value Example SEND_COMMAND Panel UNI 500 1 0041 Sets the button s unicode character to A Note To send the variable text A in unicode to all states of the variable text button 1 for which the character code is 0041 Hex send the following command SEND_COMMAND TP UNI 1 0 0041 Note Unicode is always represented in a HEX value TPD4 generates through the Text Enter Box dialog unicode HEX values Refer to the TPDesign4 Instruction Manual for more information Text Effect Names The following is a listing of text effects names This list is associated with the TEF command on page 161 Text Effects Glow S e Hard Drop Shadow 6 Glow M e Hard Drop Shadow 7 Glow L e Hard Drop Shadow 8 Glow X Soft Drop Shadow 1 with outline Outline S Soft Drop Shadow 2 with outline Outline M Soft Drop Shadow 3 with outline Outline L Soft Drop Shadow 4 with outline Outline X Soft Drop Shadow 5 with outline Soft Drop Shadow 1 Soft D
17. 54 and has a unique name such as AMX USB LAN LINK 2 The number changes depending on which recognized panel is currently connected Tai Action ww e gt fim e iia pp H Computer H E Disk drives Display adapters 23 DVD CD ROM drives H Floppy disk controllers Network adapters 6 qrated Fess Ethernet Controller 3C905C TX Compatible USB connected touch panel showing the recognized panel W forts COME E F SCSI and RAID controllers Sound video and game controllers H Storage volumes E 2 System devices Universal Serial Bus controllers FIG 54 Device Manager dialog showing USB device 3 Confirm that a new USB detection icon FIG 55 appears in the lower right taskbar on the PC display window 4 Double click on the icon to open the Unplug or Eject Hardware window and confirm the AMX USB LAN LINK has been installed and is operating properly physical NetLinx Master In this situation the PC takes on the functions of a Master via a Virtual NetLinx Master This connection is made by either using the PC s NOTE Ethernet Address via TCP IP using a known PC s IP Address as the Master or using a direct mini USB connection to communicate directly to the panel A Virtual NetLinx Master VNM is used when the target panel is not connected to a 5 Click the Properties button to view further information about the installed USB driver AMX USB LAN LINK Properties 2 x General D
18. A White Blue Stripe cs a Green A White Brown Stripe Brown Stripe FIG 44 RJ 45 wiring diagram USB Port Connecting and Using Input Devices The CV7 panel can have up to two USB capable input devices connected for use on its different firmware and TPD4 panel pages These input devices can consist of a keyboard or mouse USB connected input devices are not detected and recognized by the panel until power is cycled to the unit A mini USB connection is only detected after it is installed onto an active panel Connection to a previously powered panel allows the PC to detect the panel and assign an appropriate USB driver 1 Insert the input device USB connectors into the appropriate USB connector on the panel 2 Press the on screen Reboot button from the Protected Setup page to save any changes and restart the panel 3 After the panel splash screen disappears e Ifa USB mouse has been connected a mouse cursor appears on the panel screen and its location corresponds to the mouse cursor position sent by the external USB mouse e Ifa USB keyboard has been connected only on screen keyboards and keypads will reflect any external keystrokes sent from the external USB keyboard allation 46 7 Mode Panel Calibration Overview This section outlines the steps for calibrating the touch panel It is recommended that you calibrate the panel before its initial use and after completing a firmware
19. ACPF Clear all page flips from a button Syntax CPF lt vt addr range gt Variable variable text address range 1 4000 Example SEND_COMMAND Panel CPF 500 Clears all page flips from the button ADPF Delete page flips from button if it already exists Syntax ADFP lt vt addr range gt lt actions gt lt page name gt Variable variable text address range 1 4000 actions Stan dardPage Flip to standard page Prev iousPage Flip to previous page Show Popup Show Popup page Hide Popup Hide Popup page Togg lePopup Toggle popup state ClearG roup Clear popup page group from all pages ClearP age Clear all popup pages from a page with the specified page name ClearA Il Clear all popup pages from all pages page name 1 50 ASCII characters Example SEND COMMAND Panel DPF 409 Prev Deletes the assignment of a button from flipping to a previous page Set a font toa specific Font ID value for those buttons with a defined address range AENA Syntax Enable or ENA lt vt addr range gt lt command value gt disable buttons Variable with a set variable text variable text address range 1 4000 range command value 0 disable 1 enable Example SEND_COMMAND Panel ENA 500 504 amp 510 515 0 Disables button pushes on buttons with variable text range 500 504 amp 510 515 AFON Font ID numbers are generated by the TPDesign4 programmer
20. HN Host Name MC Mac Address ID Neuron ID PX X Resolution of current panel mode file PY Y Resolution of current panel mode file BX X Resolution of current button BY Y Resolution of current button BN Name of button ST Current state AC Address Code AP Address Port CC Channel Code CP Channel Port LC Level Code LP Level Port Appendix A ay foe co 7 Modero Touch Panels Appendix B Wireless Technology Overview of Wireless Technology e 802 11b 2 4 GHz and 802 11a 5 GHz are the two major WLAN standards and both operate using radio frequency RF technology Together the two standards are together called Wi Fi and operate in frequency bands of 2 4 GHz and 5 GHz respectively The 802 11b specification was the first to be finalized and reach the marketplace The actual throughput you can expect to obtain from an 802 11b network will typically be between 4 and 5 Mbps Because of the higher frequency and thus shorter wavelength that they use 802 11a signals have a much tougher time penetrating solid objects like walls floors and ceilings As a result the price for 802 1 1a s higher speed is not only shorter in range but also a weaker and less consistent signal 802 11g provides increased bandwidth at 54 Mbps As part of the IEEE 802 11g specification when throughput cannot be maintained this card will automatically switch algorithms in order to maintain the highest spread possible at a giv
21. PDR lt popup page name gt lt reset flag gt Variable popup page name 1 50 ASCII characters Name of the page the popup is displayed On reset flag 1 Enable reset flag 0 Disable reset flag Example SEND_COMMAND Panel PDR Popup1 1 Popup1 will return to its default location when turned On PHE Set the hide effect for the specified popup page to the named hide effect Syntax PHE lt popup page name gt lt hide effect name gt Variable popup page name 1 50 ASCII characters Name of the page the popup is displayed On hide effect name Refers to the popup effect names being used Example SEND_COMMAND Panel PHE Popup1 Slide to Left Sets the Popup1 hide effect name to Slide to Left PHP Set the hide effect position Only 1 coordinate is ever needed for an effect however the command will specify both This command sets the location at which the effect will end at Syntax PHP lt popup page name gt lt x coordinate gt lt y coordinate gt Variable popup page name 1 50 ASCII characters Name of the page the popup is displayed On Example SEND_COMMAND Panel PHP Popup1 75 0 Sets the Popup1 hide effect x coordinate value to 75 and the y coordinate value to 0 Page Commands Cont PHT Syntax Set the hide effect PHT lt popup page name gt lt hide effect time gt time for the Variable na popup a page name 1 50
22. PPT Popup1 30 Sets the popup page Popup1 to timeout within 3 seconds Page Commands Cont PPX This command works in the same way as the Clear All command in TPDesign 4 Close all Syntax popups on all 1 ppx pagos Example SEND_COMMAND Panel PPX Close all popups on all pages PSE Syntax Set the show effect for the specified popup PSE lt popup page name gt lt show effect name gt Variable popup page name 1 50 ASCII characters Name of the page the popup is displayed aa OR effect show effect name Refers to the popup effect name being used Example SEND_COMMAND Panel PSE Popup1 Slide from Left Sets the Popup1 show effect name to Slide from Left PSP Only 1 coordinate is ever needed for an effect however the command will specify both Set the show effect position This command sets the location at which the effect will begin at Syntax PSP lt popup page name gt lt x coordinate gt lt y coordinate gt Variable popup page name 1 50 ASCII characters Name of the page the popup is displayed On Example SEND_COMMAND Panel PSP Popup1 100 0 Sets the Popup1 show effect x coordinate value to 100 and the y coordinate value to 0 PST Set the show effect time for the specified popup page Syntax PST lt popup page name gt lt show effect time gt Variable popup page name 1 50 ASCII characters Name of the page the p
23. e Up arrow indicates that the information is being sorted in a Ascending order e SSID A to Z Channel 1 to 14 Security Unknown to WEP Signal None to Excellent The firmware considers the following to be the security order from least secure to most secure Open WEP WPA WPA2 and Unknown e Down arrow indicates that the information is being sorted in a Descending order e SSID Z to A Channel 11 to 6 Security WEP to Unknown Signal Excellent to None If the panel detects more than 10 WAPs the Up Down arrows at the far right side of the page become active blue and allow the user to scroll through the list of entries NOTE 4 Select a desired Access Point by touching the corresponding row The up arrow and down arrow will be grayed out if there are ten or less access points detected If there are more then they will be enabled as appropriate so that the user can scroll through the list 5 With the desired WAP selected and highlighted click the Connect button to be directed to the selected security mode s Settings page with the SSID field filled in You can then either Cancel the operation or fill in any necessary information fields and then click Save If you select an Open WEP and WPA PSK Access Point and then click Connect you will be flipped to the corresponding Settings page For any other security mode if you click Connect you will only return to the previous page without any information being pre f
24. grey because the panel pulls this value directly from the communicating target Master virtual or not A Virtual Master system value can be set within the active AMX software applications such as NetLinx Studio TPD4 or IREdit ee aia P NOTE If the panel does not appear within the OnLine Tree tab of the Workspace window of NetLinx Studio check to make sure that the NetLinx Master System Number from within the Device Addressing dialog is correctly assigned 3 Press the Master IP URL field to open a Keyboard and enter the Master IP Address obtained from the Diagnostics Networking Address dialog of the NetLinx Studio application 4 Click Done to accept the new value and return to the System Settings page 5 Do not alter the Master Port Number value this is the default value used by NetLinx 6 Enter a username and password into their respective fields if the target Master has been previously secured 7 Press the Back button to open the Protected Setup page 8 Press the on screen Reboot button to both save any changes and restart the panel Master Connection section NetLinx Master Ethernet IP Address Listen Mode In this mode you must add the Modero panel IP Address into the URL List of the Master using NetLinx Studio This mode sets the Modero panel to listen for broadcasts from the Master using the panel IP from its URL list 1 Obtain either a Static IP for the Modero panel from your System Admi
25. max RF Output Power e 15 dBm 1 dBm e Channels 1 11 North America Security WEP 64 128 bit WPA TKIP Wireless Restrictions In R amp TTE countries such as France the 802 11g frequency band is restricted to 2454 2483 5 MHz 2 4 2 4835 GHz and a max power output of 100 mW EIRP outdoor It is recommended that any upgrade of internal equipment be done simultaneously in order to reduce the risk of damage to internal components NXA WC80211GCF 802 11g Wireless Card FG2255 07 These panels can also connect to a wireless network using the optional 802 11g Wi Fi CF card This internal WIC FIG 15 can be purchased separately as a Wi Fi upgrade kit from AMX PIFA antenna with metal plate CERTIFIED 93 FIG 15 NXA WC80211GCF 802 11g wireless card This interface card FG2255 07 is a 2 4 GHz Wi Fi LAN CF Card which upgrades a Modero panel s wireless RF capabilities from 802 11b to 802 11g This card also provides the end user with several new methods of wireless encryption and data security such as WPA and WPA2 In addition to being backwards compatible with 802 11b networks this card is installable within all current MVP CV7 and CV 10 panels To fully utilize these newer wireless security features this card must be used in tandem with the latest Modero firmware upgrade available at www amx com This card works with compatible 802 11b g Wireless Access Points such as the NXA WA
26. set in TPD4 Battery Power Brightness The DISABLE DISABLED button acts as a power save feature with two Limit available choices e Disable activates the brightness limit set on the Modero panel and is used to conserve battery power Activating this feature causes the panel to function at 80 of full brightness and overrides the Panel Brightness value set on the Setup page This extends the battery usage time Disabled illuminated when selected deactivates this power save feature and makes the panel use the specified Panel Brightness level set on the Setup page The term quality in the context of a battery refers to the current capacity relative to C the batteries rated capacity For example after constant use a battery may be operating at 75 of its rated capacity even though it might be fully charged In this NOTE case the battery could be incorrectly reporting its information back to the battery base and then consequently relating this information back to the Battery Base page A battery can be recalibrated using an optional NXT CHG battery charger Protected Setup Navigation Buttons The Protected Setup Navigation Buttons FIG 90 appear on the left of the panel screen when the Protected Setup page is currently active Control Modero Protected Setup Navigation Buttons A Passwords S Calibrate M reless Settings Em Settings FIG 90 Protected Setup Navig
27. 1 4000 button states range 1 256 for multi state buttons 0 All states for General buttons 1 Off state and 2 On state border name Refer toBorder Styles table on page 141 Example SEND_COMMAND Panel BRD 500 504 amp 510 515 1 amp 2 Quad Line Sets the border by name Quad Line to those buttons with the variable text range of 500 504 amp 510 515 Refer to theTPD4 Border Styles by Name table on page 141 OO n S A Button Commands Cont ABSF Set the focus to the text area Note Select one button at a time single variable text address Do not assign a variable text address range to set focus to multiple buttons Only one variable text address can be in focus at a time Syntax BSF lt vt addr range gt lt selection value gt Variable variable text address range 1 4000 selection value Unselect 0 and select 1 Example SEND_COMMAND Panel BSF 500 1 Sets the focus to the text area of the button ABSM Submit text for text area buttons This command causes the text areas to send their text as strings to the NetLinx Master Syntax BSM lt vt addr range gt Variable variable text address range 1 4000 Example SEND_COMMAND Panel BSM 500 Submits the text of the text area button ABSO Set the sound played when a button is pressed If the sound name is blank the sound is then cleared If the sound name is not matched the button sound
28. 1 battery base to the active panel my screen went blank Modero battery bases can not be hot swappea or replaced without powering down the Modero and removing the PSN connector If you are currently using a direct power connection to the panel and then wish to connect an NXA BASE 1 First power down the panel and detach the rear power connection Then remove any batteries from within the NXA BASE 1 and connect the battery base to the underside of the panel After connecting the base to the un powered panel then run power to the panel by either reconnecting the power cable to the rear of the panel or inserting the NXT BP batteries into the NXA BASE 1 e Refer to the NXA BASE 1 Battery Base Kit FG2255 05K section on page 24 and Installing the NXA BASE 1 below an NXT CV7 Panel section on page 26 for more information Troubleshooting Information Cont Symptom Solution I can t seem to completely charge my battery from within an NXA BASE 1 connected to a pow ered panel NXT BP batteries can be charged from either an external NXT CHG battery charger or from within the NXA BASE 1 located below an NXT panel e The NXA BASE 1 Battery base should be updated with the latest firmware part of the Modero firmware KIT file from www amx com e The base can only charge the battery while the NXT panel is in Sleep Mode If the panel parameters are set to their highest values the priority for the power draw
29. 11 Circle 45 37 Diamond 25 12 Circle 55 38 Diamond 35 13 Circle 65 39 Diamond 45 14 Circle 75 40 Diamond 55 15 Circle 85 41 Diamond 65 16 Circle 95 42 Diamond 75 17 Circle 105 43 Diamond 85 18 Circle 115 44 Diamond 95 C TPD4 Border Styles by Name Cont No Border styles No Border styles 19 Circle 125 45 Diamond 105 20 Circle 135 46 Diamond 115 21 Circle 145 47 Diamond 125 22 Circle 155 48 Diamond 135 23 Circle 165 49 Diamond 145 24 Circle 175 50 Diamond 155 25 Circle 185 51 Diamond 165 26 Circle 195 52 Diamond 175 53 Diamond 185 97 Menu Bottom Rounded 185 54 Diamond 195 98 Menu Bottom Rounded 195 55 Double Bevel L 99 Menu Top Rounded 15 56 Double Bevel M 100 Menu Top Rounded 25 57 Double Bevel S 101 Menu Top Rounded 35 58 Double Line 102 Menu Top Rounded 45 59 Fuzzy 103 Menu Top Rounded 55 60 Glow L 104 Menu Top Rounded 65 61 Glow S 105 Menu Top Rounded 75 62 Help Down 106 Menu Top Rounded 85 63 Neon Active L 107 Menu Top Rounded 95 64 Neon Active S 108 Menu Top Rounded 105 65 Neon Inactive L 109 Menu Top Rounded 115 66 Neon Inactive S 110 Menu Top Rounded 125 67 Oval H 60x30 111 Menu Top Rounded 135 68 Oval H 100x50 112 Menu Top Rounded 145 69 Oval H 150x75 113 Menu Top Rounded 155 70 Oval H 200x100 114 Menu Top Rounded 165 71 Oval V 30x60 115 Menu Top Rounded 175 72 Oval V 50x100 116
30. 500 from state 1 to state 25 for 10 second AAPF Syntax Add page flip 4APF lt vt addr range gt lt page flip action gt lt page name gt action to a button Variable if it does not variable text address range 1 4000 page flip action Stan dardPage Flip to standard page Prev iousPage Flip to previous page Show Popup Show Popup page Hide Popup Hide Popup page Togg lePopup Toggle popup state ClearG roup Clear popup page group from all pages ClearP age Clear all popup pages from a page with the specified page name ClearA II Clear all popup pages from all pages page name 1 50 ASCII characters already exist Example SEND COMMAND Panel APF 400 Stan Main Page Assigns a button to a standard page flip with page name Main Page ABAT Syntax Append BAT lt vt addr range gt lt button states range gt lt new text gt non unicode text Variable variable text address range 1 4000 button states range 1 256 for multi state buttons 0 All states for General buttons 1 Off state and 2 On state new text 1 50 ASCII characters Example SEND_COMMAND Panel BAT 520 1 Enter City Appends the text Enter City to the button s OFF state A Button Commands Cont ABAU Same format as UNI Append Syntax unicode text BAU lt vt addr range gt lt button states range gt lt unicode text gt Variable variable text add
31. 504 amp 510 1 12 Sets the Off state border color to 12 Yellow Colors can be set by Color Numbers Color name R G B alpha colors RRGGBBAA and R G amp B colors values RRGGBB ABDO Determines what order each layer of the button is drawn Set the button Syntax draw order BDO lt vt addr range gt lt button states range gt lt 1 5 gt lt 1 5 gt lt 1 5 gt lt 1 5 gt lt 1 5 gt Variable variable text address range 1 4000 button states range 1 256 for multi state buttons 0 All states for General buttons 1 Off state and 2 On state layer assignments Fill Layer 1 Image Layer 2 Icon Layer 3 Text Layer 4 Border Layer 5 Note The layer assignments are from bottom to top The default draw order is 12345 Example SEND_COMMAND Panel BDO 530 1 amp 2 51432 Sets the button s variable text 530 ON OFF state draw order from bottom to top to Border Fill Text Icon and Image Example 2 SEND_COMMAND Panel BDO 1 0 12345 Sets all states of a button back to its default drawing order ABFB ONLY works on General type buttons Set the feedback Syntax type of the button BFB lt vt addr range gt lt feedback type gt Variable variable text address range 1 4000 feedback type None Channel Invert On Always on Momentary and Blink Example SEND_COMMAND Panel BFB 500 Momentary Sets the Feedback type of the button to Momentary A But
32. 8 Fpga AMX Corp v7 00 1 ne Masters Devices Ports J 1 J 3 J 0 Display Ci Workspace T Online Tree Ready eon on Puch ete ET 1 FIG 57 Using USB for Virtual Master communication rE t NOTE Wireless Settings Page Wireless Access Overview IP Routing The behavior of the wireless routing is largely dependent on the wired network interface Although the panel can be connected to two networks simultaneously it may only have one gateway If the wired network was successfully set up and a gateway was obtained then the default route for all network traffic will be via the wired network In the event that the wired network was not configured then the default route for all network traffic will be via the wireless network The wired network connection always takes priority As an example e Imagine a panel connected to two networks A amp B A is the wired network and B is the wireless network If the Master controller is on either of these networks then it will be reached However if the Master controller is on a different network C then determining which network interface wired or wireless that will be used is dependent on the gateway Hot Swapping Hot swapping is not an issue on these panels as the card is installed within the unit and cannot be removed without first removing the housing In the case of DHCP there must be a DHCP server accessible before the fields are p
33. BY CD D C D CHED CD D CD f om CEED CHEOD D CD 4D CHID CHLED D C D CHD EnD O Y ver ED CHD a O Ge E Ga Ea M GS Gas Ga Ga v Connecting to the WAP begins the communication E FIG 61 Site Survey of available WAPS Unsecured WAP shown selected Select an OPEN unsecured WAP Manually entering the SSID information into their appropriate fields by following steps 7 thru 9 7 From within the Wireless Security section press the Open Clear Text button to open the Open Clear Text Settings dialog FIG 62 An Open security method does not utilize any encryption methodology but does require that an SSID alpha numeric be entered Using this method causes network packets to be sent out as unencrypted text Ojjan Slip Tact Steines Required Information SSID Network Name used by the Target WAP By default this field displays the SSID AMX Save Cancel FIG 62 Wireless Settings page Open Clear Text security method 8 Press the red SSID field FIG 62 to display an on screen Network Name SSID keyboard 9 In this keyboard enter the SSID name used on your target Wireless Access Point case sensitive e The card should be given the SSID used by the target WAP If this field is left blank the unit will attempt to connect to the first available WAP By default all WAP200Gs use AMX as their assigned SSID value en rE NOTE One of the most common problem
34. COMMAND Panel FON 529 1 Gets the button OFF state font type index information The result sent to the Master would be ButtonGet Id 529 Type 1007 Flag 0 VALUE1 1 VALUE2 72 VALUE3 0 TEXT TEXT LENGTH 0 Button Query Commands Cont ICO Syntax Get the current IC0 lt vt addr range gt lt button states range gt icon index Variable variable text address range 1 4000 button states range 1 256 for multi state buttons 0 All states for General buttons 1 Off state and 2 On state custom event type 1003 Flag Zero Value1 Button state number Value2 Icon Index Value3 Zero Text Blank Text length Zero Example SEND COMMAND Panel ICO 529 1 amp 2 Gets the button OFF state icon index information The result sent to the Master would be ButtonGet Id 529 Type 1003 Flag 0 VALUE1 2 VALUE2 12 VALUE3 0 TEXT TEXT LENGTH 0 JSB Syntax Get the current JSB lt vt addr range gt lt button states range gt bitmap Variable justification variable text address range 1 4000 button states range 1 256 for multi state buttons 0 All states for General buttons 1 Off state and 2 On state custom event type 1005 Flag Zero Value1 Button state number Value2 1 9 justify Value3 Zero Text Blank Text length Zero Example SEND COMMAND Panel JSB 529 1 Gets the button OFF state bitmap jus
35. EAP requires the use of an 802 1x Authentication Server also known as a Radius server Most of the configuration fields described below take variable length strings as inputs Whenever these fields are selected an on screen keyboard appears which allows the string to then be entered LEAP Lightweight Extensible Authentication Protocol was developed by Cisco Systems as a way to securely transmit authentication information over a wireless network environment LEAP does not use client panel or server RADIUS certificates and is therefore one of the least secure EAP security methods but can be utilized successfully by implementing sufficiently complex passwords An EAP LEAP security method is designed for wireless environments where its not required to have both a client or server certificate validation scheme in place yet necessary to securely transmit data over a wireless network Refer to the EAP Authentication section on page 193 for further details on these security options Refer to the Using the Site Survey tool section on page 59 for more information on using this feature Refer to FIG 105 for an example of what a typical EAP LEAP system configuration page would like Pressing the EAP LEAP button opens the EAP LEAP Settings dialog FIG 104 SARAR SSJ Identity Password Save Required Information SSID Network Name used by the Target WAP Identity similar to the Username used for network access Password sim
36. Lock 144 90 Caps Lock 145 91 Insert 146 92 Delete 147 93 Home 148 94 End 149 95 Page Up 150 96 Page Down 151 97 Scroll Lock 152 98 Pause 153 99 Break 154 9A Print Screen 155 9B SYSRQ 156 90 Tab 157 9D Windows 158 9E Menu 159 9F Up Arrow 160 A0 Down Arrow 161 A1 Left Arrow 162 A2 Right Arrow 192 CO CTRL key up 193 C1 ALT key up 194 C2 Shift key up Panel Setup Commands These commands are case insensitive Panel Setup Commands AMUT Syntax Set the panel MUT lt mute state gt mute state Variable mute state 0 Mute Off and 1 Mute On Example SEND_COMMAND Panel MUT 1 Sets the panel s master volume to mute PWD PWD sets the level 1 password only Set the page flip Syntax password PWD lt page flip password gt Variables page flip password 1 50 ASCII characters Example SEND COMMAND Panel PWD Main Sets the page flip password to Main APWD Password level is required and must be 1 4 Set the page flip Syntax password lt PWD lt password level gt lt page flip password gt Variables password level 1 4 page flip password 1 50 ASCII characters Example SEND COMMAND Panel PWD 1 Main Sets the page flip password on Password Level 1 to Main RPP RPP resets the protected password to its default 1988 Reset the Syntax protected 1 QRPP password Exam
37. Master IP and connection methods into the Master Connection section of the System Settings page My Modero panel can t obtain a DHCP Address My NXT BP battery pack is blinking when I check the battery life indicator In requesting a DHCP Address the DHCP Server can take up to a few minutes to provide the address e Verify there is an active Ethernet connection attached to the rear of the Modero before beginning these procedures e Select Diagnostics gt Network Address from the Main menu and verify the System number If the IP Address field is still empty give the Modero a few minutes to negotiate a DHCP Address and try again A blinking battery life LED indicates that there is less than 10 power charge remaining on the battery It is recommended that you fully charge the battery either in the NXA BASE battery base or in the NXT CHG battery charger e Refer to the NXA BASE 1 Battery Base Kit FG2255 05K section on page 24 and NXT CHG Battery Charger Kit FG2255 50K section on page 28 for more information My panel is not showing up in the Virtual Master s System list of connected devices If you a Virtual Master has already connected to the target panel the G4 device retains the information of the previous Virtual Master System number e Reboot the panel without the USB cable plugged into the panel e Configure NetLinx Studio for a Virtual Master connection Note the System Number used in t
38. Master from your System Administrator If you do not have an IP Address for the Master refer to your particular Master s instruction manual for more information on obtaining this IP Address using NetLinx Studio 2 x e From the Online Tree tab of the Workspace window select the NetLinx Master Follow steps outlined in either the Obtaining or Assigning the Master s IP Address sections from your particular NetLinx Master instruction manual to use an address Note the IP Address and Gateway information 2 Launch NetLinx Studio 2 x default location is Start gt Programs gt AMX Control Disc gt NetLinx Studio 2 gt NetLinx Studio 2 3 Select Settings gt Master Communication Settings from the Main menu to open the Master Communication Settings dialog FIG 80 4 Click the Communications Settings button to open the Communications Settings dialog 5 Click on the NetLinx Master radio button from the Platform Selection section to indicate you are working with a NetLinx Master such as the NXC ME260 64 or NI Series of Integrated Controllers 6 Click on the TCP IP radio button from the Transport Connection Option section to indicate you are connecting to the Master through an IP Address 7 Click the Edit Settings button on the Communications Settings dialog to open the TCP IP Settings dialog FIG 80 This dialog contains a series of previously entered IP Address URLs and their associated names all of which are store
39. Menu Left Rounded 145 143 Menu Left Rounded 75 151 Menu Left Rounded 155 144 Menu Left Rounded 85 152 Menu Left Rounded 165 145 Menu Left Rounded 95 153 Menu Left Rounded 175 146 Menu Left Rounded 105 154 Menu Left Rounded 185 147 Menu Left Rounded 115 155 Menu Left Rounded 195 148 Menu Left Rounded 125 A Button Commands These Button Commands are used in NetLinx Studio and are case insensitive All commands that begin with have the capability of assigning a variable text address range and button state range A device must first be defined in the NetLinx programming language with values for the Device Port System in all programming examples Panel is used in place of these values e Variable text ranges allow you to target 1 or more variable text channels in a single command e Button State ranges allow you to target 1 or more states of a variable text button with a single command e Character is used for the through notation also the amp character is used for the And notation A Button Commands ANI Syntax Run a button ANI lt vt addr range gt lt start state gt lt end state gt lt time gt animation Variable in 1 10 second variable text address range 1 4000 start state Beginning of button state 0 current state end state End of button state time In 1 10 second intervals Example SEND_COMMAND Panel ANI 500 1 25 100 Runs a button animation at text range
40. Panel for USB Communication ccccceceeeeeeeeeeee 195 Step 1 Setup the Panel and PC for USB Communication ccccccccceeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeee 195 Step 2 Confirm the Installation of the USB Driver on the PC 0 eseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeee 196 How to Upload a Certificate File s ccsicncscsisscccctncsnescsnuse csc cvessscestsnessencusoeecesessvenseseunee 197 TROUDIESNOORING ssacsccsirsssassseswovecnanionsseesaniansducenessvanathonsscensbsnesawannanusussdaweneeinaisnls 201 Introduction NOTE The NXT D CV7 7 Modero Widescreen Color Video Touch Panels FIG 1 are the industry s first widescreen mini touch panels and are available only through AMX DRAPES POOL bac SECURITY k oo0o0 FIG 1 Sample 7 Video Touch Panels These Color Video CV panels display NTSC PAL SECAM video formats within variable sized windows They include a built in microphone speakers audio headphone connector and six NetLinx programmable pushbuttons available on NXD models only when mounted with included Button Trim Ring Table Top models use AMX s exclusive SmoothTilt technology for effortless adjustment of the viewing angle Each panel is sold only as part of a CV7 Kit which includes both a panel and an NXA AVB ETHERNET Audio Video Breakout Box FG2254 10 This box facilitates the installation and distribution of video either Composite or S Video data via Ethernet and audio to Modero touch panels locat
41. System Settings Modero ipisettings WEgtay ea sedan A NetLinx Master s connection connection information information MAC Address from panel is factory set to a unique address FIG 51 System Settings page A USB connection type is a direct connection from the panel s mini USB port to a corresponding USB port on the PC acting as a Virtual Master NOTE An Ethernet connection type involves indirect communication from the panel to a Master via an Ethernet connection to the network Q There are 2 possible Master Connection Types available USB or Ethernet It is recommended that firmware KIT files only be transferred over a direct connection and only when the panel is connected to a power supply If battery power or wireless connection fails during a firmware upgrade the panel flash file system may become corrupted The mini USB connector MUST be plugged into an already active panel before the PC can recognize the connection and assign an appropriate USB driver This driver is part of both the NetLinx Studio and TPDesign4 software application installations Configuring and Using USB with a Virtual Master NetLinx Studio can be setup to run a Virtual Master where the PC acts as the Master by supplying its own IP Address for communication to the panel The PC is first equipped with the USB driver the panel is then configured for USB communication and then Studio is configured to act as the Master For a personal computer to e
42. System Tray e Double click on the icon to bring up the list of USB devices you should see the AMX USB LAN LINK device in the list If the Install Driver dialog doesn t appear automatically select the Properties button and then the Update Driver button e When the Install Driver dialog does appear click Next to accept all the default prompts e The OS will notify you that the driver you are installing updating does not have a digital signature This is acceptable agree to continue the installation After installation is complete the exclamation point should disappear When using G4 WebControl to communicate with a target panel a VNC Server dialog appears on my screen During a WebControl connection to a target panel you are prompted with a G4 Authentication dialog which asks you to enter the assigned password for the panel before gaining access e If you are ever prompted with a VNC Server dialog you must enter the IP Address of the target panel This can be found within the Setup gt Protected Setup gt System Settings page This IP Address of the panel appears within the IP Settings section of this page Enter the IP Address and click OK You will then be prompted with the G4 Authentication popup where you must enter the panel s WebControl password While attempting to communicate directly with the Virtual Master on the PC via a USB connection can t get my communication icon to turn Gre
43. This equipment generates uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions may cause harmful interference to radio communications However there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures e Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna e Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected e Consult the dealer or an experienced radio TV technician for help FCC RF Radiation Exposure Statement This transmitter must not be co located or operating in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter This equipment complies with FCC RF radiation exposure limits set forth for an uncontrolled environment This equipment should be installed an operated with a minimum distance of 20 centimeters between the radiator and your body Table of Contents INGPORUCUON sssri eenander Ea sisare eiras anios issa aiaiai 1 GV7 Specifications sirsssssssretssrsspissers einne porearea Eoee nise S SIESS T ERTSE SES ESER SEEE 3 CV7 Panels Connect r Layout ssrssssiesresssssiosssnssses trios esko sssusa sese
44. Web Control page on the panel 11 Click OK to send the password to the panel and begin the session A confirmation message appears stating Please wait Initial screen loading The secondary window then becomes populated with the same G4 page being displayed on the target G4 panel A small circle appears within the on screen G4 panel page and corresponds to the location of the mouse cursor A left mouse click on the computer displayed panel page equates to an actual touch on the target G4 panel page Upgrading Modero Firmware Overview Before beginning the Upgrade process e Setup and configure your NetLinx Master Refer to the your particular NetLinx Master Instruction Manual for detailed setup procedures e Calibrate and prepare the communication pages on the Modero panel for use Refer to the Panel Calibration section on page 47 Only CV7 firmware should be loaded onto ithis specific panel type This new firmware also provides both backwards compatibility with the previous NOTE 802 11b cards and new security protocols for the new 802 119 wireless CF card The latest CV7 firmware kit file is now panel specific e Refer to the NetLinx Studio version 2 x Help file for more information on uploading files via Ethernet e Configure your panel for either direct connect or wireless communication Refer to the Configuring Communication section on page 49 for more information connection and only when the panel is connected to a
45. a a e E E E O T 161 PTIEG E E T E T ERE EE E E E E NT 161 ATIER E E I EE E 161 ALLO EAN EEE E T E EET 161 GPa E E E E A E T A 162 UND A A E E E 162 Text Effect Names scsissisnccsssssscesencccssesnsiseacseceessudossuddsateosdecsosasatesedsucedeseedacssduboazscees 163 Button Query Commands ssccisccaviocsicded cncsressstetaceckinesscccvedaeeueczuce umscboevereepevioumieonateus 163 TALE EEEE E E T E E E EOR 165 PBR A A a E E ET 165 PBT E E E A T E E 166 BMP eso a S EE E aT E EE EE E E EEE E S 166 PBOP E EE E A E E OE E 167 PBRD seigne reses EE EE EEE E EEE AER E RE 167 PBWW AEE ET E E E E E 168 PEON a E T E T ETE EEA A ET 168 PIC O E E E E A E E E E 169 PUSB EN EE A E T E EEE E EEEO E E 169 DIS EE E E A A E E A O E 170 TELE ETEA EEE E E TE AEE TT O E EET ETE 170 ra eE E E E E E T 171 a BP E EAE E E EEE 171 Panel Runtime Operations sis wivssedessonssacssedesseussasisucesssavisntvedsessavtordommnsunnseanasuns 172 PEEP isiscccceteatssnscscuaiecedaieeteesstesterceicatwoss uous iauuededvesdcaagudescastecadeeabeuscuacea snes E 172 PAD BEEP sccisccccsctacosssvsscussastaiavssvasscnvacssesasusaunscasosascauaessessaahaeceessseusdeuaaaseuuaossscsssdasssesdssscussaccessones 172 CID E A E E A E E E E 172 EJN A E AA EE E T 173 A DAE E E E T E E E 173 PKEY EEN E T E E E 173 A E A E E 173 Q AKP E EA EE E E A EE E 173 ALR ia e E E EEEE EEEE E E E RRE 174 BEEP sisstin enee eoe NE EEE EEEE EE EENE EEO Er E EAE 174 BRIT een EI E cons EE E E E E E E E E 174 BR i E
46. all panels in a wireless network that are communicating to the same target WAP e This is required by the WAP before the panel is permitted to join the wireless network e It is case sensitive and must not exceed 32 characters which may be any keyboard character Make sure this setting is the same for all points in your wireless network e This unique string identifies the network and is the same string for all users on the same network e Use the on screen keyboard s Clear button to completely erase any previously stored SSID information Note In all cases the SSID of the WAP must be entered If it is left blank the panel will try to connect to the first access point which can be found that sup ports EAP In this situation however a successful connection is not guaranteed because the identified WAP may be connected to a RADIUS server which does not support the specified EAP type and or may not have the proper user identities configured Wireless Security EAP PEAP Cont Identity When pressed the panel displays an on screen keyboard which allows you to enter an EAP Identity string which is how the panel identifies itself to the Authentication RADIUS Server e This information is similar to a username used to login to a secured server or workstation This works in tandem with the Password string which is similar to the password entered to gain access to a secured workstation Note Typically this is in the
47. and 8Y 3000 product models will be free of defects in materials and manufacture at the time of sale and will remain in good working order for a period of three 3 years following the date of the original sales invoice from AMX The three year warranty period will be extended to the life of the product Limited Lifetime Warranty if the warranty card is filled out by the dealer and or end user and returned to AMX so that AMX receives it within thirty 30 days of the installation of equipment but no later than six 6 months from original AMX sales invoice date The life of the product extends until five 5 years after AMX ceases manufacturing the product model The Limited Lifetime Warranty applies to products in their original installation only If a product is moved to a different installation the Limited Lifetime Warranty will no longer apply and the product warranty will instead be the three 3 year Limited Warranty All products returned to AMX require a Return Material Authorization RMA number The RMA number is obtained from the AMX RMA Department The RMA number must be clearly marked on the outside of each box The RMA is valid for a 30 day period After the 30 day period the RMA will be cancelled Any shipments received not consistent with the RMA or after the RMA is cancelled will be refused AMX is not responsible for products returned without a valid RMA number AMX is not liable for any damages caused by its products or for the failure
48. and an identical Current Key value e As an example all panels should be set to Default Key 1 and be using aa bb cc as the Current Key string value This same Key value and Current Key string should be used on the target WAP Repeat steps 3 on each panel Using the same passphrase generates the same key for all communicating Modero panels Configuring a Wired Ethernet Connection It is necessary to tell the panel which Master it should be communicating with This pointing to a Master is done via the System Settings page where you configure the IP Address System Number and Username Password information assigned to the target Master If you have previously established a wireless connection to the Internet you must still navigate to the System Settings page and configure the communication parameters for the target Master Until those parameters are configured your Connection Status icon will remain red indicating there is no current connection to a Master e Ifyou have previously configured an internal wireless card for communication to the Internet you do not need to configure the panel s IP Settings fields and can skip the following Step 1 Step1 Configure the Panel s Wired IP Settings There are only two available methods of communicating to a target Master over the Internet Wireless via an internal card or Wired direct Ethernet connection If you are not using an internal wireless card you can only configure the connecti
49. and the Radius server is setup to transfer the real identity of the user e There is no end user ability to select from the different types of PEAP e Additional Inner Authentication choices are available to the end user An EAP TTLS security method is designed for wireless environments where its necessary to first have the Radius server directly validate the identity of the client panel before allowing it access to the network This validation is done by tunneling a connection through the WAP and directly between the panel and the Radius server By initially keeping the network out of the picture there is far more security validation going on behind the scenes before any possible access to the network is granted to the client Once the client is identified and then validated the Radius server disconnects the tunnel and allows the panel to access the network directly via the target WAP Refer to the EAP Authentication section on page 193 for further details on these security options Refer to the Using the Site Survey tool section on page 59 for more information on using this feature Pressing the EAP TTLS button opens the EAP TTLS Settings dialog FIG 109 SARTE SSID x Required Information Lani SSID Network Name used by the Target WAP Amenmose Identity similar to the Username used for network access gt Password similar to the Password used for network access Inner Authentication Type supported by Devicescape Pa
50. as Abc e Use the on screen keyboard s Clear button to completely erase any previously stored SSID information Save Cancel e Use the Save button to store the new security information incorporate it and then return to the previous Wireless Settings page e Use the Cancel button to cancel any updates to the security parameters and return to the previous Wireless Settings page OO l Wireless Settings Page Security Options Static WEP A Static WEP security method requires that both a target WAP be identified and an encryption method be implemented prior to establishing an active communication session In addition to providing both Open and Shared Authentication capabilities this page also supports Hexadecimal and ASCII keys Refer to the Configuring a Wireless Connection section on page 57 for further details on these security options Refer to the Using the Site Survey tool section on page 59 for more information on using this feature Pressing the Static WEP button opens the Static WEP Settings dialog FIG 102 Static WEP Settings Required Information gt SSID Network Name used by the Target WAP ae Encryption Method Default Key Passphrase a WEP Key assignment 7 Authentication Method FIG 102 Wireless Settings page Static WEP security method Wireless Security Static WEP Settings SSID Service Set Identifier The SSID is the unique name used on the WAP and then assign
51. audio and video signals to the touch panel panel type dependant Rear Components 6 pin 3 5 mm Phoenix connector for in bound left right channel audio 4 pin 3 5 mm Phoenix connector for out bound from microphone audio BNC connector female for Composite or Chroma video capable panels only BNC connector female for luminance video capable panels only e RJ 45 connector for Ethernet input from the control system e 2 pin 3 5 mm Phoenix connector for in bound power NXA AVB ETHERNET Specifications Cont Included Accessories Two 2 pin Phoenix connectors 41 5025 4 pin Phoenix connector 41 5047 6 pin Phoenix connector 41 5063 e Rack Mount Kit KA2250 40 with mounting bracket 62 2254 02 Other AMX Equipment AC RK Accessory RackMount Kit FG515 Modero Table Top Cable CA2250 50 Installing the NXA AVB ETHERNET A 12 VDC compliant power supply can indirectly provide power to a Modero panel by routing power through the NXA AVB ETHERNET Breakout Box FIG 5 shows a sample wiring configuration using both an indirect or direct power connection for a video capable Modero panel Indirect Etheimetin Mic Out gt Line Level out Connect RJ 45 4 pin captive wire to amplifier 12 VDC power Video In Audion VOL card supply BNC 6 pin captive wire rear Power supplied via front NXA AVB box Ethernet Audio Video 12 VDC pow
52. becomes the active panel functions and no power is routed to the base for charging e Adjust the Display Timeout value to allow the panel to commence the Sleep Mode and begin charging batteries within the base drawing power from a PSN e Refer to the Battery Base Page section on page 96 for more information My WEP doesn t seem to be working WEP will not work unless the same default key is set on both the panel and the Access Point e For example if you had your access point set to default key 4 which was 01 02 03 04 05 you must also set the Modero s panel key 4 to 01 02 03 04 05 NetLinx Studio only detects one of my connected Masters Each Master is give a Device Address of 00000 e Only one Master can be assigned to a particular System number If you want to work with multiple Masters open different instances of NetLinx Studio and assign each Master its own System value e Example a site has an NXC ME260 64 and an NI 4000 In order to work with both units The ME260 64 can be assigned System 1 and the NI 4000 can then be assigned System 2 using two open sessions of NetLinx Studio 2 I can t seem to connect to a NetLinx Master using my NetLinx Studio 2 x application e From the Settings gt Master Comm Settings gt Communication Settings gt Settings for TCP IP uncheck the Automatically Ping the Master Controller to ensure availability The pinging is to determine if the Master
53. being used as the Virtual Master This IP Address can also be obtained by following these procedures On your PC click Start gt Run to open the Run dialog e Enter cmd into the Open field and click OK to open the command DOS prompt e From the C gt command line enter ipconfig to display the IP Address of the PC This information is entered into the Master IP URL field on the panel 9 Click OK three times to close the open dialogs save your settings and return to the main NetLinx Studio application eT 10 Click the OnLine Tree tab in the Workspace window to view the devices on the Virtual System The default System value is one 11 Right click on the Empty Device Tree System entry and select Refresh System to re populate the list 12 Power up your panel and press and hold the grey Front Setup Access button for 3 seconds to continue with the setup process and proceed to the Setup page 13 Select Protected Setup gt System Settings located on the lower left to open the System Settings page FIG 70 The System Number is assigned to the Master within the AMX software application these must match System Settings m IP Settings Master Connection 4 Enter the IP Address information of the PC used as a Virtual Master When using a Virtual Master there is no need to enter a username and or password FIG 70 Sample System Settings page for Virtual Master communication 14 Press the blue T
54. download Modero panels are factory setup with specific demo touch panel pages The first splash screen that appears indicates the panel is receiving power beginning to load firmware and preparing to display the default touch panel pages When the panel is ready the AMX Splash Screen is replaced by the Initial Panel Page FIG 45 AMX Splash Screen Initial Panel Page appears during power up AMX Logo Page FIG 45 AMX splash screen and initial Panel Page Calibrating the Modero Panel 1 Press and hold the grey Front Setup Access button FIG 46 for 6 seconds to pass over the Setup page and access the Calibration setup page FIG 47 N IN Rs Front Setup Access button grey 3 second press hold Opens the Setup page 6 second press hold Opens the Calibration page Single press puts the panel to sleep FIG 46 Location of Front Setup Access button 2 Press the crosshairs on the Calibration page to set the calibration points on the LCD FIG 47 Calibrate The request to touch the crosshairs is the first on screen message Calibration successful is the second Touch each target in on screen message that appears tum to calibrate after the calibration process is completed Calibration Successful Touch to continue On screen crosshairs used for calibration of the touch device FIG 47 Touch Panel Calibration Screens 3 After the Calibration Successful message appears press anywhere
55. end of the power cable from the power supply Don t disconnect the connectors from the touch panel The unit must be installed with the necessary connectors before being inserted into the solid surface 8 Carefully slide the main unit into the cutout until the Mounting Tabs of the CV7 unit lie flush against the wall 9 Insert and secure four 4 40 Mounting Screws included into their corresponding holes located along the sides of the NXD CV7 using a grounded Phillips head screwdriver until the unit is secure and flush against the wall FIG 41 10 Place the Faceplate Trim Ring assembly A in FIG 41 back onto the main unit B in FIG 41 Make sure to align the Microphone Light and PIR Motion sensor locations to their respective openings on the front bezel faceplate NOTE 11 12 Reconnect the terminal RJ 45 Ethernet USB and any optional audio video wiring to their respective locations on either the NXA AVB ETHERNET Breakout Box Ethernet port or NetLinx Master Reconnect the terminal power connector on the 12 VDC compliant power supply and apply power Installing an NXD CV7 into an optional Rack Mount Kit NXA RK7 The NXA RK7 is a 19 48 3 cm wide metal rack mount with black matte finish measuring 4 rack units high 1 2 Remove the Faceplate Trim Ring assembly from the main CV7 unit Thread the incoming power RJ 45 audio video Ethernet and USB wiring from their terminal sources throu
56. entered FAST Flexible Authentication via Secure Tunneling was developed by Cisco Systems and has been described as being as secure as PEAP while being as easy to setup as LEAP EAP FAST does use a certificate file however it can be configured to download that certificate automatically the first time that the panel tries to authenticate itself Automatic certificate downloading is more convenient but slightly less secure since its the certificate which is transferred wirelessly and could then be sniffed out An EAP FAST security method is designed for wireless environments where both security and ease of setup are balanced together Refer to the EAP Authentication section on page 193 for further details on these security options Refer to the Using the Site Survey tool section on page 59 for more information on using this feature Pressing the EAP FAST button opens the EAP FAST Settings dialog FIG 106 SAR RASI SSID Required Information SSID Network Name used by the Target WAP ey j Identity similar to the Username used for network access z Anonymous Identity similar to a fictitious call sign Password similar to the Password used for network access Identity Password Automatic FAG Provisioning Enabled PAG File location fast pac_file Save Cance FIG 106 Wireless Settings page EAP FAST security method Wireless Security EAP FAST Settings SSID Service Set Identifier The SSID
57. external PC running a VNC client to access the panel after the remaining fields are configured Network Interface Select Displays the detected method of communication to the web Wired is used when a direct Ethernet connection is being used for communication to the web This is a default setting if no wireless interface card is detected by the panel e Wireless is used when a wireless card is detected within the internal card slot This method provides an indirect communication to the web via a pre configured Wireless Access Point Web Control Name Allows you to enter a unique alpha numeric string that is used as the display name of the panel within the Manage WebControl Connections window of the new NetLinx Security browser window e This Web Control tab displays a G4 icon alongside the link to the Web Control Name given to this panel FIG 95 Web Control Password Allows you to enter the G4 Authentication session password associated for VNC web access of this panel Web Control Port Allows you to enter the port value that the VNC Web Server runs on Default value is 5900 Maximum Number of This read only field displays the maximum number of users that can be Connections simultaneously connected to the target panel via the web Default value is 1 Current Connection Count This read only field displays the current number of users connected to the target panel via the web This value cannot exceed the Maximum nu
58. form of a username such as jdoe amx com e Use the on screen keyboard s Clear button to completely erase any previously stored identity username information Password When pressed the panel displays an on screen keyboard which allows you to enter the network password string specified for the user entered within the Identity field This is also how the panel identifies itself to the Authentication RADIUS Server e This information is similar to the password entered to gain access to a secured workstation e Use the on screen keyboard s Clear button to completely erase any previously stored passwords Certificate Authority When pressed the panel displays an on screen Certificate Authority CA File Location keyboard which allows you to enter the name of the certificate authority file which is used to validate the server certificate This field is optional If a server certificate is used it should first be downloaded into the panel and the Certificate Authority field should then be set to the name of that certificate file No file path should be used for this setting as all certificates are stored in a specific directory that the user cannot control or change e Use the on screen keyboard s Clear button to completely erase any previously stored network path information PEAP Version When pressed this field cycles through the choices of available PEAP PEAPv0 PEAPv1 or PEAPv1 w peaplabel 1 Inner Authenticati
59. four pan head housing screws to remove the back box 2 per side i A FIG 22 Location of the attachment screws and connector overlay release latches on an NXD back box 3 Firmly press down on both connector overlay release latches located in front of the connectors Pressing down releases the connector overlay from atop the connectors The overlay connector must first be released before the rear back box can be removed from the NXD CV7 panel 4 Gently slide the connector overlay away from the back box housing 5 Unscrew the outer housing back box by using a grounded Phillips head screwdriver to remove the two sets of pan head Housing Screws located on both sides of the housing FIG 22 D CAUTION Caution Speaker wires come connected to this side of the main board Use caution when removing the back box Connector Overlay must first be removed from the side of the NXD Wireless CF card Slot 2 is located on the top slot FIG 23 Location of the wireless CF card connector on main board The circuit board comes pre wired to internal speakers located on the inside surface of the rear back box If the back box is removed incorrectly these speaker wires can become disconnected and damaged 6 Carefully lift off the back box h
60. gently push the rear of the panel downwards until it is mounted atop the battery base Battery locking mechanism Alignment with locking pegs slider FIG 29 NXA BASE 1 shown aligning with NXT CV7 panel through a connected power supply and then be connected to a battery base Q The battery base CANNOT be hot swapped An NXT can not be receiving power Always POWER OFF the panel before installing the NXA BASE 1 CAUTION 8 Slide the rear battery locking slider in the opposite direction This turns the latching mechanism and secures the panel to the base 9 Upon successful connection the AMX logo appears on the panel to indicate that the panel is properly connected and receiving power Charging the NXT BP using the NXA BASE 1 1 Insert the single battery into the battery compartment shown in FIG 28 on page 26 2 Follow the procedures from the previous sub section to attach the NXT CV7 to the NXA BASE 1 3 Insert a 2 pin connector from a power supply to the rear PWR connector on the NXT CV7 Modero panel Refer to the Battery Base Page section on page 96 to view the charging progress of the connected NXT BP NXT CHG Battery Charger Kit FG2255 50K The NXT CHG Kit includes one charger and two NXT BP batteries The optional NXT CHG Modero Power Station FIG 30 is a two slot stand alone battery charger that can be used to recharge up to two NXT BP batteries The batteries are charged in the order they are inserted in
61. group which has a popup displayed on the current page along with the new pop up the Add a specific i displayed popup will be hidden and the new popup will be displayed popup page toa specified popup Syntax group APG lt popup page name gt lt popup group name gt Variable popup page name 1 50 ASCII characters Name of the popup page popup group name 1 50 ASCII characters Name of the popup group Example SEND_COMMAND Panel APG Popup1 Group1 Adds the popup page Popup1 to the popup group Group1 Page Commands Cont CPG Clear all popup pages from specified popup group Syntax CPG lt popup group name gt Variable popup group name 1 50 ASCII characters Name of the popup group Example SEND_COMMAND Panel CPG Group1 Clears all popup pages from the popup group Group1 DPG Delete a specific popup page from specified popup group if it exists Syntax DPG lt popup page name gt lt popup group name gt Variable popup page name 1 50 ASCII characters Name of the popup page popup group name 1 50 ASCII characters Name of the popup group Example SEND_COMMAND Panel DPG Popup1 Group1 Deletes the popup page Popup1 from the popup group Group1 PDR Set the popup location reset flag If the flag is set the popup will return to its default location on show instead of its last drag location Syntax
62. in the color commands by preceding the HEX code with the sign In this case 00 becomes invisible and FF becomes opaque If the opacity is set to zero 0 this does not make the button inactive only invisible Syntax BOP lt vt addr range gt lt button states range gt lt button opacity gt Variable variable text address range 1 4000 button states range 1 256 for multi state buttons 0 All states for General buttons 1 Off state and 2 On state button opacity 0 invisible 255 opaque Example SEND_COMMAND Panel BOP 500 504 amp 510 515 1 200 Example 2 SEND_COMMAND Panel BOP 500 504 amp 510 515 1 C8 Both examples set the opacity of the buttons with the variable text range of 500 504 and 510 515 to 200 A Button Commands Cont ABOR Set a border to a specific border style associated with a border value for those buttons with a defined address range Refer to theBorder Styles table on page 141 for more information Syntax BOR lt vt addr range gt lt border style name or border value gt Variable variable text address range 1 4000 border style name Refer to the Border Styles table on page 141 border value 0 41 Examples SEND_COMMAND Panel BOR 500 504 amp 510 515 10 Sets the border by number 10 to those buttons with the variable text range of 500 504 amp 510 515 SEND_COMMAND Panel BOR 500 504 amp 510 AMX Sets the
63. is entered into the Master Connection section of the System Settings page and the panel is restarted If the G4 panel does not appear refer to the Troubleshooting section on page 201 for more information Step 3 Confirm and Upgrade the firmware via the USB port Use the CC USB Type A to Mini B 5 wire programming cable FG10 5965 to provide communication between the mini USB Program port on the touch panel and the PC This method of communication is used to transfer firmware Kit files and TPD4 touch panel files A mini USB connection is only detected after it is installed onto an active panel Connection to a previously powered panel which then reboots allows the PC to detect the panel and assign an appropriate USB driver 1 Verify this direct USB connection Type A on the panel to mini USB on the panel is configured properly using the steps outlined in the previous two sections With the panel already configured for USB communication and the Virtual Master setup within NetLinx Studio its now time to verify the panel is ready to receive files After the Communication Verification dialog window verifies active communication between the Virtual Master and the panel click the OnLine Tree tab in the Workspace window FIG 78 to view the devices on the Virtual System The default System value is one Right click on the System entry FIG 78 and select Refresh System to re populate the list Verify the panel appears in the OnLine Tree
64. locations 0 1 2 13 415 16 Zero can be used for an absolute position 7 8 9 Example SEND_COMMAND Panel JST 500 504 amp 510 515 1 amp 2 1 Sets the text alignment to the upper left corner for those buttons with variable text ranges of 500 504 amp 510 515 AMBT Set the Mouse Button mode On for the virtual PC Syntax MBT lt pass data gt Variable pass data 0 None 1 Left 2 Right 3 Middle Example SEND COMMAND Panel MBT 1 Sets the mouse button mode to Left Mouse Click AMDC Syntax Turn On the mcAMDC Mouse _ Example double click a i feature for the SEND COMMAND Panel MDC virtual PC Sets the mouse double click for use with the virtual PC ASHO Syntax Show or hide a button with a set variable text range SHO lt vt addr range gt lt command value gt Variable variable text address range 1 4000 command value 0 hide 1 show Example SEND_COMMAND Panel SHO 500 504 amp 510 515 0 Hides buttons with variable text address range 500 504 amp 510 515 A Button Commands Cont ASKT Receive touch information on specified socket Syntax SKT lt 0 disable socket greater than 1023 enable socket on specified port gt Only socket values equal to or greater than 1024 are valid The panel will open up a TCP listening socket on the port specified User or 3rd party program can connect
65. more detailed information System Settings Press the System Settings button to access the System Settings page where you can alter the communication parameters of both the NetLinx Master and Modero panel e Refer to the System Settings Page section on page 130 for more detailed information Protected Setup Page The Protected Setup page FIG 91 centers around the properties used by the panel to properly communicate with the NetLinx Master Enter the factory default password 1988 into the password keypad to access this page Protected Setup Device Number y 3 Reboot Panel d zs Provides access to the panel 4 Reboot firmware pages by enabling the grey front setup access button Setup page after a 3 second press hold System Recovery 4 eee Calibration page after a 6 second press hold FIG 91 Protected Setup page showing default values The elements of the Protected Setup page are described in the table below Protected Setup Page Elements Back Saves the changes and returns you to the previously active touch panel page Connection Status icon This visual display of the connection status allows the user to have a current visual update of the panel s connection status regardless of what page is currently active A Lock only appears on the icon if the panel has established a connection with a currently secured target Master requiring a username and password Device Numb
66. more information EF lt text effect name gt Set the text effect EC lt text effect color gt Set the text effect color ML lt max length gt Set the maximum length of a text area MK lt input mask gt Set the input mask of a text area NVL lt 0 1 gt Log On Log Off the computer control connection N lt network name gt Set network connection name P lt password gt Set the network connection password Example SEND_COMMAND Panel BMF 500 1 B10 CFRed CB Blue SCTBlack Ptest png Sets the button OFF state as well as the Border Fill Color Border Color Text Color and Bitmap A Button Commands Cont ABMI Set the button mask image ABML Set the maximum length of the text area button Mask image is used to crop a borderless button to a non square shape This is typically used with a bitmap Syntax BMI lt vt addr range gt lt button states range gt lt mask image gt Variable variable text address range 1 4000 button states range 1 256 for multi state buttons 0 All states for General buttons 1 Off state and 2 On state mask image Graphic file used Example SEND_COMMAND Panel BMI 530 1 amp 2 newMac png Sets the button with variable text 530 ON OFF state mask image to newmac png ABMI lt variable text address range gt lt button states range gt lt mask image gt Set the Chameleon Image button propert
67. of the Rough In Box ssesssseeeeeesesssssrsersesesereceressrsesseseseeeeeeesssee 34 Installation of an NXD Touch Panel eeeesseesesssesessseeseseeserserssssssesereeereeersssssseseeseeees 35 Installing the NXD panel within a Rough In BoXx ccssssssssssssscesesesssssssssssssseseeeseseens 35 Installing the NXD into drywall using Expansion Clips cccccccssssssssssssssseeseeeceeeees 37 Installing the NXD into a Flat Surface using 4 SCreWS ssscccscsssssccessssssecessssseeeens 40 Installing an NXD CV7 into an optional Rack Mount Kit NXA RK7 ccssesseeeeees 42 Wiring Guidelines for the CV7 Panels cccccsssssssssssssssceccecesssessssssseeceeeseeseseees 43 Preparing Captive WIreS sccceccsssssssssceeceeecesssesssesceesceeseceaacesceescesccesssseeseeeeesseseseess 43 Wiring a power CONNECTION ccccsssseseeeeeeeeeesssesseesceeseeeesesseeseeecesececsseassoecoescesssesseeseee 43 Audio Video Port Connections and Wiring ssssssccscscccssecssssssssssssssseseesesseess 44 Ethernet RJ 45 Port Connections and Wiring ssssssssssessseeeceesscssssssseeeeeeeees 44 USB Port Connecting and Using Input Devices sssssssscsesecesesscesssssssseeeeeeees 45 Panel Calibration susisvsscccdasicsaiassecowessssinencasunenssucleasabuaewaieackuaasweatbouenbarivansevaeudelees 47 OTT AEA E E ES 47 Calibrating the Modero Panel i 50 02 ccsscseessessssensspeccecessenssnees
68. on page 33 for more detailed faceplate installation information NXT BP Power Pack FG2255 10 The NXT BP Power Pack FIG 24 is a rechargeable Lithium Ion smart battery used to provide power to the NXT Modero panel through the NXA BASE 1 Battery Base This battery incorporates an on board battery life indicator The NXT BP battery can be charged through either the base when connected to the CV7 panel or through an optional NXT CHG Modero Power Station Although this product is included within the NXA BASE 1 Kit FG2255 05K extra NXT BP Power Packs FG2255 10 can be purchased separately as an optional accessory FIG 24 NXT BP Power Pack NXT BP Specifications Dimensions HWD 0 69 x 3 50 x 5 81 1 75 cm x 8 89 cm x 14 76 cm Power Voltage e 11 1 Volts nominal Weight e Single NXT BP Power Pack 1 0 Ibs 0 45 kg Features e Battery Usage 4 to 8 hours time is usage dependant e Charge Capacity 6300mAh Operating Storage Operating Temperature 0 C 32 F to 40 C 104 F Environment Operating Humidity 20 85 RH e Storage Discharge Temperature 20 C 4 F to 60 C 140 F e Storage Humidity 5 85 RH NXA BASE 1 Battery Base Kit FG2255 05K The NXA BASE 1 Kit contains a single NXT BP battery and one battery base The NXA BASE 1 FIG 25 is a Modero accessory that allows an NXT CV7 touch panel to function off the charge from a single internally connected NXT BP battery Th
69. on using this feature Pressing the Open Clear Text button opens the Open Clear Text Settings dialog Open Glear Text Settings Required Information SSID Network Name used by the Target WAP By default this field displays the SSID AMX FIG 101 Wireless Settings page Open Clear Text security method Wireless Security Open Clear Text Settings SSID Service Set Identifier The SSID is the unique name used on the WAP and then assigned to all panels in a wireless network that are communicating to the same target WAP e This is required by the WAP before the panel is permitted to join the wireless network e It is case sensitive and must not exceed 32 characters which may be any keyboard character Make sure this setting is the same for all points in your wireless network e This unique string identifies the network and is the same string for all users on the same network e From the Network Name SSID keyboard enter the SSID name used on your target Wireless Access Point case sensitive The card should be given the SSID used by the target WAP If this field is left blank the unit will attempt to connect to the first available WAP By default all WAP200Gs use AMX as their assigned SSID value One of the most common problems associated with connection to a WAP arise because the SSID was not entered properly You must maintain the same case when entering the SSID information ABC is not the same
70. or exported i into or to a national or resident of Cuba Iraq Libya North Korea Iran Syria or any other coun try to which the United States has embargoed goods or ii anyone on the United States Treasury Department s list of Specially Designated Nationals or the U S Commerce Department s Table of Deny Orders AMX does not authorize the downloading or exporting of any software or technical data from this site to any jurisdiction prohibited by the United States Export Laws This Agreement replaces and supersedes all previous AMX Software License Agreements and is governed by the laws of the State of Texas and all disputes will be resolved in the courts in Collin County Texas USA For any questions concern ing this Agreement or to contact AMX for any reason please write AMX License and Warranty Department 3000 Research Drive Richardson TX 75082 FCC Information This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules Operation is subject to the following two conditions 1 this device may not cause harmful interference and 2 this device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired operation Federal Communications Commission FCC Statement This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC rules These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation
71. page are described in the table below System Settings Page Elements Back Saves the changes and returns you to the previously active touch panel page Connection Status icon This visual display of the connection status allows the user to have a current visual update of the panel s connection status regardless of what page is currently active A Lock only appears on the icon if the panel has established a connection with a currently secured target Master requiring a username and password System Settings Page Elements Cont IP Settings Sets the IP communication values for the panel and contains DHCP Static Sets the panel to either DHCP or Static communication modes DHCP Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol assigns IP Addresses from client stations logging onto a TCP IP network via a DHCP server e Static IP is a permanent IP Address that is assigned to a node in a TCP IP network IP Address Sets the secondary IP Address assigned to the panel Subnet Mask Sets a subnetwork address to the panel e Subnetwork mask is the technique used by the IP protocol to filter messages into a particular network segment Subnet Gateway Sets a gateway value to the panel Gateway is a computer that either performs protocol conversion between different types of networks applications or acts as a go between two or more networks that use the same protocols Host Name Sets the host name of the
72. page name 1 50 ASCII characters Name of the popup page mode NONMODAL converts a previously Modal popup page to a NonModal MODAL converts a previously NonModal popup page to Modal modal 1 and non modal 0 Example SEND_COMMAND Panel PPM Popup1 Modal Sets the popup page Popup1 to Modal SEND_COMMAND Panel PPM Popup1 1 Sets the popup page Popup1 to Modal PPN If the page name is empty the current page is used see example 2 If the popup page is Activate a already on do not re draw it This command works in the same way as the Show Popup specific popup command in TPDesign4 page to launch on either a specified page or the current page Syntax PPN lt popup page name gt lt page name gt Variable popup page name 1 50 ASCII characters Name of the popup page page name 1 50 ASCII characters Name of the page the popup is displayed On Example SEND_COMMAND Panel PPN Popup1 Main Activates Popup1 on the Main page Example 2 SEND_COMMAND Panel PPN Popup1 Activates the popup page Popup1 on the current page PPT Set a specific popup page to timeout within a specified time If timeout is empty popup page will clear the timeout Syntax PPT lt popup page name gt lt timeout gt Variable popup page name 1 50 ASCII characters Name of the popup page timeout Timeout duration in 1 10ths of a second Example SEND_COMMAND Panel
73. panel Primary DNS Sets the address of the primary DNS server used for host name lookups e DNS Domain Name System is software that lets users locate computers on a local network or the Internet TCP IP network by host and domain The DNS server maintains a database of host names for its domain and their corresponding IP Addresses Secondary DNS Sets a secondary DNS value to the panel Domain Sets the unique name on the Internet to the panel for DNS look up e The panel belongs to the DNS domain Ethernet Mode Sets the speed of the Ethernet connection to the panel e Choices are Auto 10 Half Duplex 10 Full Duplex 100 Half Duplex or 100 Full Duplex MAC Address Displays a read only field that is factory set by AMX for the built in Ethernet interface Master Connection Sets the NetLinx Master communication values Type Sets the NetLinx Master to communicate with the panel via either USB or Ethernet This is based on the cable connection from the rear ICSNet is not a supported option on this panel e Ethernet is a CAT 5 cable 10 100Base T terminated in an RJ 45 connector used to network computers together and is used in most LAN local area networks This description is also used to refer to both wired and wireless communication e USB option cannot be used on Modero panels which are not equipped with a rear USB port Mode Cycles between the different connection modes URL Listen and Auto ETHE
74. passphrase and then AUTOMATICALLY generate all four WEP keys which are compatible only among Modero panels Note The code key generator on Modero panels use the same key generation formula Therefore this same Passphrase generates identical keys when done on any Modero because they all use the same Modero specific generator The Passphrase generator is case sensitive Take these WEP keys and enter them into the target WAP When also working with multiple panels these WEP Keys identical across all Modero panels must be entered manually into the target WAP Once all panels have been setup in this way these WEP keys can then be entered into the associated Wireless Access Point for ease of installation The Passphrase generator is unique to Modero panels The Key generator on these Modero panels are specific and do not generate the same keys as other external non AMX wireless devices Example If you enter the word apple into the Passphrase generator ona 3rd party Wireless Access Point it comes back with 1a 2b 3c 4d etc Entering the same apple in the Passphrase generator of any Modero panel generates a different key a1 b2 c3 d4 etc Only AMX Modero panels generate the same Current Key by using a unique Passphrase key generation technology A Current Key string when generated anywhere else will not match those created on the Modero panels Note The code key generator on Modero panels use the same key generation formula The pas
75. pressed instead of inserting the text into the text area Input Mask Next Field Char Character Meaning Start Next Field List End Next Field List An example from the above table or or Tells the system that after a user hits any of these keys proceed to the next text area input box Input mask operations Input Mask Operators change the behavior of the field in the following way Input Mask Operators Character Meaning lt Forces all characters to be converted to lowercase gt Forces all characters to be converted to uppercase A Sets the overflow flag for this field Input mask literals To define a literal character enter any character other than those shown in the above table including spaces and symbols A back slash causes the character that follows it to be displayed as the literal character For example A is displayed just as the letter A To define one of the following characters as a literal character precede that character with a back slash Text entry operation using Input Masks A keyboard entry using normal text entry is straightforward However once an input mask is applied the behavior of the keyboard needs to change to accommodate the input mask s requirement When working with masks any literal characters in the mask will be skipped by any cursor movement including cursor keys backspace and delete mow character should characters and al
76. side of the base FIG 16 This step helps prevent scratching of the LCD 2 Tilt the base forward so that both the bottom surface and Housing Screws are easily accessible Unscrew these four Housing Screws to remove the Circuit Board Cover DO NOT REMOVE th se screws They secure the plastic base front cover FIG 16 Location of the attachment screws underneath an NXT CV7 panel base LoL 3 While holding the outer housing and base plate at an angle to prevent it from sliding use a grounded Phillips head screwdriver to remove the four Housing Screws Note the location of the four plastic adhesive feet Once the outer housing is placed back onto the panel these feet must be placed back onto their original locations so they can fit into their provided openings on a Battery Base 4 Rotate the panel back over while gripping the entire unit and outer housing and rest the base back onto a flat surface 5 Gently tilt the LCD panel backwards to expose the Tilt Bracket Speaker assembly FIG 19 Tilt Bracket Speaker assembly Tilt Bracket Screws 2 These two screws must first be removed before being able to remove the outer housing Outer Housing _ SS AN if I A Hinge Brackets 2 FIG 17 Location of the Tilt Bracket screws 6 Locate the two screw holes at either sides of the front speaker grill and then use a grounded Phillips head screwdriver to remove the two Tilt Bracket Screws FIG 17 T
77. string 0 9999 Example SEND COMMAND Panel AKEP 12345 Pops up the Keypad and initializes the text string 12345 AKEYR Remove keyboard or keypad that was displayed using AKEYB AKEYP PKEYP Remove the AKB AKP PKP EKP or TKP commands Keyboard Syntax Keypad 1 AKEYR Example SEND COMMAND Panel AKEYR Removes the Keyboard Keypad AKP Keypad string is set to null on power up and is stored until power is lost The Prompt Text Pop up the is optional Syntax AKP lt initial text gt lt prompt text gt Variables 1 50 ASCII characters 1 50 ASCII characters initial text prompt text Example SEND COMMAND Panel AKP 12345678 ENTER PASSWORD Pops up the Keypad and initializes the text string 12345678 with prompt text ENTER PASSWORD Panel Runtime Operation Commands Cont AKR Remove keyboard or keypad that was displayed using AKEYB AKEYP PKEYP Remove the AKB AKP PKP EKP or TKP commands Keyboard Syntax Keypad 1 QAKR Example SEND COMMAND Panel AKR Removes the Keyboard Keypad BEEP Syntax Output a beep BEEP Example SEND COMMAND Panel BEEP Outputs a beep BRIT Syntax Set the panel BRIT lt brightness level gt brightness Variable brightness level 0 100 Example SEND COMMAND Panel BRIT 50 Sets the brightness level to 50 BRT Syntax Set the panel BRT lt brightness l
78. the Save option to launch a Save dialog where you can assign a name to the current list of addresses and then save the information as a TXT text file to a known location This application must be run from a local machine and should not be used from a remote network location 12 Select the target devices which be uploaded with the selected certificate These can either be individually selected by toggling the box next to the Send entry with the Type column selected as a group by clicking on the Check All radio box located at the top of the device IP Address listing 13 When you are ready to send the certificate file to the selected panels click the Send button to initiate the upload Once the Status field for each entry reads Done your upload was successfully completed Appendix B Wireless Technology 7 Modero Touch Panels 199 Appendix B Wireless Technology 200 7 Modero Touch Panels Troubleshooting This section describes the solutions to possible hardware firmware issues that could arise during the common operation of a Modero touch panel Troubleshooting Information Symptom Solution My USB drivers has a yellow exclamation point and doesn t appear to be working The USB driver was incorrectly installed and should be re installed e Power up the panel without the USB cable connected to the panel e Plug in the USB cable into the G4 panel You should see a USB icon show up in the
79. the button OFF state fill color information The result sent to the Master would be ButtonGet Id 529 Type 1012 Flag 0 VALUE1 1 VALUE2 9 VALUE3 0 TEXT FF8000FF TEXT LENGTH 9 Button Query Commands Cont BCT Syntax Get the current 2BCT lt vt addr range gt lt button states range gt text color Variable variable text address range 1 4000 button states range 1 256 for multi state buttons 0 All states for General buttons 1 Off state and 2 On state custom event type 1013 Flag Zero Value1 Button state number Value2 Actual length of string should be 9 Value3 Zero Text Hex encoded color value ex 000000FF Text length Color name length should be 9 Example SEND COMMAND Panel BCT 529 1 Gets the button OFF state text color information The result sent to Master would be ButtonGet Id 529 Type 1013 Flag 0 VALUE1 1 VALUE2 9 VALUE3 0 TEXT FFFFFEFF TEXT LENGTH 9 BMP Syntax Get the current 2BMP lt vt addr range gt lt button states range gt bitmap name Variable variable text address range 1 4000 button states range 1 256 for multi state buttons 0 All states for General buttons 1 Off state and 2 On state custom event type 1002 Flag Zero Value1 Button state number Value2 Actual length of string Value3 Zero Text String that represents the bitmap name Text length
80. the form of a username such as jdoe amx com e Use the on screen keyboard s Clear button to completely erase any previously stored identity username information Anonymous Identity When pressed the panel displays an on screen keyboard which allows you to enter an IT provided alpha numeric string which is similar to the username used as the identity but does not represent a real user e This information is used as a fictitious name which might be seen by wireless preying eyes such as sniffer programs during the initial connection and setup process between the panel and the Radius server In this way the real identity username will never be seen by anyone Note Typically this is in the form of a fictitious username such as anonymous amx com e Use the on screen keyboard s Clear button to completely erase any previously stored identity username information cl Wireless Security EAP FAST Settings Cont Password When pressed the panel displays an on screen keyboard which allows you to enter the network password string specified for the user entered within the Identity field This is also how the panel identifies itself to the Authentication RADIUS Server e This information is similar to the password entered to gain access to a secured workstation e Use the on screen keyboard s Clear button to completely erase any previously stored passwords Automatic PAC Provisioning This selection present
81. the list 10 Click Done once you are finished adding your panel information to the list 11 Press the on screen Reboot button to save any changes and restart the panel System Address reflects the value set in the Device Addressing tab ua o Poe PAdcrers Connection Status 99 99 99 99 1319 99 99 99 99 lt Looking Up IP gt 88 88 88 88 1319 88 88 88 88 lt Looking Up IP gt CI x Used to obtain an existing URL ua fess o List from Master Par is Used to set the URL List on Master FIG 71 URL List dialog Master Connection section NetLinx Master Ethernet IP Address Auto Mode In this mode enter the System Number of the NetLinx Master This mode instructs the Modero to search for a Master that uses the same System Number assigned within the Master Connection section and resides on the same Subnet as itself 1 Toggle the blue Type field until Ethernet is selected from the Master Connection section of the System Settings page 2 Press the Mode field until the choice cycles to the word Auto 3 Press the System Number field to launch a Keypad and enter the value for the system number of the NetLinx Master This value can be obtained from the NetLinx Studio program gt OnLine Tree of the Workspace window 4 Do not alter the IP Settings section of the System Settings page as these fields are not applicable to this connection mode 5 Enter a username and password into their respective fields if the targ
82. the main NXD unit Make sure to align the Microphone Light and PIR Motion sensor locations to their respective openings on the front faceplate bezel Reconnect the terminal RJ 45 audio video Ethernet and USB wiring to their respective terminal locations on either the NXA AVB ETHERNET Breakout Box Ethernet port or NetLinx Master Reconnect the terminal power connector on the 12 VDC compliant power supply and apply power DP WARNING DP WARNING Wiring Guidelines for the CV7 Panels CV7 panels use a 12 VDC compliant power supply to provide power to the panel via the 2 pin 3 5 mm mini Phoenix PWR connector Use the previously provided power requirement information to determine the power draw The incoming PWR and GND wires from the power supply must be connected to the corresponding locations within the PWR connector These units should only have one source of incoming power Using more than one source of power to the touch panel can result in damage to the internal components and a possible burn out Apply power to the panels only after installation is complete Preparing captive wires You will need a wire stripper and flat blade screwdriver to prepare and connect the captive wires Never pre tin wires for compression type connections Strip 0 25 inch 6 35 mm of insulation off all wires 2 Insert each wire into the appropriate opening on the connector according to the wiring diagrams and connector types described in
83. the right to alter specifications without notice at any time
84. the slot and there is activity from the corresponding Slot LED Refer to the Reading the NXT CHG LED Indicator section on page 29 section for LED information Recalibrating the batteries The recalibration process increases the accuracy of the battery charge level Recalibration of the batteries is only done upon a user request from the Modero on screen Battery Base page Recalibration can only be done within Slot 1 on the NXT CHG 1 Place the selected battery securely into Slot 1 left slot until there is activity on the Slot 1 LED 2 Push the Recalibration pushbutton located between the two slots to initiate recalibration in the left bay only CV7 Touch Panel Accessories 30 7 Modero Touch Panels Installation Overview NXT panels are mounted onto flat horizontal surfaces in either a stand alone or combo NXT atop an NXA BASE 1 battery base configuration NXD panels are installed into either a pre wall surface using a CB TP7 rough in wallbox or a solid surface using either solid surface or drywall screws It is recommended that if you are planning on upgrading your panel components LJ flash and wireless you do so before beginning any panel installations kd NOTE Unpacking the Panel 1 Inspect and confirm the contents of the shipment box to verify you have all specified parts Refer to the Specifications for 7 Widescreen Video Touch Panels section on page 3 for more information about included accessor
85. this section 3 Tighten the screws to secure the wire in the connector Do not tighten the screws excessively doing so may strip the threads and damage the connector Wiring a power connection To use the 2 pin 3 5 mm mini Phoenix connector with a 12 VDC compliant power supply the incoming PWR and GND wires from the external source must be connected to their corresponding locations on the connector FIG 42 PWR GND Power Supply To the Touch Panel FIG 42 NetLinx power connector wiring diagram 1 Insert the PWR and GND wires on the terminal end of the 2 pin 3 5 mm mini Phoenix cable Match the wiring locations of the on both the power supply and the terminal connector 2 Tighten the clamp to secure the two wires Do not tighten the screws excessively doing so may strip the threads and damage the connector 3 Verify the connection of the 2 pin 3 5 mm mini Phoenix to the external 12 VDC compliant power supply Audio Video Port Connections and Wiring The following table shows the signal and pinout pairing information used on the RJ 45 Audio and Video connections Audio Video RJ 45 Pinout Information Pin Wire Color Function Polarity 1 Orange White Right Audio In Pair 3 2 Orange Right Audio In Pair 2 Pair 1 Pair 4 3 Green White Video In 4 Blue Mic Out 5 White Blue Mic Out 6 Green Video In 7 White Brown Left Audio In TIA 568B 8 Brown Left Audio In
86. to restrictions on distribution described in this License Agreement AMX Dealer Distributor VIP or other AMX authorized entity shall not and shall not permit any other person to disclose display loan publish transfer whether by sale assignment exchange gift operation of law or otherwise license sublicense copy or otherwise disseminate the AMX Software Licensee may not reverse engineer decompile or disassemble the AMX Software ACKNOWLEDGEMENT You hereby acknowledge that you are an authorized AMX dealer distributor VIP or other AMX autho rized entity in good standing and have the right to enter into and be bound by the terms of this Agreement INTELLECTUAL PROPERTY The AMX Software is owned by AMX and is protected by United States copyright laws patent laws international treaty provisions and or state of Texas trade secret laws Licensee may make copies of the AMX Software solely for backup or archival purposes Licensee may not copy the written materials accompanying the AMX Software TERMINATION AMX RESERVES THE RIGHT IN ITS SOLE DISCRETION TO TERMINATE THIS LICENSE FOR ANY REA SON UPON WRITTEN NOTICE TO LICENSEE In the event that AMX terminates this License the Licensee shall return or destroy all originals and copies of the AMX Software to AMX and certify in writing that all originals and copies have been returned or destroyed PRE RELEASE CODE Portions of the AMX Software may from time to time as identified in th
87. to the activating deactivating On Off of a popup page This command works in the same way as the Toggle Popup command in TPDesign4 Syntax PPOG lt popup page name gt lt page name gt Variable popup page name 1 50 ASCII characters Name of the popup page page name 1 50 ASCII characters Name of the page the popup is displayed On Example SEND_COMMAND Panel PPOG Popup1 Main Toggles the popup page Popup1 on the Main page from one state to another On Off Example 2 SEND_COMMAND Panel PPOG Popup1 Toggles the popup page Popup1 on the current page from one state to another On Off PPON Activate a specific popup page to launch on either a specified page or the current page If the page name is empty the current page is used see example 2 If the popup page is already On do not re draw it This command works in the same way as the Show Popup command in TPDesign4 Syntax PPON lt popup page name gt lt page name gt Variable popup page name 1 50 ASCII characters Name of the popup page page name 1 50 ASCII characters Name of the page the popup is displayed On Example SEND_COMMAND Panel PPON Popupl Main Activates the popup page Popup1 on the Main page Example 2 SEND_COMMAND Panel PPON Popup1 Activates the popup page Popup1 on the current page Programming Numbers The following information provides the programming nu
88. to the Calibration page seen above where you can physically recalibrate the actual touch panel again using the above procedures Wireless Settings Page The Wireless Settings page FIG 100 sets the communication parameters for the installed wireless CF card either 802 11b g This information includes its corresponding IP communication parameters wireless communication settings and read the device number assigned to the Modero panel Both panels can use 802 11b g for wireless communication Once the panel has been updated with the latest Modero firmware some encryption and security features may may not be supported depending on the type of wireless card being used Wireless Security Wireless Security opem 8 EAP LICS Open Clear Text EAR ILS Static WEP EAP TLS Static WEP JARAS WPA PSK EAP LEAP WRAP SIs EAP LEAP EAP PEAP EAP FAST EAP EAP SAAR ASE The Currently Installed Wireless Card only Supports Open and WEP Encryption 802 11b wireless card 802 11g wireless card FIG 99 Wireless Settings page showing how each card supports its own security features Wireless Security Support 802 11b Wi Fi CF card Open Clear Text Static WEP 64 bit and 128 bit key lengths Note The WAP Site survey feature is disabled and is only supported by the newer 802 11g card 802 11g Wi Fi CF card Open Clear Text e Static WEP 64 bit and 128 bit key lengths e WPA PSK e EAP security with and without certifica
89. tunnel and allows the panel to access the network directly via the target WAP e Pressing the EAP TTLS button opens the EAP TTLS Settings dialog FIG 109 The following fields are required SSID Identity Password and Inner Authentication Type e Refer to the following Wireless Settings Page Security Options Overview section on page 113 for further details on these security options For more information on uploading a certificate file refer to the AMX Certificate Upload Utility section on page 195 EAP TLS An EAP TLS security method is designed for wireless environments where its necessary to securely transmit data over a wireless network by adding an additional level of security protocol via the use of a private key e Pressing the EAP TLS button opens the EAP TLS Settings dialog FIG 110 The following fields are required SSID Identity Client Certificate Private Key and Private Key password Refer to the following Wireless Settings Page Security Options Overview section on page 113 for further details on these security options e For more information on uploading a certificate file refer to the AMX Certificate Upload Utility section on page 195 EAP LEAP An EAP LEAP security method is designed for wireless environments where its not required to have both a client or server certificate validation scheme in place yet necessary to securely transmit data over a wireless network e Pressing the EAP LEAP butto
90. used to activate the DIM Mode Brightness Level range 0 100 Use the Dim Mode Min Level bargraph to alter the Minimum DIM level value used to activate the DIM Mode Brightness Level range 0 100 The position of this bargraph can never exceed that of the Dim Mode Max Level Dim Mode Minimum Allows you to alter the sensitivity of the Modero panel light sensor Brightness Toggle the Enable Enabled button to either active inactive the DIM Mode feature Enable activates this feature Once active by receiving a value below the Dim Mode Min Level value the current light level ramps to the DIM Mode value within a few seconds Enabled illuminated when selected deactivates this feature Use the DIM Mode Brightness UP DN buttons to alter the DIM level Range 0 100 The lower the value the darker a room must be before the LCD Brightness value changes to conform to a DIM room and vice versa with a higher value The DIM Mode Minimum Brightness bargraph indicates the current DIM Mode Brightness level This level corresponds to the brightness level of the LCD used when the DIM Mode is active The Brightness value of the panel in a DIM room low light is much less than that of a Non DIM well to brightly lit where the LCD Brightness must be higher to display the screen content clearly Motion Sensor Provides the following fields The Motion Detection field displays a reactive button that
91. 0 Click Send to begin the transfer The file transfer progress is indicated on the bottom right of the dialog FIG 81 11 Click Close after the panel reboots to return to the main program 12 Right click the associated System number and select Refresh System This causes a refresh of all project systems establishes a new connection to the Master and populates the System list with devices on your particular system 13 Confirm the panel has been properly updated to the correct firmware version Firmware Pages and Descriptions This section describes each firmware page and their specific functional elements Setup Navigation Buttons These Setup Navigation Buttons FIG 82 appear on the left of the panel screen when the Setup page is currently active Project Information Panel Information _ Modero Setup ee E Navigation Buttons Adjustment Audio Adjustments TEN Protected Setup Video Adjustment Battery Base FIG 82 Setup Navigation Buttons These Navigation Buttons are specific to these Modero panels and include the specific elements described in the following table Setup Navigation Button Elements Project Information Press the Project Information button to access the Project Information and view the TPD4 project file properties currently loaded on the selected panel read only Refer to the Project Information Page section on page 90 for more detailed information Panel Information
92. 1x is also responsible for communicating the method with which WAPs and wireless users can share and change encryption keys This continuous key change helps resolve any major security vulnerabilities native to WEP e AES e Short for Advanced Encryption Standard is a cipher currently approved by the NSA to protect US Government documents classified as Top Secret The AES cipher is the first cipher protecting Top Secret information available to the general public e CERTIFICATES CA e A certificate can have many forms but at the most basic level a certificate is an identity combined with a public key and then signed by a certification authority The certificate authority CA is a trusted external third party which signs or validates the certificate When a certificate has been signed it gains some cryptographic properties AMX supports the following security certificates within three different formats PEM Privacy Enhanced Mail DER Distinguished Encoding Rules PKCS12 Public Key Cryptography Standard 12 e Typical certificate information can include the following items Certificate Issue Date Extensions Issuer Public Key Serial Number Signature Algorithm User Version e MIC e Short for Message Integrity Check prevents forged packets from being sent Through WEP it was possible to alter a packet whose content was known even if it had not been decrypted e TKIP e Short for Temporal Key Integra
93. 38 Cyan 0 191 191 39 Medium Cyan 0 159 159 40 Dark Cyan 0 127 127 41 Very Dark Cyan 0 95 95 42 Very Light Aqua 0 128 255 43 Light Aqua 0 112 223 44 Aqua 0 96 191 45 Medium Aqua 0 80 159 46 Dark Aqua 0 64 127 OL RGB Values for all 88 Basic Colors Cont Index No Name Red Green Blue 47 Very Dark Aqua 0 48 95 48 Very Light Blue 0 0 255 49 Light Blue 0 0 223 50 Blue 0 0 191 51 Medium Blue 0 0 159 52 Dark Blue 0 0 127 53 Very Dark Blue 0 0 95 54 Very Light Purple 128 0 255 55 Light Purple 112 0 223 56 Purple 96 0 191 57 Medium Purple 80 0 159 58 Dark Purple 64 0 127 59 Very Dark Purple 48 0 95 60 Very Light Magenta 255 0 255 61 Light Magenta 223 0 223 62 Magenta 191 0 191 63 Medium Magenta 159 0 159 64 Dark Magenta 127 0 127 65 Very Dark Magenta 95 0 95 66 Very Light Pink 255 0 128 67 Light Pink 223 0 112 68 Pink 191 0 96 69 Medium Pink 159 0 80 70 Dark Pink 127 0 64 71 Very Dark Pink 95 0 48 72 White 255 255 255 73 Grey1 238 238 238 74 Grey3 204 204 204 75 Grey5 170 170 170 76 Grey7 136 136 136 77 Grey9 102 102 102 78 Grey4 187 187 187 79 Grey6 153 153 153 80 Grey8 119 119 119 81 Grey10 85 85 85 82 Grey12 51 51 51 83 Grey13 34 34 34 84 Grey2 221 221 221 85 Grey11 68 68 68 86 Grey14 17 17 17 87 Black 0 0 0 255 TRANSPARENT 99 53 99 Font Styles and ID Numbers
94. 50 ASCII characters initial text prompt text Example SEND COMMAND Panel PKP 1234567 ENTER PASSWORD Pops up the Keypad and initializes the text string ENTER PASSWORD in SETUP Syntax Send panel to SETUP SETUP page Example SEND COMMAND Panel SETUP Sends the panel to the Setup Page SHUTDOWN Syntax Shut down the SHUTDOWN batteries providing Example power to the panel SLEEP Force the panel into screen saver mode SEND COMMAND Panel SHUTDOWN Shuts down the batteries feeding power to the panel This function saves the battery from discharging Syntax SLEEP Example SEND COMMAND Panel SLEEP Forces the panel into screen saver mode SOU Play a sound file Syntax SOU lt sound name gt Variables sound name Name of the sound file Supported sound file formats are WAV amp MP3 Example SEND COMMAND Panel SOU Music wav Plays the Music wav file Panel Runtime Operation Commands Cont TKP Pops up the keypad icon and initializes the text string to that specified The Prompt Text is Present a optional telephone Syntax keypad TKP lt initial text gt lt prompt text gt Variables initial text 1 50 ASCII characters prompt text 1 50 ASCII characters Example SEND COMMAND Panel TKP 999 222 1211 Enter Phone Number Pops up the Keypad and initializes the text st
95. 6 for multi state buttons 0 All states for General buttons 1 Off state and 2 On state text effect name Refer to theText Effects table on page 163 for a listing of text effect names Example SEND_COMMAND Panel TEF 500 504 amp 510 515 1 amp 2 Soft Drop Shadow 300 Sets the text effect to Soft Drop Shadow 3 for the button with variable text range 500 504 and 510 515 ATOP If enabled Press Move Release events are sent to the Master as string events Syntax TOP lt state gt lt state gt is O disable 1 presses releases 2 moves 3 press move release Note Move should be used with caution This setting can generate a significant amount of traffic to the master depending on user interaction Example command TOP 1 Example Response String Event Text Press 320 480 Example Response String Event Text Release 320 480 A Button Commands Cont ATXT Sets Non Unicode text Assign a text Syntax string to those buttons with a defined address range variable text address range 1 4000 button states range 1 256 for multi state buttons 0 All states for General buttons 1 Off state and 2 On state new text 1 50 ASCII characters TXT lt vt addr range gt lt button states range gt lt new text gt Variable Example SEND_COMMAND Panel TXT 500 504 amp 510 515 1 amp 2 Test Only Sets the On and Off state text for buttons with the variable text ranges of 500 504 amp
96. 8 x 2 40 5 6 mm x 42 80 mm x 61 0 mm Weight 19 50 grams 0 043 Ibs Description e Wireless LAN Compact Flash Card with external PIFA antenna e Features enterprise class security such as WPA and WPA2 security Features Compact Flash Type form factor e Enhanced range and throughput e Features wireless security such as WPA WPA2 and WEP e Field installable e Incorporates DSSS and OFDM radio technology Operates at ISM frequency bands of 2 4 GHz while providing data transfer speeds of up to 54Mbps e Support for IEEE 802 11b and 802 119 e Supports Advanced Encryption Standard AES 64 bit and 128 bit data encryption along with an Re4 encryption cipher 64 128 bit e Supports authentication methods such as EAP FAST EAP LEAP EAP PEAP EAP TLS and EAP TTLS e Supports Wired Equivalent Privacy WEP 64 bit and 128 bit data encryption known to the on board firmware as Static WEP Antenna Type e External PIFA antenna factory installed Bus Interface Certifications Compact Flash Type FCC Part 15 Class B CE IC TELEC and Wi Fi Media Access Control Techniques e Using 802 11b DSSS communication DBPSK 1 Mbps DQPSK 2 Mbps CCK 5 5 Mbps e Using 802 11g OFDM communication BPSK 6 and 9 Mbps QPSK 12 and 18 Mbps 16 QAM 24 and 36 Mbps 64 QAM 48 and 54 Mbps Network Architecture Operating Channels Infrastructure mode Client to Access Point e Using 802 11b am
97. 9 Battery Base page Battery Base Page Elements Back Saves the changes and returns you to the previously active touch panel page Connection Status icon This visual display of the connection status allows the user to have a current visual update of the panel s connection status regardless of what page is currently active A Lock only appears on the icon if the panel has established a connection with a currently secured target Master requiring a username and password Charge Status Time Remaining blue indicates the amount of charge time use remaining on the battery within the connected NXA BASE 1 Time Until Charged green indicates the amount of time remaining until the battery installed within the connected NXA BASE 1 is fully charged e Range 0 00 12 59 This is read in HH MM hours and minutes Panel Shutdown The Panel Shutdown UP DN buttons alter the timeout value in minutes e This value determines the number of minutes that would need to pass before the panel automatically shuts down e Once shutdown the unit would have to be restarted A zero value disables this feature Range 0 240 default 0 min Low Battery Warning The Low Battery Warning UP DN buttons alter the time value in minutes available on the battery for use before the panel displays a low battery warning Range 10 45 default 15 min Very Low Battery Warning The Very Low Battery Warning UP DN buttons al
98. A color Syntax BCF lt vt addr range gt lt button states range gt lt color value gt Variable variable text address range 1 4000 button states range 1 256 for multi state buttons 0 All states for General buttons 1 Off state and 2 On state color value Refer to the RGB Values for all 88 Basic Colors table on page 139 for more information Example SEND_COMMAND Panel BCF 500 504 amp 510 515 1 12 SEND_COMMAND Panel BCF 500 504 amp 510 515 1 Yellow SEND_COMMAND Panel BCF 500 504 amp 510 515 1 F4ECOA63 SEND_COMMAND Panel BCF 500 504 amp 510 515 1 F4ECOA Sets the Off state fill color by color number Colors can be set by Color Numbers Color name R G B alpha colors RRGGBBAA and R G amp B colors values RRGGBB A Button Commands Cont ABCT Only if the specified text color is not the same as the current color Set the text color Note Color can be assigned by color name without spaces number or R GB value to the specified RRGGBB or RRGGBBAA color Syntax BCT lt vt addr range gt lt button states range gt lt color value gt Variable variable text address range 1 4000 button states range 1 256 for multi state buttons 0 All states for General buttons 1 Off state and 2 On state color value Refer to the RGB Values for all 88 Basic Colors table on page 139 for more information Example SEND_COMMAND Panel BCT 500
99. ASCII characters Name of the page the popup is displayed hide effect time Given in 1 10ths of a second Example SEND_COMMAND Panel PHT Popup1 50 Sets the Popup1 hide effect time to 5 seconds PPA If the page name is empty the current page is used Same as the Clear Page command Close all popups in TPDesign4 on a specified Syntax page PPA lt page name gt Variable page name 1 50 ASCII characters Name of the page the popup is displayed On Example SEND_COMMAND Panel PPA Pagel Close all popups on Page1 PPF If the page name is empty the current page is used see example 2 If the popup page is part of a group the whole group is deactivated This command works in the same way as the Hide Popup command in TPDesign4 Deactivate a specific popup page oneithera Syntax specified page or the current page PPF lt popup page name gt lt page name gt Variable popup page name 1 50 ASCII characters Name of the popup page page name 1 50 ASCII characters Name of the page the popup is displayed On Example SEND_COMMAND Panel PPF Popup1 Main Deactivates the popup page Popup1 on the Main page Example 2 SEND_COMMAND Panel PPF Popup1 Deactivates the popup page Popup1 on the current page PPG If the page name is empty the current page is used see example 2 Toggling refers to the activating deactivating On Off of a popup page This command works in the s
100. Channel The RF channel being used for connection to the WAP read only e This is determined through the WAP Link Quality Displays the current quality of the link as descriptive colored text from the wireless NIC to the Wireless Access Point in real time The bargraph has been replaced with a descriptions None Poor Fair Good Very Good and Excellent Green color text indicates better communication quality It reports the quality of the signal over the air direct sequence spread spectrum Even when the link quality is at its lowest you still have a connection and with it the ability to transmit and receive data even if at much lower speeds Note Both Link Quality and Signal Strength are applicable to the RF connection only It is quite possible to have an RF signal to a Wireless Access Point but be unable to communicate with it because of either incorrect IP or encryption settings Signal Strength SNR Signal Noise Ratio is a measure of the relative strength of a wireless RF connection This indicator displays a description of the signal strength from the Wireless Access Point connection The bargraph has been replaced with a descriptions None Poor Fair Good Very Good and Excellent Green color text indicates better signal strength Given this value and the link quality above a user can determine the noise level component of SNR Ex If the signal strength is high but the link quality is low then the cause o
101. Configuring a Wireless Connection When working with a wireless card the first step is to configure wireless communication parameters within the Wireless Settings page This page only configures the card to communicate to a target WAP such as the NXA WAP200G it is still necessary to tell the panel which Master it should be communicating with This pointing to a Master is done via the System Settings page where you configure the IP Address System Number and Username Password information assigned to the target Master NOTE NOTE Step 1 Configure the Panel s Wireless IP Settings The first step to successfully setting up your internal wireless card is to configure the IP Settings section on the Wireless Settings page The section configures the communication parameters from the Modero panel to the web Wireless communication using a DHCP Address 1 Press the Protected Setup button located on the lower left of the panel page to open the Protected Setup page and display an on screen keypad 2 Enter 1988 into the Keypad s password field and press Done when finished Press the Wireless Settings button located on the lower left to open the Wireless Settings page Wireless communication is set within the IP Settings section of this page FIG 58 4 Toggle the DHCP Static field from the IP Settings section until the choice cycles to DHCP This action causes all fields in the IP Settings section other than Host Name to be greyed
102. E E S E EEI E A E E ET 174 DBEEP ouden eseese EEEE EEEE EAEE P E a EE E 174 E A E E A T 174 PREY E E E I O EE A T 175 Wavswsdsuldacuaveesdasticesesavecetss 175 Zc eden aaa Acad an ee i SLEEP ee ee seca pa S nn RanAE a eI Mas a a ee ee ee a sa Be eee be A ee eee a oe si i T i a ad heao AAMT Ie tts pa casa aaa a aE pan pa Pa pai Sis oi tea ha allen adi aa ana Panel Setup fo A ee ee eee ae ania i AMUT E ee bi AL hea ital Ota SAS be ta ca ca ee cos be Fr ee ie pe Dynamic Image E a z A AA Nal aaa ae ie a a Se gala a oo eee ne ARAF RMF Embedded Codes sais aa ack nic ia saa ace a a e Meh a e Escape DEN ee eee vee ene eae e ve DV icc ea Ca aE RN AL ee bs ee Hs ee ee baa gg aaa add cna ie a Rs LacAA ania ve eee eee Aa ree re eee a E a a eee paa S o stk A a bi cea CR AE eae a ena ie ee ee a eA iain NG Mae ALE id ade lt a H ee ee E aie is a s Appendix A sxisicnsissasnansscenmerononcduannndcdncustisesncssoaesstonousdaonsonsd re Text Formatting Codes for Bargraphs Joysticks ccccscscssssssssseeeseessrseseeseees 183 Text Area Input Masking iwsiissccesscssccnccscnsssossuvevecesosasensenessessudenesseesapecsseensateninccueones 184 Input mask character tyPes ccc sic ssescsescdesntdecedecssesveveessscenuhusedees eeeieveedossevsnudoccocceesves 184 INPUE mask ranges cscs ssc Sczeseteccttessesks eestaseeucebtentessvessssussusereoubdeSes eversestsysecscodesieacasttess 185 Input mask next field characters
103. EF 529 1 Gets the button OFF state text effect name information The result sent to the Master would be ButtonGet Id 529 Type 1008 Flag VALUE1 1 VALUE2 18 VALUE3 0 TEXT Hard Drop Shadow 3 TEXT LENGTH 18 Button Query Commands Cont TXT Get the current text information Syntax oTXT lt vt addr range gt lt button states range gt lt optional index gt Variable variable text address range 1 4000 button states range 1 256 for multi state buttons 0 All states for General buttons 1 Off state and 2 On state optional index This is used if a string was too long to get back in one command The reply will start at this index custom event type 1001 Flag Zero Value1 Button state number Value2 Actual length of string Value3 Index Text Text from the button Text length Button text length Example SEND COMMAND Panel TXT 529 1 Gets the button OFF state text information The result sent to the Master would be ButtonGet Id 529 Type 1001 Flag 0 VALUE1 VALUE2 14 VALUE3 1 TEXT This is a test TEXT LENGTH 14 Panel Runtime Operations Serial Commands are used in the AxcessX Terminal Emulator mode These commands are case insensitive Panel Runtime Operation Commands ABEEP Output a single beep even if beep is Off Syntax ABEEP Example SEND COMMAND Panel ABEEP Outputs a
104. En ITI DREWS a i FIG 40 NXD CV7 Wall Mount panel dimensions using 4 40 mounting screws 3 Remove the Faceplate bezel A in FIG 41 from the main NXD unit B in FIG 41 by gripping the faceplate and pulling with gentle outward force 4 Thread the incoming power RJ 45 Ethernet USB and any optional audio video wiring from their terminal sources through the surface opening Leave enough slack in the wiring to accommodate any re positioning of the panel 5 Connect all data and power wiring connectors to their corresponding locations along the left side of the un powered NXD touch panel ical e Verify that the terminal end of the power cable is not connected to a power source before plugging in the 2 pin power connector The USB connectors can be from a either a USB extension cable or a wireless USB RF transmitter 6 Test the incoming wiring by connecting the panel connections to their terminal locations and applying power Verify that the panel is receiving power and functioning properly before finalizing the installation Attachment is done along the edges of the cutout Flat installation surface Install the four 4 40 Mounting Screws included into these four holes A Faceplate Trim Ring FIG 41 Wall Mount panel installation configuration for flat surfaces 7 Disconnect the terminal
105. Font styles can be used to program the text fonts on buttons sliders and pages The following chart shows the default font type and their respective ID numbers generated by TPDesign4 Default Font Styles and ID Numbers Font ID Font type Size Font ID Font type Size 1 Courier New 9 19 Arial 9 2 Courier New 12 20 Arial 10 3 Courier New 18 21 Arial 12 4 Courier New 26 22 Arial 14 5 Courier New 32 23 Arial 16 6 Courier New 18 24 Arial 18 7 Courier New 26 25 Arial 20 8 Courier New 34 26 Arial 24 9 AMX Bold 14 27 Arial 36 10 AMX Bold 20 28 Arial Bold 10 11 AMX Bold 36 29 Arial Bold 8 32 Variable Fonts start at 32 assigned by TPDesign4 These values are also listed in the You must import fonts into a TPDesign4 project file The font ID numbers are Generate Programmer s Report NOTE Border Styles The TPDesign4 Touch Panel Design program has pre set border styles that are user selectable TPD4 border styles can ONLY be changed by using the name TPD4 Border Styles by Name No Border styles No Border styles 1 None 27 Cursor Bottom 2 AMX Elite L 28 Cursor Bottom with Hole 3 AMX Elite M 29 Cursor Top 4 AMX Elite S 30 Cursor Top with Hole 5 Bevel L 31 Cursor Left 6 Bevel M 32 Cursor Left with Hole 7 Bevel S 33 Cursor Right 8 Circle 15 34 Cursor Right with Hole 9 Circle 25 35 Custom Frame 10 Circle 35 36 Diamond 15
106. Front Setup Access button for 3 seconds to open the Setup page e Press the Protected Setup button located on the lower left of the panel page enter 1988 into the on screen Keypad s password field and press Done when finished e Enter a Device Number value for the panel into the Device Number Keypad The default is 10001 and the range is from 1 32000 After downloading a panel file or Symptoms include firmware to a G4 device the panel Having to repeat the download behaves strangely Inability to make further downloads to the panel May get directory errors graphics hierarchy errors etc indicating problems with the Compact Flash e Panel will not boot or gets stuck on AMX splash screen e Other problems also started after downloading to a new panel or a panel with a TPD4 file that takes up a considerable amount of the available Compact Flash Cause e If the G4 device already contains a large enough file subsequent downloads will take up more space than is available and could often corrupt the Compact Flash The demo file that typically ships with G4 panels is one such file Solution DO NOT download TPD4 files of large size over the demo pages or any other large TPD4 file e First download a small blank one page file to the G4 panel using the Normal Transfer option to send download the page Reboot the device then do your regular file or firmware download My NXA BASE 1 Battery Base i
107. G 33 Faceplate outer surface shown FIG 33 Inserting the No Button Trim Ring 9 Firmly press down around the No Button Trim Ring until all of the latches are securely inserted into their openings on the Faceplate and the No Button Trim Ring is securely fastened Verify the No Button Trim Ring is firmly inserted onto the Faceplate and that there are no gaps between this Trim Ring and the outer surface of the Faceplate ee 5 i 10 Place the Faceplate back onto the main NXD CV7 unit Make sure to align the Microphone Light and PIR Motion sensor locations on the main unit to their respective openings on the Faceplate assembly Installing the Button Trim Ring The outer No Button Trim Ring is secured to the Faceplate with plastic latches In order to re install the Button Trim Ring back onto an NXD panel which has had the default Button Trim Ring features removed you must first remove the No Button Trim Ring 1 Latches To remove the Faceplate simply pull it away from the panel by gently tugging it outwards until the entire Faceplate comes away from the panel Turn the Faceplate over to expose the inside surface and view the Trim Ring latches In a single motion press down and then outwards on the three Trim Ring latches located along the top of the internal surface of the Faceplate to begin removing the Trim Ring Removing the
108. G2116 38 NXA CFSP1GB 1 GB compact flash card FG2116 39 NXA CFSP Compact Flash FG2116 3x Every CV7 Modero panel is shipped with a 64 MB Compact Flash card NXA CFSP If possible upgrade the panel s internal components Compact Flash or wireless interface cards prior to installing or using the panel The NXA CFSP Compact Flash card is factory programmed with specific panel firmware and can be upgraded to several sizes up to 1GB Optional Compact Flash Upgrades e NXA CV7CF128M 128 MB Compact Flash card FG2116 60 e NXA CV7CF256M 256 MB Compact Flash card FG2116 61 e NXA CV7CF512M 512 MB Compact Flash card FG2116 62 e NXA CV7CF1G 1 GB Compact Flash card FG2116 63 Upgrading the Compact Flash card in both panel typesinvolves opening the panel enclosure outer housing to access the internal circuit board removing the existing card replacing it with the 802 11g upgrade and then resecuring the panel enclosure as described in the following sections Before Upgrading the Wireless Card Read This This new firmware file provides both backwards compatibility with the previous 802 11b cards and new security protocols for the new 802 11g wireless CF card NOTE 1 Upload the latest panel specific kit file to your Modero touch panel and then confirm the firmware file update was successful Each panel should be updated using its associated panel specific kit file S
109. G2259 02 and FG2259 03 panel models CV7 Specifications The following table outlines the specifications for the 7 Widescreen Modero panels Specifications for 7 Widescreen Video Touch Panels Dimensions HWD NXA RK7 metal rack mount with black matte finish 4 RU rack units high 6 97 x 19 0 x 0 50 17 70 cm x 48 26 cm x 1 27 cm e NXT CV7 Fully raised 6 86 x 7 96 x 6 93 17 40 cm x 20 20 cm x 17 60 cm e NXT CV7 Fully lowered 3 70 x 7 96 x 6 93 9 40 cm x 20 20 cm x 17 60 cm e NXD CV7 with faceplate 5 93 x 7 87 x 3 28 15 06 cm x 20 00 cm x 8 33 cm e CB TP7 Rough In Wallbox optional 5 47 x 7 23 x 3 40 13 90 cm x 18 40 cm x 8 64 cm Power Requirements stand alone CV7 Power Requirements CV7 and BASE 1 e Constant current draw 1 0 A 12 VDC stand alone e Startup current draw 1 5 A 12 VDC stand alone e Constant current draw 2 4 A 12 VDC e Startup current draw 3 6 A 12 VDC Memory factory default 64 MB SDRAM 64 MB Compact Flash upgradeable to 1 GB factory programmed Weight stand alone NXD CV7 4 12 Ibs 1 87 kg e NXTCV7 4 12 Ibs 1 87 kg Certifications FCC Part 15 Class B CE and EN 60950 Panel LCD Parameters Aspect ratio 16 x 9 Brightness luminance 350 cd m e Channel transparency 8 bit Alpha blending e Contrast ratio 200 1 e Display colors 256 thousand colors 18 bit color depth e Dot pixel pitch
110. Internal Faceplate from the panel exposes the pushbuttons openings left from an earlier removal of the pushbuttons and LEDs Gently tug along the edges of the No Button Trim Ring and work your way around the edges to remove it from the Faceplate FIG 34 NS F Panel enclosure wj Button latch Trim Ring Light Pipe latch black Button and Light Pipe removal showing the internal surface of Faceplate 3 gt in No Button Trim ge Faceplate outside surface shown FIG 34 Removing the No Button Trim Ring 5 From along the internal surface of the Faceplate install the six buttons by firmly inserting them into the button openings until the Button latch secures the button in place FIG 34 Install the pair of clear light pipe strips by pushing light pipes over the two black light pipe latches Grasp the Button Trim Ring on both sides and fit it into the groove along the outside surface of the Faceplate made available by the removal of the previous Trim Ring 8 Gently insert the Button Trim Ring latches into their corresponding openings on the outer surface of the internal Faceplate FIG 35 Button Trim Ring gt n HY 4 Faceplate outer surface shown Button openings FIG 35 Inserting the Button T
111. M r E E E E E T E E A 149 ABM E E E E T 151 BBM E E E E E EE 151 ABMP E E E A IO EEE AE TE 151 Aii a E E E A A E E N 152 ABN a e E T E ATO ET 152 BIN ae E e R E E E EE E S A E 152 SBOP eo hstiiecssticataselecusteanscadsaesseanvasecesseosesdssedeacsasscscesss so aashskewowwsnaasasdssecatacenceassccecesdeedsesasacaacvessaas 152 BOR oireissa o cwasasecwsnvecuasasaesseesseesseeeseeeteeesesueaduausesuasdedasaaasecdeusdesectsdesscscssacaavasatsssasaa ea 153 ISB OS A T E E E E A E E vents 153 PBPP iesean a E EE E E E a EE AEE EE E A SET 153 BBRD EET A A E E EE ENE T A 153 r E E T a E EE N T 154 OBSM E T E E 154 ABSO eississisccssavscssensciessessascsccsessessscdssssesscsssoasisccesedesebesecctacvssseesssadasssssesesdeassdescecascosesieticesssssssy s 154 A BSP E E E T E E E E 154 ABV d E AOE E 155 Alorda P E E E E sess 155 ABV E E E EIEN E E O 155 BW ororen ananin eea e rE E ERN EEEE EE AEEA E EE E EE EE ET 155 BWW AA E TT A EE ETE EE A E 155 SGP E A E A EE E E A ET 156 Ael a E E A A E T E A E E EE L E E vets 156 MENA eere nees oe an eea e E e EEEO EE EE AREE EEr E A se EEE ESSR 156 PEON E A E S E E 156 RGD E E EE E E 157 BGI E E E E E 157 PGLE O E A T A TT E T 157 ie E E T T E 157 PGR ENA a T T EE TTE TE 158 AE A a E A A 158 IGN E T E E E E T ST 158 PICO E E E E E T A euseuscsadeyeisieeeeedes 159 A iE A T E E E E TA EEEN 159 a E E E 159 ae e E E E E E E 160 SMBT e E E E E E E E E E E 160 BMIDG e E E EE A E E NE TA 160 a E A L E E E E 160
112. Menu Top Rounded 185 73 Oval V 75x150 117 Menu Top Rounded 195 74 Oval V 100x200 118 Menu Right Rounded 15 75 Picture Frame 119 Menu Right Rounded 25 76 Quad Line 120 Menu Right Rounded 35 77 Single Line 121 Menu Right Rounded 45 78 Windows Style Popup 122 Menu Right Rounded 55 79 Windows Style Popup Status Bar 123 Menu Right Rounded 65 80 Menu Bottom Rounded 15 124 Menu Right Rounded 75 81 Menu Bottom Rounded 25 125 Menu Right Rounded 85 82 Menu Bottom Rounded 35 126 Menu Right Rounded 95 83 Menu Bottom Rounded 45 127 Menu Right Rounded 105 84 Menu Bottom Rounded 55 128 Menu Right Rounded 115 85 Menu Bottom Rounded 65 129 Menu Right Rounded 125 86 Menu Bottom Rounded 75 130 Menu Right Rounded 135 87 Menu Bottom Rounded 85 131 Menu Right Rounded 145 88 Menu Bottom Rounded 95 132 Menu Right Rounded 155 a E ai TPD4 Border Styles by Name Cont No Border styles No Border styles 89 Menu Bottom Rounded 105 133 Menu Right Rounded 165 90 Menu Bottom Rounded 115 134 Menu Right Rounded 175 91 Menu Bottom Rounded 125 135 Menu Right Rounded 185 92 Menu Bottom Rounded 135 136 Menu Right Rounded 195 93 Menu Bottom Rounded 145 137 Menu Left Rounded 15 94 Menu Bottom Rounded 155 138 Menu Left Rounded 25 95 Menu Bottom Rounded 165 139 Menu Left Rounded 35 96 Menu Bottom Rounded 175 140 Menu Left Rounded 45 141 Menu Left Rounded 55 149 Menu Left Rounded 135 142 Menu Left Rounded 65 150
113. NEAR EAP FAST less Card only Supports 802 11b wireless card 802 11g wireless card FIG 63 Wireless Settings page showing how each card supports its own security features Address information so you can later enter it into the appropriate WAP dialog fields in order to sync up the secure connection These values must be identically NOTE reproduced on the target WAP You must first take down the SSID name Current Key string value and panel MAC 6 Press the Static WEP button to open the Static WEP Settings dialog FIG 64 Static WEP Settings Required Information SSID Network Name used by the Target WAP Generate Encryption Method Passphrase WEP Key assignment Authentication Method Save Cancel FIG 64 Wireless Settings page Static WEP security method 7 Enter the SSID information by either e Automatically having it filled in by pressing the Site Survey button navigating to the Site Survey page choosing a WEP secured WAP from within the Site Survey page and then pressing the Connect button Site Survey Wireless Networks Channol Signal MAC Addross Select a target T WAP with the i level of CMD CD D CHD desired security CHED D CD f om CHID CHELE D CD D CAHD GED D D 4D CHD END CD EZD CED CED D CD GBD CD a SS gt eam Sass SS GS EF a 6 Ga ae Ga v WAP begins the communication Connecting to the FIG 65 Site Survey of availabl
114. Note Display timeout values affect battery performance Small timeout values increase the life of the battery charge Greater timeout values may require more frequent battery charging Inactivity Page Flip Sets the number of minutes of inactivity before the panel automatically flips to a Timeout pre selected touch panel page When the device goes into this inactivity mode the LCD does not power down Press the UP DN buttons to increase decrease the time the panel can remain inactive before it flips to the preset page Range 0 240 minutes Use this button to set the timeout value to zero and disable the inactivity page flip mode The touch panel page used for the Inactivity page flip is shown within a small Inactivity Page field Panel Brightness Sets the display brightness level of the panel Press the UP DN buttons to adjust the brightness level Range 0 100 The on screen bargraph can be dragged to adjust the Brightness level which is then reflected as a corresponding numeric value within the Panel Brightness field Project Information Page The Project Information page displays the TPDesign4 TPD4 project file properties currently loaded on the selected Modero panel FIG 84 Refer to the TPDesign4 Touch Panel Program instruction manual for more detailed program information twee twee ff Senos Panta ote Te Ct nui TSS Pompe Rae ee Project Information Fefemn
115. P200G which uses a default SSID of AMX Please follow your particular Wireless Access Point s instruction manual for the correct procedures to setup either a secured or unsecured connection The following table lists the specifications for the NXA WC80211GCF This upgrade kit requires that pre existing panels first be removed from their current location surface wall or docking station before an installer can access the internal circuit boards and upgrade a pre existing 802 11b wireless CF card Only MVP panels require the use of a cardboard cutout Mounting Template to properly position the metal antenna plate onto the inner surface of the unit s rear plastic housing il CV7 and CV10 panels only require locating the Compact Flash s metal cover plate on the main circuit board and then adhering the terminal antenna connector to that location using the included double sided adhesive tape If the CF metal cover plate is not present over the wireless card slot on a CV7 or CV10 panel you can use the adhesive tape to secure the terminal antenna to the surface of the new card atop the product label The procedures for upgrading a CF card on an MVP is identical for both MVP 7500 and MVP 8400 panels The procedures for upgrading installing the new CF card are also similar across all referenced NXT panels and NXD panels as a group differences arise from their housing NXA WC80211GCF Specifications Dimensions HWD e 0 22 x 1 6
116. Press the Panel Information button to access the Panel Information page and view panel specific information such as resolution memory etc read only Refer to the Panel Information Page section on page 91 for more detailed information Time Adjustment Press the Time Adjustment button to access the Time Adjustment page where you can alter the time and date settings on the Master e Refer to the Time amp Date Setup Page section on page 92 for more detailed information Audio Adjustments Press the Audio Adjustments button to access the Volume page where you can alter the audio parameters on the Modero panel e Refer to the Volume Page section on page 94 for more detailed information Setup Navigation Button Elements Cont Protected Setup Press the Protected Setup button to access the Protected Setup page section that provides access to the panel s sensors calibration features and connection settings e Refer to both the Protected Setup Navigation Buttons section on page 98 and Protected Setup Page section on page 99 for more detailed information Video Adjustment Press the Video Adjustment button to access the Video Adjustment page where you can set the video properties for incoming video e This button only appears on Color Video CV capable touch panels e Refer to the Video Adjustment Page section on page 95 for more detailed information Battery Base Press the Battery Base b
117. RNET Only disabled when USB is selected URL In this mode enter the IP URL Master Port Number and username password if used on the Master The System Number field is read only because the panel obtains this information from the communicating Master e Listen In this mode add the Modero panel address into the URL List in NetLinx Studio and set the connection mode to Listen This mode allows the Modero touch panel to listen for the Master s communication signals The System Number and Master IP URL fields are red only Auto In this mode enter the System Number and a username password if applicable This mode is used when both the panel and the NetLinx Master are on the same Subnet and the Master has its UDP feature enabled Master IP URL field is read only OO System Settings Page Elements Cont Master Connection Cont System Number Allows you to enter a system number Default value is 0 zero ETHERNET Only disabled when USB is selected Master IP URL Sets the Master IP or URL of the NetLinx Master ETHERNET Only disabled when USB is selected Master Port Number Allows you to enter the port number used with the NetLinx Master e Default value is 1319 ETHERNET Only disabled when USB is selected Username Password If the target Master has been previously secured enter the alpha numeric string into each field assigned to a pre configured user profile on the Master T
118. Reboot button to both save any changes and restart the panel Remember that the panel s connection type must be set to USB prior to rebooting the panel and prior to inserting the USB connector 8 ONLY AFTER the unit displays the first panel page THEN insert the mini USB connector into the Program Port on the panel It may take a minute for the panel to detect the new connection and send a signal to the PC indicated by a green System Connection icon If this is your first time installing the USB driver a USB driver installation popup window FIG 53 appears on the PC Found New Hardware Found New Hardware A AMX USB Device The Microsoft digital signature affirms been tested with Windows and that the sb been altered since it was tested The software you are about to install does not contain a Microsoft digital signature Therefore there is no guarantee that this software works correctly with Windows AMX USB LAN LINK If you want to search for Microsoft digitally signed software visit the Windows Update Web site at http windowsupdate microsoft com to see if one is available Do you want to continue the installation No More Info FIG 53 USB driver installation popup window e This window notifies you that the panel has been detected by the PC as a USB compliant device and the PC is installing an appropriate USB driver to establish a proper communication to the panel ne re e This driver w
119. SB for a Virtual Master transfer i 8 Select the panel s Kit file from the Files section 9 Enter the Device value associated with the panel and the System number associated with the Master listed in the OnLine Tree tab of the Workspace window The Port field is greyed out 10 Click the Reboot Device checkbox This causes the touch panel to reboot after the firmware update process is complete The reboot of the panel can take up 30 seconds after the firmware process has finished 11 Click Send to begin the transfer The file transfer progress is indicated on the bottom right of the dialog B in FIG 79 12 As the panel is rebooting temporarily unplug the USB connector on the panel until the panel has completely restarted 13 Once the first panel page has been displayed reconnect the USB connector to the panel 14 Right click the associated System number and select Refresh System This causes a refresh of all project systems establishes a new connection to the Master and populates the System list with devices on your particular system 15 Confirm the panel has been properly updated to the correct firmware version Upgrading the Modero Firmware via Ethernet IP Address Before beginning with this section verify that your panel is powered and connected to the NetLinx Master through an Ethernet connection direct or wireless Step 1 Prepare the Master for communication via an IP 1 Obtain the IP Address of the NetLinx
120. Select button to make that the currently used IP Address communication parameter 12 Click OK to return to the Communications Settings dialog and place a checkmark within the Authentication Required radio box if your Master has been previously secured with a username password 13 Click on the Authentication Required radio box if the Master is secured and then press the User Name and Password button to open the Master Controller User Name and Password dialog 14 Within this dialog you must enter a previously configured username and password with sufficient rights before being able to successfully connect to the Master 15 Click OK to save your newly entered information and return to the previous Communication Settings dialog where you must click OK again to begin the communication process to your Master would want to temporarily stop communication to the Master and apply the new If you are currently connected to the assigned Master a popup asks whether you settings NOTE 16 Click Yes to interrupt the current communication from the Master and apply the new settings 17 Click Reboot from the Tools gt Reboot the Master Controller dialog and wait for the System Master to reboot The STATUS and OUTPUT LEDs should begin to alternately blink during the incorporation Wait until the STATUS LED is the only LED to blink 18 Press Done once until the Master Reboot Status field reads Reboot of System Complete 19 Click the OnL
121. Survey button This action launches the Site Survey page which displays a listing of all detected WAPs in the communication range of the internal card e The card scans its environment every four seconds and adds any new WAPs found to the list Every scan cycle updates the signal strength field Oe Back gt Site Survey gt Wireless Networks Indicates the currently Network Name SSID Chane Securty Signal MAC Address active column and the order CD ED E Excelent CHEE 2 in which the data is being sorted GEE ED D _ G3 Descending order shown sco Tran A Eelen e302 408363 D D CD CD GEE aD GDP 4 EESOZESA0E3ES CD ED tC TT Very Good CEEB GED P lt 2 4D CHED CD D CZD CHED D C Z CHED Indicates a selected AP I FIG 59 Site Survey page e Access points are tracked by MAC Address e If the WAP s SSID is set as a blank then N A is displayed within the SSID field e If the WAP s SSID is hidden not broadcast it will not show up on the site survey screen but it can still be configured via the SSID field on the specified security mode screen e Ifa WAP is displayed in the list is not detected for 10 scans in a row it is then removed from the screen In this way a user can walk around a building and see access points come and go as they move in and out of range 3 Sort the information provided on this page by pressing on a column name and toggling the direction of the adjacent arrow
122. T CV7 Panel ssssssessssscecesesesessessnseseeeeees 26 Charging the NXT BP using the NXA BASE 1 sscsccsssccsscsssssssssssssccesesessssseesesseeees 27 NXT CHG Battery Charger Kit FG2255 50K ssssssssseesesececeesesesesesessssessssssesssese 28 Powering the NXT CHG 6 sccscssccssseceeesececerecesesecesseeccupsdee cents osesdcvsssecebesbecedaeeeeedveveseeusseouece 28 Reading the NXT CHG LED Indicator ccsssssssssssccecesesccesssssssssscseececesssessssessnseeeeaes 29 re Charging the NXT BP batteries using the NXT CHG sssscssssssessessssssseeseeeeeeeeeeeee 29 Recalibrating the batteries i0 c ccccescccesssesesseccceeccessesesusvsvseseccceseeceserdeseretveossaceosscenesesese 29 Installati n sssisescsiceasioncsndisnaanntecsneiancdutsonamuans dusskinnnudan esounabbnieaeareoendusiiinesuvduaucienns 31 OVERVIEW ai sien cssnctscencisicuscnsierensumecen keen cndecnanudsiextuedaisenaeenvasus duneteinsasendiwapassaessenecossaeduens 31 Unpacking the Patiel scsccs scacesccsscsnccsseavevsdsessensbiesesnsossdecesnedbensustnucieeeedecessesnvosesucsesoees 31 Installing the Internal Components cccs ciss scccsesscence sccccesszsedecansecuesessevenstvsenocnssnsussteets 31 Installing the No Button Trim RING c csisscenssocenecnsesesessensseeciocentcessseenssesssecosoeseceense 31 Installing the Button Trim Ring ascctccscascscsssccnscancnevecbsnidvssendessantcbaasekethevecesieanassibeteciies 33 Pre Wall Installation
123. T files and TPD4 touch panel files Connection to a previously powered panel which then reboots allows the PC to Q A mini USB connection is only detected after it is installed onto an active panel detect the panel and assign an appropriate USB driver NOTE 1 Verify this direct USB connection Type A on the panel to mini USB on the panel is configured properly using the steps outlined in the previous two sections 2 With the panel already configured for USB communication and the Virtual Master setup within NetLinx Studio its now time to verify the panel is ready to receive files 3 Click the OnLine Tree tab in the Workspace window to view the devices on the Virtual System The default System value is one 4 Right click on the System entry A in FIG 57 and select Refresh System This causes a refresh of all project systems establishes a new connection to the Virtual Master and populates the System list with devices on your particular system e dio x Il File Edit view Project Build Diagnostics Debug Tools Settings Window Help IAA CEEE TT E n eee System 1 Devices JE 00000 VNM AMX Corp VNM Version 1 0 JE 32001 NSX Application AMX Corp 2 30 CV10 AMX Corp 2 57 51 OID 2 Kernel AMX Corp 2 4 20 62 J OID 3 Root File System AMX Corp v0 03 1 OlD 4 Bootrom AMX Corp None OID 5 Sensor AMX Corp v1 29 J OID 6 Opt File System AMX Corp v0 02 17 OID
124. TINNED COPPER SHIELD ALUM POLYESTER TAPE FOIL SIDE IN FINAL ASSEMBLY TWO ELEMENT 1 amp ELEMENT 2 CABLED ON COMMON AXIS TO MINIMIZE DIAMETER BINDER CLOTH TAPE 25 OVERLAP JACKET 045 WALL FLEXIBLE PVC COLOR BLACK MATT DIAMETER 375 INCHES NOMINAL MARKING NONE FIG 13 Table Top Cable Specification Elements a 2 bd NOTE NOTE Each bundle of 4 twisted pairs includes a colored tape indicator for identification NXA WC80211B CF 802 11b Wireless Card FG2255 03 These touch panels can connect to a wireless network using an optional AMX 802 11b Wireless Interface Card shown in FIG 14 This internal card is field upgradeable within both models of panels FIG 14 NXA WC80211B CF Wireless Interface Card WIC This unit is certified and available for use in the United States FCC Canada IC Europe CE and Japan TELEC The NXA WC80211B CF Wireless Interface Card works with compatible 802 11b Wireless Access Points such as the NXA WAP200G Please follow your particular Wireless Access Point s instruction manual for the correct procedures to setup either a secured or unsecured connection The following table lists the specifications for the wireless interface card 802 11b Wireless Interface Card Specifications Dimensions HWD 2 07 x 1 68 x 0 21 52 56 mm x 42 80 mm x 5 57 mm Weight 13 61 grams 0 030 Ibs Description e 2 4 GHz Direct Sequence Spread Spectru
125. This page specifies settings for various authentication protocols gn Sharedprofie M Allow EAP MDS o ESE Network et er ton AP EAP request timeout seconds 20 EAP Configuration zl tem PAROD Interface el Configuration meere Authentication MS CHAP Configuration 2 M Allow MS CHAP Version 1 AP EAP Request Timeout oy aa MARE MS CHAP Configuration in A Rallis Ee External User Databases M Allow MS CHAP Version 2 Authentication EAP Configuration EE Posture laana Validation EAP is a flexible request response protocol for arbitrary authentication information RFC 2284 EAP is layered on top of another protocol such as UDP zl 4 fa Applet appPing started I Internet start 3 H Manage Your Server E Giscosecure acs Mic La 6 35PM FIG 105 EAP LEAP sample Cisco System Security page gyre pieis X Submit Submit Restart Cancel Wireless Settings Page Security Options EAP FAST EAP Extensible Authentication Protocol is a Enterprise authentication protocol that can be used in both a wired and wireless network environment EAP requires the use of an 802 1x Authentication Server also known as a Radius server Most of the configuration fields described below take variable length strings as inputs Whenever these fields are selected an on screen keyboard appears which allows the string to then be
126. This unit accepts either Composite or S Video from standard video devices This breakout box can be mounted on either a horizontal flat surface or within an equipment rack by using an optional AC RK Rack Kit Composite S Video Chroma Ethernet to panel S Video Luma Power In rear front tl Audio Video In Mic Out Ethernet In Power to panel to panel FIG 4 NXA AVB ETHERNET Breakout Box front and rear views Product Specifications NXA AVB ETHERNET Specifications Dimensions HWD 1 50 x 5 55 x 4 88 3 81 cm x 14 10 cm x 12 40 cm Width when attached to mounting ears 6 65 16 89 cm Power Consumption 50mA with audio video input 23mA with no audio video e Routed through NXA AVB Ethernet using a 12 VDC compliant power supply Certifications FCC Part 15 Class B CE and EN60950 Features Accepts either Composite or S Video video capable panels only e Provides audio distribution to the non video touch panels over a CAT5 cable up to 200 ft e Provides video audio distribution to the video capable touch panels over CAT5 cable up to 200 ft 60 9 m Availability e This unit is included with CV5 CV7 CV10 and 1200V Series Kit configurations Front Components e 2 pin 3 5 mm Phoenix connector for power to the touch panel e Green LED provides an indication of power status e RJ 45 connector provides Ethernet signals to the touch panel e RJ 45 connector provides differential
127. V7 Panels Connector Layout FIG 3 shows the layout of the connectors located on the rear of the base on the NXT and on the left side panel of the NXD panels Ethernet CAT5 Keyboard Mouse Audio Video from USB Stereo Output NXA AVB ETHERNET CAT5 A L 6 oo Mini USB lt al a Program To mi fam rF ina PROGRAM ETHERNET KEYBOARD AUDIO VIDEO MOUSE 130c AUDIOMEEO PIR o n y api I m f NXT CV7 connectors located NXD CV7 connectors located on rear panel of the base on left side panel FIG 3 Connector layout on the CV7 touch panels CV7 Touch Panel Accessories Overview The following section outlines and describes both the included accessories and other AMX equipment available for these touch panels NXA AVB ETHERNET Breakout Box FG2254 10 The NXA AVB ETHERNET Breakout Box FIG 4 is included as part of the CV7 Kit configuration panel and box but can be purchased as a separate accessory This box facilitates the installation and distribution of video data and audio to Modero touch panels located up to 200 feet 60 96 m from the AVB box
128. W2258_02 for the CV7 This new firmware file provides both backwards compatibility with the previous 802 11b cards and new security protocols for the new 802 11g wireless CF card upgrade process you will be required to configure NetLinx Studio to communicate with the target panel via a direct USB connection CAUTION In this communication scenario your PC acts as a Virtual NetLinx Master establishing a secure USB connection to the target panel and then uploading the new Kit file D If you don t first update the firmware file on the panel before proceeding with the card Installation and Upgrade of the Internal NXT Components Upgrading the cards within the Table Top panel involves removing the outer housing with speaker plate removing the existing card replacing it with the 802 11g upgrade and then placing the outer housing back onto the NXT panel as described in the following sections These panels do not come factory installed with the NXA WC802 11GCF wireless interface card This card must be ordered separately from AMX as part of the 802 11g upgrade kit FG2255 07 C Do not use Ethernet cables containing mounting boots These boots could make removal of the Ethernet connectors from the panel difficult and cumbersome NOTE Step 1 Remove the existing NXT Outer Housing 1 Carefully detach all connectors from the rear of the touch panel and then gently place the touch panel LCD facedown onto a soft cloth to expose the under
129. a a e Fiecee aa Touch Pare Tosh Paws fill iabes Tash Parmar COD po Tus Aug 24 09 59 16 2004 f Fri Feb 18 120020 2005 A E eer ggi Mon Jun 06 14 05 13 2005 Ueto prt rete tet a otre Prt breman Pam imta ramae Serre P Ees Reems eaa FIG 84 Project Information page showing the TPD4 project properties tabs The elements of the Project Information page are described in the table below Project Information Page Elements Back Returns you to the previously active touch panel page Connection Status icon This visual display of the connection status allows the user to have a current visual update of the panel s connection status regardless of what page is currently active A Lock only appears on the icon if the panel has established a connection with a currently secured target Master requiring a username and password File Name Displays the name of the TPDesign4 project file downloaded to the panel DesignerID Displays the designer information File Revision Displays the revision number of the file Dealer ID Displays the dealer ID number unique to every dealer and entered in TPD4 Job Name Displaysthejobname S Sales Order Displays the sales order information Purchase Order Displays the purchase order information AMX IR 38k Assigned Port Displays the AMX 38 kHz IR channel port used by the IR receiver on the panel e This informati
130. after you are finished assigning the alpha numeric string of the host name Press the Primary DNS field to open a Keyboard enter the Primary DNS Address provided by your System Administrator and press Done when compete Repeat this process for the Secondary DNS field Press the Domain field to open a Keyboard enter the resolvable domain Address this is provided by your System Administrator and equates to a unique Internet name for the panel and press Done when complete Navigate to the Master Connection section of this page to begin configuring the communication parameters for the target Master Step 2 Choose a Master Connection Mode Setting There are three Ethernet MODE settings used in the Master Connection section of the System Settings page URL is the most common method e Master Connection MODE options URL Uniform Resource Locator is the address that defines the route to a file on the Web or any other Internet facility In this system the panel acts as a Client and the Master acts as a Server in that Clients attach to it e LISTEN sets the Modero panel to listen for broadcasts from the Master using the panel IP from its URL list In this system the panel acts as a Server in that Clients attach to it and the Master acts as a Client e AUTO is used to instruct the Modero to search for a Master that uses the same System Number assigned within the Master Connection section and resides on the same S
131. ame used to login to a secured server or workstation This works in tandem with the Password string which is similar to the password entered to gain access to a secured workstation Note Typically this is in the form of a username such as jdoe amx com e Use the on screen keyboard s Clear button to completely erase any previously stored identity username information Password When pressed the panel displays an on screen keyboard which allows you to enter the network password string specified for the user entered within the Identity field This is also how the panel identifies itself to the Authentication RADIUS Server e This information is similar to the password entered to gain access to a secured workstation e Use the on screen keyboard s Clear button to completely erase any previously stored passwords Wireless Security EAP LEAP Settings Cont e Use the Save button to store the new security information incorporate it and then return to the previous Wireless Settings page Save Cancel e Use the Cancel button to cancel any updates to the security parameters and return to the previous Wireless Settings page A CiscoSecure ACS Microsoft Internet Explorer Eile Edit View Favorites Tools Help Q Back O x 2 E seach Favorites O7 OG Cisco Systems System Configuration LEAP var L allow LEAP For Aironet only Stub EAP MD5 Global Authentication Setup
132. ame way Toggle a as the Toggle Popup command in TPDesign4 specific popup page oneithera Syntax specified page or PPG lt popup page name gt lt page name gt the current page Variable popup page name 1 50 ASCII characters Name of the popup page page name 1 50 ASCII characters Name of the page the popup is displayed On Example SEND_COMMAND Panel PPG Popup1 Main Toggles the popup page Popup1 on the Main page from one state to another On Off Example 2 SEND_COMMAND Panel PPG Popup1 Toggles the popup page Popup1 on the current page from one state to another On Off Page Commands Cont PPK Kill refers to the deactivating Off of a popup window from all pages If the pop up page is Kill a specific part of a group the whole group is deactivated This command works in the same way as popup page from the Clear Group command in TPDesign 4 all pages Syntax PPK lt popup page name gt Variable popup page name 1 50 ASCII characters Name of the popup page Example SEND_COMMAND Panel PPK Popup1 Kills the popup page Popup1 on all pages PPM A Modal popup page when active only allows you to use the buttons and features on that Set the modality POPUP page All other buttons on the panel page are inactivated of a specific Syntax popup page to PPM lt popup page name gt lt mode gt Modal or NonModal Variable popup
133. anel powers up press and hold the grey Front Setup Access button for 3 seconds to proceed to the Setup page 7 Select Protected Setup gt System Settings located on the lower left to open the System Settings page FIG 68 System Settings IP Settings Master Gommection Gateway wastenPURIE 192 1 loet Name z Masten ort 131 Number Obtained anyone 192 168 168 7 Demane from Seconda DNS 192 168 168 9 Password NetLinx Domain Master EffiemenMode MAG Nelle 00 00 00 00 00 AD FIG 68 System Settings page Master Connection section Virtual Master communication over Ethernet When configuring your panel to communicate with a Virtual Master on your PC via Ethernet the Master IP URL field must be configured to match the IP Address of the PC and make sure to use the Virtual System value assigned to the Virtual Master NOTE within NetLinx Studio Before beginning 1 Verify the panel has been configured to communicate either through an Ethernet cable connected from either the panel to a valid Ethernet Hub or wireless to the Wireless Access Point 2 Launch NetLinx Studio 2 x default location is Start gt Programs gt AMX Control Disc gt NetLinx Studio 2 gt NetLinx Studio 2 3 Select Settings gt Master Communication Settings from the Main menu to open the Master Communication Settings dialog FIG 69 Avahithe Syed Contigurstion Seang E Eeeeh Sytem Tema Serge Mo ctve Spem Delad Seting Conte
134. as installed on your PC during the installation of the latest NetLinx Studio and TPDesign4 software application installations These applications should be installed prior to setting up a USB connection to the panel The driver does not contain a Microsoft digital signature and Windows then informs you of such 9 Click Yes when told that a digital signature was not found This action accepts the installation of the new AMX USB driver The panel is now configured to communicate directly with the PC e This process completes the association between driver and device Each time the same touch panel is connected to the computer the driver is automatically loaded using a unique name example USB LAN LINK 1 2 Each time a different touch panel is connected to the computer the previous procedures will need to be repeated 10 Navigate back to the System Settings page Step 3 Confirm and View the current AMX USB device connections The USB driver information can be confirmed via two different methods Via the Control panel previous steps 1 and 2 or e Via the Unplug or Eject Hardware icon from the Taskbar 1 Navigate to Start gt Settings gt Control Panel gt and double click the System icon to launch the System Properties dialog 2 Select the Hardware tab and click on the Device Manager button to launch the Device Manager dialog e Within the Device Manager dialog the AMX USBLAN device appears under Network Adapters FIG
135. aster requiring a username and password Setup Page Elements Cont Connection Status Displays whether the panel is communicating externally the encryption status of the communicating Master what connection type is being used Ethernet or USB and what System the panel is a part of This visual display of the connection status is also reflected at the upper right of each firmware page This allows the user to have a current visual update of the panel s connection status regardless of what page is currently active When a connection is established the message displayed is either Connected via Ethernet or Connected via USB If no connection can be established by the Modero panel it will continue to try and establish a connection while displaying Attempting via The word Encrypted appears only when an encrypted connection is established with a target Master The panel must be rebooted before incorporating any panel communication changes and detecting any active Ethernet connections The Ethernet connection is not detected until after a reboot Display Panel Timeout Sets the length of time the panel can remain idle before activating the sleep mode When the device goes into sleep mode the LCD is powered down Press the UP DN buttons to increase decrease the time until the panel times out Range 0 240 minutes e Use this button to set the timeout value to zero and disable the sleep mode e
136. ation the breakout box can be purchased as a separate accessory Trim Ring with button openings 60 2258 16 factory installed on NXD models only e Trim Ring without button openings 60 2258 21 NXD models only Other AMX Equipment CB TP7 FG035 10 7 metallic rough in box for Wall Mount installations e CC USB Type A to Mini B 5 Wire programming cable FG10 5965 e NXA BASE 1 Battery Base Kit FG2255 05K Battery base and NXT BP battery NXT panels only e NXA RK7 FG2904 53 RackMourt kit for 7 Wall Mount touch panels NXD panels only Kit includes eight 10 32 screws and washers e NXA WC80211GCF Wireless Upgrade Kit FG2255 07 AMX 802 11G Compact Flash provides wireless Ethernet support Other AMX Equipment Cont e NXT BP FG2255 10 Battery pack for Table Top panels e NXT CHG Kit FG2250 50K Battery charger and two NXT BP batteries Upgrade Compact Flash factory programmed with firmware NXA CV7CF128M 128 MB Compact Flash card FG2116 60 NXA CV7CF256M 256 MB Compact Flash card FG2116 61 NXA CV7CF512M 512 MB Compact Flash card FG2116 62 NXA CV7CF1G 1 GB Compact Flash card FG2116 63 It is recommended that firmware KIT files only be transferred over a direct USB or Ethernet connection and only when the panel is connected to a power supply If battery power or wireless connection fails during a firmware upgrade the panel flash file system may become corrupted C
137. ation Buttons a ai These Navigation Buttons are specific to these Modero panels and include panel specific elements described in the following table Protected Setup Navigation Button Elements G4 Web Control Press the G4 Web Control button to access the G4 Web Control page where you can enable or disable display and control of your panel via the web by a PC running a VNC client e Refer to the G4 Web Control Page section on page 101 for more detailed information Sensors Press the Sensors button to access the Sensors Setup page where you can modify monitor both the light and motion sensor settings e Refer to the Sensor Setup section on page 103 for more detailed information Passwords Press the Passwords button to access the Passwords Setup page where you can specify up to five security passwords Default password is 1988 e Refer to the Password Setup Page section on page 106 for more detailed information Calibrate Wireless Settings Press the Calibrate button to access the Calibration page where you can use the displayed set of crosshairs to calibrate a touch panel e Refer to the Calibration Page section on page 107 for more detailed information Press the Wireless Settings button to access the Wireless Settings page where you can setup the wireless connection parameters used by the internal NXA WC80211GCF wireless interface card e Refer to the Wireless Settings Page section on page 107 for
138. beep of duration 1 beep even if beep is Off ADBEEP Output a double beep even if beep is Off Syntax ADBEEP Example SEND COMMAND Panel ADBEEP Outputs a double beep even if beep is Off Panel Runtime Operation Commands Cont AKB Pop up the keyboard icon and initialize the text string to that Keyboard string is set to null on power up and is stored until power is lost The Prompt Text is optional Syntax AKB lt initial text gt lt prompt text gt keyboard icon and initialize the text string to that specified Variables initial text 1 50 ASCII characters prompt text 1 50 ASCII characters Example SEND COMMAND Panel AKB Texas Enter State Pops up the Keyboard and initializes the text string Texas with prompt text Enter State AKEYB Keyboard string is set to null on power up and is stored until power is lost Pop up the Syntax AKEYB lt initial text gt Variables keypad icon and initialize the text string to that specified initial text 1 50 ASCII characters Example SEND COMMAND Panel AKEYB This is a Test Pops up the Keyboard and initializes the text string This is a Test AKEYP The keypad string is set to null on power up and is stored until power is lost Pop up the Syntax AKEYP lt number string gt Variables keypad icon and initialize the text string to that specified specified number
139. border by name AMX Elite to those buttons with the variable text range of 500 504 amp 510 515 The border style is available through the TPDesign4 border style drop down list Refer to theTPD4 Border Styles by Name table on page 141 for more information Elite M Set or clear the protected page flip ABOS Syntax Set the button to ABOS lt vt addr range gt lt button states range gt lt video state gt display either a Variable Video or iabl Non Video variable text address range 1 4000 window button states range 1 256 for multi state buttons 0 All states for General buttons 1 Off state and 2 On state video state Video Off 0 and Video On 1 Example SEND_COMMAND Panel BOS 500 1 1 Sets the button to display video ABPP Zero clears the flag Syntax BPP lt vt addr range gt lt protected page flip flag value gt Set the border of a button state states en Variable variable text address range 1 4000 protected page flip flag value range 0 4 0 clears the flag Example SEND_COMMAND Panel BPP 500 1 Sets the button to protected page flip flag 1 sets it to password 1 ABRD Only if the specified border is not the same as the current border The border names are available through the TPDesign4 border name drop down list Syntax lt BRD lt vt addr range gt lt button states range gt lt border name gt Variable variable text address range
140. ccetectccssncecededcdsccsadasssccdsstenscnssedsesesoonsoaecdedacsasssonsanssvevevececdascesscescsetedsecccdbeseebietescetevesss 138 Programming Numbers wacsicsscccescisssssecssesscvccsecesssssesessesostoesiccssecosuscntsncsbsoneosusessenees 139 RGB Triplets and Names For Basic 88 Colors cccccsssssssssssssssssssceceeesessssssesessseeeees 139 Font Styles and ID NUmbers c cecceccsesessessescscecpiceceecessersveccesocecsneeveedeesesevcesccdensnes 141 Border Styles cc scsssscccccccssssstsssissaseseosescscssesstesssosaaseossoscecavessassstssesccoesesediesezadezssoseaseoes 141 TA Button Commands sesccsccesssscssussnnssesevseseecesstunecwpenoess Sinnes eserine enuas Eeri nEss 144 PAN E E 144 SAPP r E E E 144 ABAT E E EE O E E 144 PBA E a E E E E 145 ieie e e E E I A E T 145 ABP E E E E E E E 145 SBC EEE E E A E E EEE E T T 146 ABDO see E E E E a Ep eE EEEE A EEEE E EEEE EEE 146 SB PB icssssisvstistedesapschatectoccdesaaasdsesnscessdetdssssssssczseachtceeeosesssduitaussuensasdedesseeosssensleessbenbecuessuaseuuseaserts 146 SBM sis siaascavtestscstiathststhasee dewasboasonczwssosaessesstessesraceed coeseascasanGdssnuscsdssdasasssasdssasaicscssecoseosavcucsesseaas 147 BLN sssivavescecatecesccesbeusscadadebwosmeduegestuesesdssccedececadetesdcasiuebesensuusnsedusagnscosdcendegetcsntesesdabudautessvesseuas 147 PBMG vcsaics pesinee ea ceuecassessodustasssassansspseezsvasanieeassssbowadeusdosabusausaasesesouecesesessatasecesdsscusepsesseuss 148 BB
141. changes color illuminates and displays the words Motion Detected when motion is detected by the Modero panel s front motion sensor The Motion Sensor Port field indicates the port used to report the motion sensor channel back to the NetLinx Master set in TPD4 read only The Motion Sensor Channel field indicates the channel used to report the motion sensor channel back to the NetLinx Master set in TPD4 read only NOTE NOTE Sensor Setup Page Elements Cont Wake Panel On Motion The Wake Panel Sensitivity relates to the sensitivity of the motion sensor to Sense detect motion and wake the panel accordingly Toggle the Enable Enabled button to either active inactive this feature Enable activates this feature Activating this feature reactivates the panel from a panel timeout sleep mode Enabled illuminated when selected deactivates this feature and makes the panel use the specified Display Timeout value set on the Setup Page Use the Wake Panel UP DN buttons to alter the sensitivity value Range 0 100 The horizontal WAKE PANEL SENSITIVITY bargraph indicates the current motion sensitivity value associated with waking the panel from a timeout There is a relationship between the motion sensor and the panel sleep feature If a panel is set to Sleep Mode there is a time delay before the motion sensor is activated to detect motion By creating a time delay to the detectio
142. ck onto the main NXD unit B in FIG 39 Make sure to align the Microphone Light and PIR Motion sensor locations to their respective openings on the front faceplate bezel 12 Reconnect the terminal RJ 45 Ethernet USB and any optional audio video wiring to their respective locations on either the NXA AVB ETHERNET Breakout Box Ethernet port or NetLinx Master al 13 Reconnect the terminal power connector on the 12 VDC compliant power supply and apply power Installing the NXD into a Flat Surface using 4 screws Mounting screws 4 40 included are secured through two sets of circular holes located at the left and right sides of the NXD CV7 The most important thing to remember when mounting the NXD Wall Mount is that the outer frame Mounting Tabs must be installed flush against the mounting surface Refer to SP 2258 01 for detailed installation dimensions reproduced in FIG 40 e It is recommended that you cutout the surface slightly smaller than what is outlined in the installation drawings so that you can make any necessary cutout adjustments 1 Prepare the area by removing any screws or nails from the surface before beginning the cutout process 2 Cut out the surface for the NXD Wall Mount unit using the dimensions shown in FIG 40 2x 4 00 S THESE 4 HOLES ARE ONLY HEN MOUNTING UN 34 TALLATION OF 4 4 SERTS AT THESE 4 z IJ K na FRONT BEZEL D
143. comma space percent or just ran together command Copy attributes of Syntax the source button lt BMC lt vt addr range gt lt button states range gt lt source to all the port gt lt source address gt lt source state gt lt codes gt destination j buttons Variable variable text address range 1 4000 button states range 1 256 for multi state buttons 0 All states for General buttons 1 Off state and 2 On state source port 1 100 source address 1 4000 source state 1 256 codes BM Picture Bitmap BR Border CB Border Color CF Fill Color CT Text Color EC Text effect color EF Text effect FT Font IC Icon JB Bitmap alignment JI Icon alignment JT Text alignment LN Lines of video removed OP Opacity SO Button Sound TX Text VI Video slot ID WW Word wrap on off Example SEND_COMMAND Panel BMC 425 1 1 500 1 BR or SEND_COMMAND Panel BMC 425 1 1 500 1 BR Copies the OFF state border of button with a variable text address of 500 onto the OFF state border of button with a variable text address of 425 Example 2 SEND_COMMAND Panel BMC 150 1 1 315 1 SBR amp FT TX BM ICSCF CT Copies the OFF state border font Text bitmap icon fill color and text color of the button with a variable text address of 315 onto the OFF state border font Text bitmap icon fill color and text color of the button with a variable text add
144. continue with steps 3 The panel MUST be powered and configured for USB communication before connecting the mini USB connector to the panel s Program Port 2 Connect the terminal end of the 12 VDC compliant power supply cable to the power connector on the rear side of the touch panel and then apply power 3 After the panel powers up press and hold the grey Front Setup Access button for 3 seconds to continue with the setup process and proceed to the Setup page 4 Select Protected Setup gt System Settings located on the lower left to open the System Settings page FIG 52 System Settings No connection is established until the Virtual Master becomes PISeHIAge Master Connection 4 active within Studio Yellow Connection Status icon indicates an unreliable network connection Red Connection Status icon indicates no connection to a Virtual Master Green Connection Status icon indicates communication to a Virtual Master FIG 52 USB System Settings page using a USB Connection Type 5 Toggle the blue Type field from the Master Connection section until the choice cycles to USB Refer to the System Settings Page section on page 130 for more information about the fields on this page gt ALL fields are then greyed out and read only but still display any previous network information NOTE 6 Press the Back button on the touch panel to return to the Protected Setup page 7 Press the on screen
145. count value being used by the panel Serial Number Displays the specific serial number value assigned to the panel Setup Pages Version Displays the type and version of the Setup pages being used by the panel Screen Width Displays the pixel width being used to display the incoming video signal on the Modero panel e Maximum available screen width on a CV7 Modero panel is 800 pixels Screen Height Displays the pixel height being used to display the incoming video signal on the Modero panel e Maximum available screen height on a CV7 Modero panel is 480 pixels Screen Refresh Rate Displays the video refresh rate applied to the incoming video signal from the panel Default rate is 60 Screen Rotation Power Up Pages Displays the degree of rotation applied to the on screen image Displays the first touch panel page assigned for display after the device is powered up e This information is taken from the TPD4 project file e Most projects begin with a Main page Start Up String Displays the start up string Wake Up String Displays the wake up string used after an activation from a timeout Sleep String Displays the sleep string used during a panel s sleep mode File System Displays the amount of Compact Flash memory available on the Modero panel RAM Displays the available RAM or Extended Memory module on the Modero panel Time amp Date Setup Page T
146. d Setup Page section on page 95 for more detailed information Video Adjustment Page The Video Setup page FIG 88 accessed by pressing the Video Adjustment button on the Setup page sets the Video properties of the incoming video signal from an NXA AVB ETHERNET Breakout Box Brightness Gontrast t Satauon Incoming Video signal Once done making your screen adjustments SAVE SETTINGS FIG 88 Video Setup page showing default values The elements of the Video Setup page are described in the table below Video Setup Page Elements Back Saves the changes and returns you to the previously active touch panel page Connection Status icon This visual display of the connection status allows the user to have a current visual update of the panel s connection status regardless of what page is currently active A Lock only appears on the icon if the panel has established a connection with a currently secured target Master requiring a username and password Settings e The Default Settings button sets the video settings to their default values indicated in this table The Undo Changes button disregards any changes made on the page since the last settings were saved The Save Settings button saves any changes made to this page Video Settings The Black amp White button toggles the Black amp White display mode Default Off The Sharpness button toggles the Interpolate Sharpness fea
147. d the Wireless Access Point For example if you have your Wireless Access Point set to default key 4 which NOTE was 01 02 03 04 05 you must set the panel s key 4 to 01 02 03 04 05 10 Toggle the Default Key field until the you ve chosen a WEP Key value from 1 4 that matches what you ll be using on your target WAP200G This value MUST MATCH on both devices These WEP Key identifier values must match for both devices 11 With the proper WEP Key value displayed press the Generate button to launch the WEP Passphrase keyboard If you are wanting to have your target WAP other than an NXA WAP200G generate the Current Key Do not press the Generate button and continue with Step 13 e This keyboard allows you to enter a Passphrase such as AMXPanel and then AUTOMATICALLY generate a WEP key which is compatible only among all Modero panels Or Therefore this same Passphrase generates identical keys when done on any Modero because they all use the same Modero specific generator The Passphrase NOTE generator is case sensitive The code key generator on Modero panels use the same key generation formula 12 Within this on screen WEP Passphrase keyboard FIG 66 enter a character string or word such as AMXPanel and press Done when you have finished WEP Bassphrase AMXPanel_ DEICIDE VE ME VE VE VE Back 7 Delete Enter Tome 7 Sir Ena 298 Done FIG 66 WEP Passphrase Keyboard e Asanexample ente
148. d within Studio and are user editable 8 Click the New button to open the New TCP IP Settings dialog where you can enter both a previously obtained DHCP or Static IP Address and an associated description for the connection into their respective fields 0 Avalatie Systems Corgan Settings System E lt Temna Setting lt No Active System Delad Setenge TOP Settings Corliguratiorr Curert Setting TCPAP Addess 0 0 00 New Derception Pot 1019 gt Avtomaticaly Ping the Marter Contoller to Erre Avalsbity TCPIAPURL Description Pot Ping Host D000 19 TRUE New TCP IP Setting TCPAP Addes E E Dercrig on Carcel Pat 73 E Automatically Ping the Master Cortrole to enue sva abity Communication Settings Platiorm Seinntinn Transpad Connection Option Netin Master TCPAP Axcess Maxtor F Sena F Modom Audhericaton Reaared Master Controller User Name and Password F ValualNelLrn Marie User Name and Ps FIG 80 Assigning Master Communication Settings and TCP IP Settings 9 Place a checkmark within the Automatically Ping the Master Controller to ensure availability radio box to make sure the Master is initially responding online before establishing full communication 10 Click OK to close the current New TCP IP Settings dialog and return to the previous TCP IP Settings dialog where you must locate your new entry within the List of Addresses section 11 Click the
149. dard AES as the cipher engine for 802 111 which the Wi Fi Alliance has branded as WPA2 802 111 WPA2 802 1x TKIP MIC AES Encryption a 2 z v re lt FIG 113 WPA2 Overview EAP Authentication EAP Extensible Authentication Protocol is an Enterprise authentication protocol that can be used in both a wired and wireless network environment EAP requires the use of an 802 1x Authentication Server also known as a Radius server Although there are currently over 40 different EAP methods defined the current internal Modero 802 11g wireless card and accompanying firmware only support the following EAP methods listed from simplest to most complex EAP LEAP Cisco Light EAP EAP FAST Cisco Flexible Authentication via Secure Tunneling a k a LEAPv2 The following use certificates EAP PEAP Protected EAP EAP TTLS Tunneled Transport Layer Security e EAP TLS Transport Layer Security EAP requires the use of an 802 1x authentication server also known as a Radius server Sophisticated Access Points such as Cisco can use a built in Radius server The most common RADIUS servers used in wireless networks today are Microsoft Sever 2003 e Juniper Odyssey once called Funk Odyssey Meetinghouse AEGIS Server DeviceScape RADIUS Server Cisco Secure ACS EAP characteristics The following table outlines the differences among the various EAP Methods from most secure at the to
150. dates client panel Private Key and Private Key Password Identity Save Cancel FIG 110 Wireless Settings page EAP TLS security method Wireless Security EAP TLS Settings SSID Service Set Identifier The SSID is the unique name used on the WAP and then assigned to all panels in a wireless network that are communicating to the same target WAP e This is required by the WAP before the panel is permitted to join the wireless network e It is case sensitive and must not exceed 32 characters which may be any keyboard character Make sure this setting is the same for all points in your wireless network This unique string identifies the network and is the same string for all users on the same network e Use the on screen keyboard s Clear button to completely erase any previously stored SSID information e Note In all cases the SSID of the WAP must be entered If it is left blank the panel will try to connect to the first access point which can be found that supports EAP In this situation however a successful connection is not guaranteed because the identified WAP may be connected to a RADIUS server which does not support the specified EAP type and or may not have the proper user identities configured Wireless Security EAP TLS Settings Cont Identity When pressed the panel displays an on screen keyboard which allows you to enter an EAP Identity string which is how the panel identifi
151. des of the display for 3 seconds CV7 CV10 Pressing the grey Front Setup Access button for 3 seconds 4 Select Protected Setup gt System Settings located on the lower left to open the System Settings page 5 Toggle the blue Type field from the Master Connection section until the choice cycles to USB The connection remains RED after changing the communication from Ethernet to USB until the panel is rebooted Once the panel restarts the connection turns a dark green until connected to an active USB cable 6 Press the Back button on the touch panel to return to the Protected Setup page 7 Press the on screen Reboot button to both save any changes and restart the panel Remember that the panel s connection type must be set to USB prior to rebooting the panel and prior to inserting the USB connector 8 ONLY AFTER the unit displays the first panel page THEN insert the mini USB connector into the Program Port on the panel It may take a minute for the panel to detect the new connection and send a signal to the PC indicated by a green System Connection icon If this is your first time installing the USB driver a USB driver installation popup window appears on the PC 9 Complete the USB driver installation process by clicking Yes and then installing the new AMX USB LAN LINK when told that a new USB device was found This action accepts the installation of the new AMX USB driver 10 Reboot the panel Once restarted the pane
152. e AMX Software include PRE RELEASE CODE and such code may not be at the level of performance compatibility and functionality of the GA code The PRE RELEASE CODE may not operate correctly and may be substantially modified prior to final release or certain features may not be generally released AMX is not obligated to make or support any PRE RELEASE CODE ALL PRE RELEASE CODE IS PROVIDED AS IS WITH NO WARRANTIES LIMITED WARRANTY AMX warrants that the AMX Software other than pre release code will perform substantially in accor dance with the accompanying written materials for a period of ninety 90 days from the date of receipt AMX DISCLAIMS ALL OTHER WARRANTIES EITHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE WITH REGARD TO THE AMX SOFTWARE THIS LIM ITED WARRANTY GIVES LICENSEE SPECIFIC LEGAL RIGHTS Any supplements or updates to the AMX SOFTWARE including without limitation any if any service packs or hot fixes provided to Licensee after the expiration of the ninety 90 day Limited Warranty period are not covered by any warranty or condition express implied or statutory LICENSEE REMEDIES AMX s entire liability and Licensee s exclusive remedy shall be repair or replacement of the AMX Soft ware that does not meet AMX s Limited Warranty and which is returned to AMX in accordance with AMX s current return policy This Limited Warranty is void if failure
153. e NXD CV7 Mounting Tabs must lie flush against the outside of the sheetrock FIG 36 Refer to SP 2258 02 for detailed installation dimensions e Itis recommended that you cut out the surface slightly smaller than what is outlined in the installation drawings so that you can make any necessary cutout adjustments e The wiring knockouts on the left side will be used for the NXD CV7 Wall Mount panel connectors so always secure the rough in box to the stud using the Stud Mounting Holes on the right side of the box cl NOTE 1 Rest the right Stud Mounting tabs onto the stud keeping the knockouts on the left Be sure to leave enough of a gap between the stud and NXD Mounting tabs to accommodate the installation of the drywall or sheetrock after the rough in box has been mounted Ultimately the Mounting Tabs should lie flush against the outside of the sheetrock 2 Fasten the CB TP7 rough in box to the stud through the holes on the right Stud Mounting tabs FIG 36 using either nails or screws Stud Mounting tabs oN a Stud X Wiring knockouts must be pn NXD Mounting tabs located on Q should lie flush against left side U the outside of the wall Drywall or sheetrock ra FIG 36 CB TP7 rough in box components 3 Remove the wiring knockouts from the left side of the rough in box CB TP7 FIG 36 to accommodate the cables being threaded through to the NXD touch panel Remember that when mounting this
154. e These fields display the time in three formats STANDARD STANDARD AM PM and 24 HOUR Date Display fields These fields display the calendar date information in several different formats Set Date Time This section provides a user with both UP DN arrow buttons to alter the Master s calendar date and time The blue circle indicates which field is cur rently selected Select the Year field and use the UP DN buttons to alter the year value range 2000 2037 e Select the Month field and use the UP DN buttons to alter the month value range 1 12 Select the Day field and use the UP DN buttons to alter the day value range 1 31 Select the Hour field and use the UP DN buttons to alter the hour value 24 hour military e Select the Minute field and use the UP DN buttons to alter the minute value range 0 59 e Select the Second field and use the UP DN buttons to alter the second value range 0 59 Modero touch panels do not have an on board clock This page both receives and sets the time date of the NetLinx Master NOTE Volume Page The Volume page FIG 87 accessed by pressing the Audio Adjustments button on the Setup page allows you to adjust the master volume parameters and default panel sounds on the panel Volume gt M Master Voume Aneta J Saar 4 Breakoutbox Intercom 65 JEA Ay S ine in Level 50 A Ay S lt Mic Out Level Int
155. e WAPs Secured WAP shown selected Manually entering the SSID information into the appropriate field by following step 8 8 Press the SSID field and from the Network Name SSID keyboard enter the SSID name you are using on your target Wireless Access Point case sensitive and press Done when finished e The card should be given the SSID used by the target WAP If this field is left blank the unit will attempt to connect to the first available WAP By default all WAP200Gs use AMX as their assigned SSID value One of the most common problems associated with connection to a WAP arise because the SSID was not entered properly You must maintain the same case when entering this information ABC is not the same as Abc e The alpha numeric string is by default AMX but can later be changed to any 32 character entry This string must be duplicated within the Network Name SSID field on the WAP e Asan example if you use TECHPUBS as your SSID you must match this word and the case within both the Network Name SSID field on the touch panel s Network Name SSID field and on the WAP s Basic Wireless Configuration page 9 Toggle the Encryption field FIG 64 until it reads either 64 Bit Key Size or 128 Bit Key Size The 64 128 selection reflects the bit level of encryption security This WEP encryption level must match the encryption level being used on the WAP WEP will not work unless the same Default Key is set on both the panel an
156. e application e Ability to load a previously created list of target touch panels e Ability to save the current list of target Modero panel as a file e Ability to track the progress of the certificate upload by noting the current data size being transmitted and any associated error messages if any The Certificate Upload Utility recognizes the following certificate file types e CER Certificate File e DER Distinguished Encoding Rules e PEM Privacy Enhanced Mail e PFX Normal Windows generated certificate e PVK Private Key file Configuring your G4 Touch Panel for USB Communication For a personal computer to establish a connection to a Modero panel via USB the target computer must have the appropriate AMX USB driver installed This installation is bundled into the latest TPDesign4 and NetLinx Studio2 software setup process or can be downloaded independently from the main Application Files page on www amx com Close the Certificate Upload Utility before configuring the touch panel s USB driver gt Only after the panel has been successfully setup to communicate via USB can you then re launch the utility NOTE Step 1 Setup the Panel and PC for USB Communication 1 If you do not currently have the latest version of TPDesign4 navigate to www amx com gt Tech Center gt Downloadable Files gt Application Files gt NetLinx Design Tools section of the website and locate the AMX USB Driver executable AMX USBLAN Setup exe
157. e base provides both power and battery information to the panel via the panel interface connector The NXT BP battery can be charged through either the base only when connected to the NXT CV7 touch panel or through an optional NXT CHG Modero Power Station Kit FG2255 50K When used with the optional battery base the CV7 panels will charge the battery during full operation Panel Interface connector NXT BP Modero Power Pack NXA BASE 1 Battery Base FIG 25 NXA BASE 1 Kit consists of one BASE 1 and a single NXT BP NOTE NOTE NXA BASE 1 Specifications Dimensions HWD 0 93 x 5 96 x 6 89 2 36 cm x 15 14 cm x 17 51 cm Power Requirements 1 4 A 12 VDC max power draw while charging a single battery Weight Base unit 0 75 Ibs 0 34 kg e Base and 1 battery 1 75 lbs 0 79 kg Features e Charge time for single depleted battery 5 8 hours e Must be connected to a Modero unit utilizing a 12 VDC compliant power supply Operating Storage e Operating Temperature 0 C 32 F to 40 C 104 F Environment Operating Humidity 20 85 RH e Storage Temperature 20 C 4 F to 60 C 140 F e Storage Humidity 5 85 RH Included Accessories NXA BASE 1 FG2250 05k 1 battery base and 1 NXT BP battery Other AMX Equipment NXT CHG Kit FG2250 50K 1 charger and 2 NXT BP batteries NXT BP battery pack FG2255 10 additional Before beginning the
158. e length Example SEND COMMAND Panel BRD 529 1 Gets the button OFF state border information The result sent to the Master would be ButtonGet Id 529 Type 1014 Flag VALUE1 1 VALUE2 22 VALUE3 0 TEXT Double Bevel Raised L TEXT LENGTH 22 Button Query Commands Cont BWW Syntax Get the current 2BWW lt vt addr range gt lt button states range gt word wrap flag Variable status variable text address range 1 4000 button states range 1 256 for multi state buttons 0 All states for General buttons 1 Off state and 2 On state custom event type 1010 Flag Zero Value1 Button state number Value2 0 no word wrap 1 word wrap Value3 Zero Text Blank Text length Zero Example SEND COMMAND Panel BWW 529 1 Gets the button OFF state word wrap flag status information The result sent to the Master would be ButtonGet Id 529 Type 1010 Flag 0 VALUE1 1 VALUE2 1 VALUE3 0 TEXT TEXT LENGTH 0 FON Syntax Get the current 2FON lt vt addr range gt lt button states range gt font index Variable variable text address range 1 4000 button states range 1 256 for multi state buttons 0 All states for General buttons 1 Off state and 2 On state custom event type 1007 Flag Zero Value1 Button state number Value2 Font index Value3 Zero Text Blank Text length Zero Example SEND
159. e main NetLinx Studio application 10 Click the OnLine Tree tab in the Workspace window to view the devices on the Virtual System The default System value is one 11 Right click on the Empty Device Tree System entry and select Refresh System to re populate the list The panel will not appear as a device below the virtual system number in the Online Tree tab until both the system number used in step 8 for the VNM is entered into the Master Connection section of the System Settings page and the panel is restarted The Connection status turns green after a few seconds to indicate an active USB connection to the PC Virtual Master No Lock icon is displayed because this USB connection is not secured requiring a username password If the G4 panel does not appear refer to the Troubleshooting section on page 201 for more information NOTE e Ifafew minutes have gone by and the System Connection icon still does not turn green repeat the USB connection and Virtual Master setup procedures outlined in this section Refreshing the System sends out a request to the panel to respond and completes the communication turning the System Connection icon green Step 5 Confirm and View the current AMX USB device connections Use the CC USB Type A to Mini B 5 wire programming cable FG10 5965 to provide communication between the mini USB Program port on the touch panel and the PC This method of communication is used to transfer firmware KI
160. e panel connects to the RADIUS server This file is then saved NOTE into the panel s file system and is then reused from then on It is possible for the user to change a setting such as a new Identity that would invalidate this certificate In that case the pane must be forced to download a new PAC file To do this set Automatic PAC Provisioning to Disabled and then back to Enabled This forces the firmware to delete the old file and request a new one EAP Security s Using Server Certificates Overview The following EAP types all support a server certificate e EAP PEAP e EAP TTLS e EAP TLS All three of these certificate using security methods are documented in the following sections EAP Authentication goes a step beyond just encrypting data transfers but also requires that a set of credentials be validated before the client panel is allowed to connect to the rest of the network FIG 107 Below is a description of this process It is important to note that there is no user intervention necessary during this process It proceeds automatically based on the configuration parameters entered into the panel 802 1x EAP over Wireless 4m m m m m m p Authentication Server Client Panel Authenticator RADIUS Server supplicant Wireless Access Point FIG 107 EAP security method in process A server certificate file uses a certificate that is installed in a panel so that the RADIUS server can be validated before
161. e password entered to gain access to a secured workstation e Use the on screen keyboard s Clear button to completely erase any previously stored passwords Certificate Authority When pressed the panel displays an on screen Certificate Authority CA File Location keyboard which allows you to enter the name of the certificate authority file which is used to validate the server certificate This field is optional and can be left blank If a server certificate is used it should first be downloaded into the panel and the Certificate Authority field should then be set to the name of that certificate file No file path should be used for this setting as all certificates are stored in a specific directory that the user cannot control or change e Use the on screen keyboard s Clear button to completely erase any previously stored network path information Inner Authentication Type When pressed this field cycles through the choices of available Inner Authentication mechanism supported by the Devicescape Secure Wireless Client e MSCHAPv2 default because its the most common e MSCHAP PAP e CHAP e EAP MSCHAPv2 e EAP GTC e EAP OTP e EAP MD5 Challenge Save Cancel e Use the Save button to store the new security information incorporate it and then return to the previous Wireless Settings page e Use the Cancel button to cancel any updates to the security parameters and return to the previous Wireless Settings page
162. ed out fields in the IP Settings section Once the panel is rebooted these values are obtained by the unit and displayed in the DNS fields after power up This information can be found in either the Workspace System name gt Define Device section of your code that defines the properties for your panel or in the Device Addressing Network Addresses in the Tools gt NetLinx Diagnostics dialog ic NOTE 7 Press the Back button to return to the Protected Setup page 8 Press the on screen Reboot button to both save any changes and restart the panel IP Settings section Configuring a Static IP Address over Ethernet 1 Select Protected Setup gt System Settings located on the lower left to open the System Settings page re I 2 Locate the IP Settings section of this page Check with your System Administrator for a pre reserved Static IP Address assigned to the panel This address must be obtained before Static assignment of the panel continues 3 4 po OonNnon 10 11 Toggle the DHCP Static field from the IP Settings section until the choice cycles to Static Press the ZP Address field to open a Keyboard and enter the Static IP Address provided by your System Administrator Press Done after you are finished entering the IP information Repeat the same process for the Subnet Mask and Gateway fields Press the optional Host Name field to open the Keyboard and enter the Host Name information Press Done
163. ed to all panels in a wireless network that are communicating to the same target WAP e This is required by the WAP before the panel is permitted to join the wireless network e It is case sensitive and must not exceed 32 characters which may be any keyboard character Make sure this setting is the same for all points in your wireless network e This unique string identifies the network and is the same string for all users on the same network e Use the on screen keyboard s Clear button to completely erase any previously stored SSID information WEP 64 WEP 128 Cycles through the available encryption options 64 Bit Key Size or 128 Bit Key Size Wired Equivalent Privacy is an 802 11 security protocol for wireless networks The WEP encryption method is designed to provide the equivalent security available as in wireline networks e WEP64 enables WEP encryption using a 64 Bit Key Size In this case all packets will be transmitted with their contents encrypted using the Default WEP Key e WEP128 enables WEP encryption using a 128 Bit Key Size All packets are transmitted with their contents encrypted using the Default WEP Key e If the key is not the correct size the system will resize it to match the number of bits required for the WEP encryption mode selected Wireless Security Static WEP Cont Generate Passphrase Pressing the Generate button displays an on screen keyboard which allows you to enter a
164. ed up to 200 feet 60 96 m from the breakout box CV7 panels are ideally suited for displaying full motion video and audio with overlay graphics for applications with demanding visual requirements CV7 7 Widescreen Video Touch Panel Kits NXD CV7 7 Widescreen Color Video Wall Mount Touch Panel Kit with buttons FG2258 02K includes both an NXD panel and an NXA AVB ETHERNET A V Breakout Box NXT CV7 7 Widescreen Color Video Table Top Touch Panel Kit without buttons FG2258 01K includes both an NXT panel and an NXA AVB ETHERNET A V Breakout Box The NXD CV7 panel FG2258 02 is shipped by default with a Trim Ring containing buttons but the end user can later install the included Trim Ring without button openings NXT panels can not be upgraded by simply replacing a Trim Ring on the Faceplate Key features common to both panels include CV7 panels are based on the latest display technology and support AMX s 4th generation G4 graphics which provide higher brightness richer colors and deeper contrast The new G4 graphics technology is supported by the latest AMX TPDesign4 Touch Panel Design program version 2 6 or higher CV7 panels display eye catching images and full motion video on a large 16 9 image format while providing a wide 100 degree top to bottom viewing angle CV7 panels feature a front panel light sensor motion sensor IR receiver and a Sleep Setup Access combo button CV7 panels are field
165. edded codes see the RAF RMF Embedded Codes section on page 181 Example SEND_COMMAND Panel RAF New Image POSHAMX COM ALab Test 5FfiletFtest jpg Adds a new resource The resource name is New Image P protocol is an HTTP H host name is AMX COM A file path is Lab Test_file F file name is test jpg Note that the 5F in the file path is actually encoded as 5F ARFR Force a refresh for a given resource Syntax RFR lt resource name gt Variable resource name 1 50 ASCII characters Example SEND_COMMAND Panel RFR Sports_Image Forces a refresh on Sports_Image Dynamic Image Commands Cont ARMF Modify an existing resource Modifies any and all resource parameters by sending embedded codes and data Since the embedded codes are preceded by a character any character contained in the URL must be escaped with a second character see example The file name field indicated by a F embedded code may contain special escape sequences as shown in the RAF RMF Embedded Codes section on page 181 Syntax RMF lt resource name gt lt data gt Variables resource name 1 50 ASCII characters data Refers to the embedded codes see the RAF RMF Embedded Codes section on page 181 Example SEND_COMMAND Panel RMF Sports_Image tALab 5FTest Images Ftest jpg Changes the resource Sports_Image file na
166. egrated 802 1x TKIP and MIC Within the WPA specifications the RC4 cipher engine was maintained from WEP RC4 is widely used in SSL Secure Socket Layer to protect internet traffic Wi Fi Protected Access WPA TKIP MIC RC4 802 1x Encryption zZ 5 c x v pus z e FIG 112 WPA Overview e WPA2 Also know as IEEE 802 111 is an amendment to the 802 11 standard specifying security mechanisms for wireless networks The 802 11i scheme makes use of the Advanced Encryption Standard AES block cipher WEP and WPA use the RC4 stream cipher The 802 111 architecture contains the following components 802 1X for authentication entailing the use of EAP and an authentication server RSN for keeping track of associations and AES based CCMP to provide confidentiality integrity and origin authentication WPA2 implements the full standard but will not work with some older network cards Both provide good security with two significant issues either WPA or WPA2 must be enabled and chosen in preference to WEP WEP is usually presented as the first security choice in most installation instructions in the Personal mode the most likely choice for homes and small offices a passphrase is required that for full security must be longer than the typical 6 to 8 character passwords users are taught to employ With the RC4 released to the general public the IEEE implemented the Advanced Encryption Stan
167. el e Use the on screen keyboard s Clear button to completely erase any previously stored network path information e Refer to the following Client certificate configuration section for more information regarding Client Certificates and their parameters Private Key When pressed the panel displays an on screen Client Private Key File Location keyboard which allows you to enter the name of the file containing the private key e Use the on screen keyboard s Clear button to completely erase any previously stored network path information Private Key password This field should only be used if the Private Key is protected with a password If there is no password protection associated with the Private Key then this field should be left blank e When pressed the panel displays an on screen Private Key Password keyboard which allows you to enter an alpha numeric password string e Use the on screen keyboard s Clear button to completely erase any previously stored network path information Save Cancel e Use the Save button to store the new security information incorporate it and then return to the previous Wireless Settings page e Use the Cancel button to cancel any updates to the security parameters and return to the previous Wireless Settings page NOTE Client certificate configuration There are several ways in which a client certificate can be configured by an IT department The client cer
168. en A Green communication icon indicates that a connection has been established to the target Master or target Virtual Master e Launch NetLinx Studio and configure the Master Connection communication settings for a Virtual Master e Navigate to the System Settings page and toggle the Type field to USB e Make sure the Type A USB connector is securely connected to the PC e Make sure the panel DOESN T have the mini USB connected and TURN OFF the panel e Once the panel has turned ON THEN connect the mini USB to the Program Port The USB icon should appear in your system tray If it doesn t refer to the Configuring and Using USB with a Virtual Master section on page 51 e The panel can take a few minutes to detect the connection to the PC Troubleshooting Information Cont Symptom Solution updated my panel firmware but my Battery Base page doesn t seem to be working properly e Cycle power manually to the panel and check the Battery Base page after startup e Verify that you are using the most current v2 XX Modero firmware If downloading the firmware to the panel via a COM port try using an IP Address and retry the download of the firmware to the panel My Modero panel isn t appearing in my Workspace window e Verify that the System number is the same on both the NetLinx Workspace window and the System Settings page on the Modero panel e Verify you have entered the proper NetLinx
169. en distance In addition 802 11g can also step down to utilize 802 11b algorithms and also maintain a connection at longer distances e IP Routing is a behavior of the wireless routing is largely dependent on the wired network interface Although the panel can be connected to two networks simultaneously it may only have one gateway If the wired network was successfully set up and a gateway was obtained then the default route for all network traffic will be via the wired network In the event that the wired network was not configured then the default route for all network traffic will be via the wireless network The wired network connection always takes priority e As an example Imagine a panel connected to two networks A amp B A is the wired network and B is the wireless network If the Master controller is on either of these networks then it will be reached However if the Master controller is on a different network C then determining which network interface wired or wireless that will be used is dependent on the gateway e Wireless Access Points are the cornerstone of any wireless network A Wireless Access Point acts as a bridge between a wired and wireless network It aggregates the traffic from all the wireless clients and forwards it down the network to the switch or router One Wireless Access Point may be all you need However you could need more Wireless Access Points depending on either how large your installation is how it is
170. entication fields are greyed out and cannot be altered by the user Verify the fields within the IP Settings section have been properly configured Refer to Step 1 Configure the Panel s Wireless IP Settings section on page 58 for detailed information Press the Back button to navigate to the Protected Setup page and press the on screen Reboot button to both save any changes and restart the panel Remember that you will need to navigate to the System Settings page and configure the connection to a target Master After the panel restarts return to the Wireless Settings page to verify the Link Quality and Signal Strength e The descriptions are None Poor Fair Good Very Good and Excellent The signal strength field provides some descriptive text regarding the strength of the connection to a Wireless Access Point If there is no signal or no IP Address displayed configuration of your network could be required Refer to the NXA WAP200G Instruction Manual for more detailed setup and configuration procedures Configuring multiple wireless Moderos to communicate to a target WAP200G 1 For each communicating touch panel complete all of the steps outlined within the previous Configuring the Modero s wireless card for secured access to a WAP200G section on page 63 Navigate back to the Wireless Wireless Settings page on each panel Verify that all communicating Modero panels are using the same SSID encryption level Default Key
171. er CATS CAT5 supply Direct Connect p NXD T Video capable Touch Panels FIG 5 Sample wiring configuration on video capable panels using this breakout box A 12 VDC compliant power supply can also directly provide power through the unit to a target Modero panel FIG 6 shows a sample wiring configuration for a non video capable Modero panel Direct Ethernet i connect CAT5 Audio CATS between the 12 VDC power gt NXA AVB ETHERNET supply Breakout Box v NXD T Non video capable Touch Panels FIG 6 Sample wiring configuration using non video capable Modero panels The breakout box unit can be mounted on either a horizontal flat surface or into an oy equipment rack by removing the front screws and attaching it to an optional AC Rk The power supply being used on the NXA AVB ETHERNET is dependant on the NOTE power requirements of the target touch panel Use a standard CATS Ethernet cable to provide both communication and 10 100 network connectivity between the panel NXA AVB ETHERNET NetLinx Master and the network Wiring the NXA AVB ETHERNET connectors and cables The inputs and outputs on the breakout box are separated into front and rear connectors The rear connectors are used to input external signals The front connectors are used to communicate signals between the NXA AVB ETHERNET and a target Modero panel FIG 7 provides a layout of the wiring connection both into and from the breakout box
172. er Opens a keypad that is used to set and display the current device number Options Allows you to select various touch panel features e The Function Show button enables the display of the channel port and channel code in the top left corner of the button the level port and level code in the bottom left corner and the address port and address code in the bottom right corner see FIG 93 for an example of the function locations Use the Page Tracking button to toggle page tracking When enabled the touch panel sends page data back to the NetLinx Master or vice versa depending on the touch panel settings Use the Telnet button to enable or disable the telnet server on the panel This feature focuses on direct telnet communication to the panel e Use the Front Button Setup Access button to activate the grey Front Setup Access button located below the LCD to access the firmware pages Default condition is On Press and hold this grey button for 3 seconds to access the Setup page Press and hold this grey button for 6 seconds to access the Calibration page Reboot Panel Pressing this button causes the panel to restart after saving any changes System Recovery Allows you to either reset the touch panel to factory default settings and or wipe out all existing touch panel pages The Reset System Settings button allows a user to wipe out all current configuration parameters on the touch panel such as IP Addresses D
173. er field to open the Device Number keypad FIG 50 5 Enter a Device Number for the panel into the Device Number Keypad The default is 10001 and the range is from I 32000 Device Number values to each panel so that all assigned panels appear in the When using multiple panels within a NetLinx System remember to assign unique lt System listing for the target Master NOTE 6 Press Done to close the keypad assign the number and return to the Protected Setup page OO ee 7 Press the on screen Reboot button to restart the panel and incorporate any changes Protected Setup Device Number Deyice Number Reboot Panel 10008 10008 Options Number Master IP URL and Master Port number Refer to your NetLinx Master s Before continuing open NetLinx Studio This program assists in developing a System instruction manuals for more information NOTE 8 Obtain the System Number and Master IP Address from NetLinx Studio This information must be specific for the system used with the configured Modero panel 9 Press the grey Front Setup Access button for 3 seconds to open the Setup page 10 Press the Protected Setup button located on the lower left of the panel page to open the Protected Setup page 11 Press the System Settings button located on the Protected Setup page to open the System Settings page FIG 51 and begin configuring the communication settings on the panel to match those of the target Master
174. ernal Sound Level 5 FT J A AN FIG 87 Volume configuration page The elements of the Volume page are described in the table below Volume Page Elements Back Saves the changes and returns you to the previously active touch panel page Connection Status icon This visual display of the connection status allows the user to have a current visual update of the panel s connection status regardless of what page is currently active A Lock only appears on the icon if the panel has established a connection with a currently secured target Master requiring a username and password Master Volume This section allows you to alter the current master volume level e Use the UP DN buttons to adjust the volume level range 0 100 The Master Volume bargraph indicates the current volume level The Mute button toggles the Mute feature Default Panel Sounds Sets the Modero panel to play various sounds Activating the Button Hit button plays a default sound when you touch an active button Activating the Button Miss button plays a default sound when you touch a non active button or any area outside of the active button The Play Test Sound button plays a test WAV MP3 file over the panel s internal speakers Internal Sound Level This section allows you to adjust the current sound level on the internal panel speaker Use the UP DN buttons to adjust the volume output on the internal speakers range
175. es itself to the Authentication RADIUS Server e This information is similar to a username used to login to a secured server or workstation This works in tandem with the Password string which is similar to the password entered to gain access to a secured workstation Note Typically this is in the form of a username such as jdoe amx com e Use the on screen keyboard s Clear button to completely erase any previously stored identity username information Certificate Authority Client Certificate When pressed the panel displays an on screen Certificate Authority CA File Location keyboard which allows you to enter the name of the certificate authority file which is used to validate the server certificate The Certificate authority is optional but the client certificate is required If a server certificate is used it should first be downloaded into the panel and the Certificate Authority field should then be set to the name of that certificate file No file path should be used for this setting as all certificates are stored in a specific directory that the user cannot control or change e Use the on screen keyboard s Clear button to completely erase any previously stored network path information When pressed the panel displays an on screen Client Certificate File Location keyboard which allows you to enter the name of the file containing the client panel certificate for use in certifying the identity of the client pan
176. esesssssseseeeeeeeseessseseees 124 Wireless Settings Page Security Options EAP TLS ccscesesssssssssseceeeeessseseeenee 127 Client certificate Configuration sscccccsssseecesesssecceesssssesceessssseeessssssseesessossseeeeeens 129 System Settings Page sssssssssssssscesssesssssseeeeeeeessaeeeseeceeeeeeaaesseeseeeeseseesessesseseeseees 130 Programming asseicousiicnnssnidievnctesunniaceusolasniacsaueseigeutbainonsbounemeiantaclatinetiaasselenians 133 COWOU VIO WW E E E E 133 BUEN Assignments ccusiccisdiesssnecantcwcndsinnnecsanerndestensencenwetetaadeundsnedsnntessateotecnseneacesene 133 Page Command Ssss odes czctcnxnaeaicnbons si cpeteentescaseaees siR Sestese s S ROPA Tar Serei E ES EEEa risi sS 133 APG osa E A E E E E 133 L OA a E E A I E E E S 134 ODP G irine EAE EE E ESE Ea eaS E E EE SEE 134 PDR i E E E E E E EEEN T 134 OP HE ses EE E EE EEEE E E NEEE 134 e a ml A E A A E E TE E A 134 PAT EE E E E E T E E E 135 PPA E E E E E S 135 PPE OEE AA E A E T E 135 PPG E N E A E E E E 135 PPK ETA A E E E A E ET 136 PPM E A T a E dosccossacenuacudssselesdedtessons 136 PPI oeiee minnes ieie eae ee Ea a e a eTEN EEE A A EEES 136 OPP T eee eer e Ee E EEEE E E EEEE EE EEE ERS 136 PPX EE O E E E T E E TE LA ETT 137 OPSE secsi s r a EE r E E EE EE EEE E E EER ESE 137 OPS Pisi eeii a EO E eee TE ane EE ES Enesa a EEES 137 EI T E A E E A T E ET 137 PAGE A E E E E E E E E 137 PROP E E E E E E 138 PPOWN isisi
177. esscececeecesssesssssssseeeseeesessesesesseeees 57 Step 1 Configure the Panel s Wireless IP Settings cccccecececsceeeeccceeeeeeeeeeeeeees 58 Wireless communication using a DHCP Address ccccccsssccsssssssssessssccesesesssesseseeeees 58 a CL Wireless communication using a Static IP AdCress cccsssesssssccesesescscesessnsnsseseeeees 59 Using the Site Survey tool i ccccscecciesccccesccesssceesssonscnnsssceresnsecusesvesecabocseceecoresedcusbosesesosnss 59 Step 2 Configure the Card s Wireless Security Settings cccccccssssssssssseeeeees 61 Configuring the Modero s wireless card for unsecured access to a WAP200G 61 Configuring the Modero s wireless card for secured access to a WAP200G 63 Configuring multiple wireless Moderos to communicate to a target WAP200G 67 Configuring a Wired Ethernet Connection ccccccccccsscssssssssssssecessessssssssssseeeees 68 Step1 Configure the Panel s Wired IP SettingS sssseeseeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 68 IP Settings section Configuring a DHCP Address over Ethernet scccsssssressseees 68 IP Settings section Configuring a Static IP Address over Ethernet cssseeccseseeee 68 Step 2 Choose a Master Connection Mode Setting ssssccccsccsssssssssssssseeeeeees 69 Step 3 Configure an Ethernet Connection Type sssssssssssssscecessesessssssssneeeees 70 Master Co
178. essesbuxeuscyenes 99 G4 Web ControlliPage ie cssicicssiccccccescceecedediesesecsecececebendeesisccevesesdiconstndbedecessesvsessetucccenyes 101 SONSOMSOTUD A 103 Making the most of the Automated Brightness Control feature DIM Mode 105 Password Setup Page ssic iec checiecepivsdescives cecestcedeeseteaveevecssscsensdusdeced ecesevensossdenbuwecucccersves 106 Calibration Page cicirine ae aian Eea Eaa cevsssenctdedeceedeversssvvesssescuceoces 107 Wireless Settings Page sciccc cecssescssiscsedsccstecetesecdsestvsesseeccben coos ka sanra aE Errori ainara EEF 107 Wireless Settings Page Security Options Overview ssssessssssseseeerrreserrsssssseeeereree 113 Wireless Settings Page Security Options Open Clear Text csssscccssssssssseseees 113 Wireless Settings Page Security Options Static WEP ccscsssssssssseceesesessesseneees 114 Wireless Settings Page Security Options WPA PSK cssscsssssssssesssceeeesensseesenes 116 Wireless Settings Page Security Options EAP LEAP cscsessssssssseceeeeessseseseeee 117 Wireless Settings Page Security Options EAP FAST ccssssesssssssssceeeessessssseees 119 EAP Security s Using Server Certificates Overview sscccsccccssssescsssssseeeeees 122 Wireless Settings Page Security Options EAP PEAP ccsssssssssssseeeeesessssseeeees 122 Wireless Settings Page Security Options EAP TTLS cccs
179. et Master has been previously secured 6 Press the on screen Reboot button to both save any changes and restart the panel 7 After the panel powers up press the grey Front Setup Access button for 3 seconds to open the Setup page and confirm there is an active connection The NetLinx Master and the Modero panel must both be on the same Subnet NOTE Using G4 Web Control to Interact with a G4 Panel The G4 Web Control feature allows you to use a PC to interact with a G4 enabled panel via the web This feature works in tandem with the new browser capable NetLinx Security firmware update build 300 or higher G4 Web Control is only available with the latest Modero panel firmware Refer to the G4 Web Control Page section on page 101 for more detailed field information firmware KIT file from www amx com Refer to your NetLinx Master instruction manual for more detailed information on the use of the new web based NetLinx NOTE Security Verify your NetLinx Master ME260 64 or NI Series has been installed with the latest 1 Press the grey Front Setup Access button for 3 seconds to open the Setup page re I 2 Press the Protected Setup button located on the lower left of the panel page to open the Protected Setup page and display an on screen keypad 3 Enter 1988 into the Keypad s password field 1988 is the default password C Clearing Password 5 from the initial Password Setup page removes the need for A you to enter t
180. ettings section on page 61 for detailed procedures to setup either a secure or unsecure connection Wireless communication using a Static IP Address 1 Press the Protected Setup button located on the lower left of the panel page to open the Protected Setup page and display an on screen keypad 2 Enter 1988 into the Keypad s password field and press Done when finished Press the Wireless Settings button located on the lower left to open the Wireless Settings page Wireless communication is set within the IP Settings section of this page FIG 58 Check with your System Administrator for a pre reserved Static IP Address assigned to the panel This address must be obtained before Static assignment of the panel continues NOTE 4 Toggle the DHCP Static field from the IP Settings section until the choice cycles to Static The IP Address Subnet Mask and Gateway fields then become user editable red 5 Press the IP Address field to open a Keyboard and enter the Static IP Address provided by your System Administrator Press Done after you are finished entering the IP information Repeat the same process for the Subnet Mask and Gateway fields Press the optional Host Name field to open the Keyboard and enter the Host Name information po One Press Done after you are finished assigning the alpha numeric string of the host name 10 Press the Primary DNS field to open a Keyboard enter the Primary DNS Address provided by
181. evel to a comfortable level by sitting in front of the panel You should be able to comfortably see someone sitting behind the panel without being blinded by the panel Move around the panel and block the direct or indirect light from the room fixtures with your body Take note of the drop in the lighting level being detected by the panel in response to your movements NOTE 9 Set the Minimum brightness of the Dimmer Dim Mode Max Level below the detected drop This will make sure that the panel does not react to variations in the lighting conditions of a normal working environment The minimum lower level of the dimmer should be at least 10 lower than the minimum detected level ex lower dimmer level at 30 if the detected lighting of the room is at 40 Password Setup Page The Password Setup page FIG 97 centers around the properties used to assign passwords for the Modero panel pages Back Password Setup b If Panel Password Change FIG 97 Password Setup page The elements of the Password Setup page are described in the table below Password Setup Page Elements Back Saves the changes and returns you to the previously active touch panel page Connection Status icon This visual display of the connection status allows the user to have a current visual update of the panel s connection status regardless of what page is currently active A Lock only appears on the icon if the panel has established a co
182. evel gt brightness Variable brightness level 0 100 Example SEND COMMAND Panel BRT 70 Sets the brightness level to 70 DBEEP Syntax Output a DBEEP double beep Example SEND COMMAND Panel DBEEP Outputs a double beep EKP Pops up the keypad icon and initializes the text string to that specified The Prompt Text is Extend the optional Keypad Syntax EKP lt initial text gt lt prompt text gt Variables initial text 1 50 ASCII characters prompt text 1 50 ASCII characters Example SEND COMMAND Panel EKP 33333333 Enter Password Pops up the Keypad and initializes the text string 33333333 with prompt text Enter Password Panel Runtime Operation Commands Cont PKEYP Present a private keypad Pops up the keypad icon and initializes the text string to that specified Keypad displays a instead of the numbers typed The Prompt Text is optional Syntax PKEYP lt initial text gt Variables initial text 1 50 ASCII characters Example SEND COMMAND Panel PKEYP 123456789 Pops up the Keypad and initializes the text string 123456789 in PKP Present a private keypad Pops up the keypad icon and initializes the text string to that specified Keypad displays a instead of the numbers typed The Prompt Text is optional Syntax PKP lt initial text gt lt prompt text gt Variables 1 50 ASCII characters 1
183. evice Number assignments Passwords and other presets Pressing this button launches a Confirmation dialog FIG 92 which asks you to confirm your selection This dialog is configured with a delay timer that does not enable the YES button for 5 seconds This delay provides an additional amount of time for the user to confirm their decision The Remove User Pages button allows you remove all current TPD4 touch panel pages currently on the panel including the pre installed AMX Demo pages Pressing this button launches a Confirmation dialog FIG 92 which asks you to confirm your selection This dialog is configured with a delay timer that does not enable the YES button for 5 seconds This delay provides an additional amount of time for the user to confirm their decision Confirmation Dialog Are you sure you want to reset all system settings You have a wait time of 5 seconds before the YES option is enabled FIG 92 Protected Setup page System Recovery confirmation dialog Channel Code Channel Port Number Channel Port Channel Code i Number 7 10 Slider l l l l l 3 132 Address a Level Port Button ra ee Level Port on 2 8 3 50 Channel Code Channel Code Number Address Code Number Address Code Number Number FIG 93 Button slider Function Show example G4 Web Control Page The G4 Web Control page FIG 94 centers around enabling and disabling both the display and c
184. ey certificates and therefore does not need a client panel certificate which makes the configuration and setup easier There are two main versions of the PEAP protocol supported by panel s DeviceScape Wireless Client are e PEAPv0 developed with Microsoft e PEAPv1 developed exclusively by Cisco PEAP uses an inner authentication mechanism which is supported by the DeviceScape Wireless Client the most common of which are e MSCHAPv2 with PEAPvO and e GTC with PEAPv1 An EAP PEAP security method is designed for wireless environments where its necessary to securely transmit data over a wireless network Refer to the EAP Authentication section on page 193 for further details on these security options Refer to the Using the Site Survey tool section on page 59 for more information on using this feature Pressing the EAP PEAP button opens the EAP PEAP Settings dialog FIG 108 EAPIPEAP Required Information SSID Network Name used by the Target WAP Identity similar to the Username used for network access Password similar to the Password used for network access PEAP Version PEAPv0O PEAPv1 or PEAPv1 w peaplabel 1 i Inner Authentication Type supported by the DeviceScape tion MSCHAPv2 Save Cancel FIG 108 Wireless Settings page EAP PEAP security method Wireless Security EAP PEAP Settings SSID Service Set Identifier The SSID is the unique name used on the WAP and then assigned to
185. f everything matches and the panel provides the proper credentials the RADIUS server then sends a success message to the access point instructing it to allow the panel to communicate with other devices on the network At this point the WAP completes the process for allowing LAN Access to the panel possibly a restricted access based on attributes that came back from the RADIUS server e As an example the WAP might switch the panel to a particular VLAN or install a set of firewall rules AMX Certificate Upload Utility The Certificate Upload utility gives you the ability to compile a list of target touch panels select a pre obtained certificate uniquely identifying the panel and then upload that file to the selected panel This application must be run from a local machine and should not be used from a remote network location ic NOTE This application ensures that a unique certificate is securely uploaded to a specific touch panel Currently the target panels must be capable of supporting the WPA PSK and EAP XXX wireless security formats The Certificate Upload utility supports the following capabilities e Ability to browse both a local and network drive to find a desired certificate file e Ability to create a list of target AMX G4 touch panels based on IP Addresses Compatible panels include MVP 8400 MVP 7500 NXD CV10 NXT CV 10 NXD CV7 and NXT CV7 e Ability to display the IP Address of the local computer hosting th
186. f the link degradation is noise However if the signal strength is low and the link quality is low the cause would simply be signal strength Data Rate The data rate in Mbps at which the panel is currently communicating with a target WAP at dynamic As you move closer to the target WAP and both the signal strength quality the data rate increases and as the quality degrades this rate decreases e Data rates for 802 11b communication are 1 2 5 5 and 11 Mbps Ex 802 11b has a max data rate is 11 Mbps Wireless Settings Page Security Options Overview The Wireless Settings page allows a user to select from up to eight available wireless security methods now available via the NXA WC80211GCF Wi Fi card The new security methods incorporate the following security technology WPA WPA2 and EAP some of which require the upload of unique certificate files to a target panel Refer to the Appendix B Wireless Technology section on page 189 for more further information Wireless Settings Page Security Options Open Clear Text An Open security method does not utilize any encryption methodology but does require that an SSID alpha numeric be entered Using this method causes network packets to be sent out as unencrypted text Refer to the Configuring a Wireless Connection section on page 57 for further details on these security options Refer to the Using the Site Survey tool section on page 59 for more information
187. ge of the Display the current percentage of the bargraph derived from the Adjusted bargraph derived from the Adjusted Level Value as it falls between the Level Value as it falls between the Range Values Range Values V Raw Level Value Raw Level Value L Range Low Value Range Low Value H Range High Value Range High Value S N A Current State A Adjusted Level Value Range Low Value Adjusted Level Value Range Low Value subtracted from the Raw Level Value subtracted from the Raw Level Value R Low Range subtracted from the High Low Range subtracted from the High Range Range Dollar sign Dollar sign Buy changing the text on a button via a VT command you can modify the codes on a button When one of the Text Formatting Codes is encountered by the firmware it is replaced with the correct value These values are derived from the following operations Formatting Code Operations Code Operation P Current Value Range Low Value Range High Value Range Low Value x 100 V Current Level Value L Range Low Value H Range High Value S Current State if regular bargraph then resolves to nothing A Current Value Range Low Value R Range High Value Range Low Value Given a current raw level value of 532 a range low value of 500 and a high range value of 600 the following text formatting codes would yield the following strings as shown in the table below Format Di
188. gh TPDesign4 PWR connector 2 pin 3 5 mm mini Phoenix connector ES a E DP WARNING Specifications for 7 Widescreen Video Touch Panels Cont Button Assignments NXD CV7 only Button assignments can only be adjusted in TPD4 and not on the panels Button channel range 1 4000 button push and feedback per address port e Button variable text range 1 4000 per address port e Button states range 1 256 General Button 1 Off State 2 On State e Level range 1 600 default level value 0 255 can be set up to 1 65535 e Address port range 1 100 Operating Storage Environment Operating Temperature 0 C 32 F to 40 C 104 F Operating Humidity 20 85 RH e Storage Temperature 20 C 4 F to 60 C 140 F e Storage Humidity 5 85 RH Included Accessories e Installation Kit for 7 NXD panels KA2258 02 includes 2 pin 3 5 mm mini Phoenix connector 41 5025 Three Drywall clips 62 5924 05 and 6 sheet metal screws Two Phillips head screws 4 40 x 0 250 Black Installation Kit for 7 NXT panels KA2258 01 2 pin 3 5 mm mini Phoenix connector e Modero Table Top Cable CA2250 50 provided with all NXT panels NXA AVB ETHERNET Breakout Box FG2254 10 Provides video audio distribution to the A V panel over CAT5 cable up to 200 60 96m and accepts either Composite or S Video Although the CV7 is only sold as part of a KIT configur
189. gh the surface opening leaving enough slack in the wiring to accommodate any re positioning of the panel Connect all data and power wiring connectors to their corresponding locations along the left side of the un powered NXD touch panel e Verify that the terminal end of the power cable is not connected to the a power supply before plugging in the 2 pin power connector The USB connectors can be from a either a USB extension cable or a wireless USB RF transmitter Test the incoming wiring by connecting the panel connections to their terminal locations and applying power Verify that the panel is receiving power and functioning properly to prevent repetition of the installation Disconnect the terminal end of the power cable from the connected power supply Don t disconnect the connectors from the touch panel The unit must be installed with the necessary connectors before being inserted into the equipment rack 6 7 10 11 12 Carefully insert the CV7 panel into the NXA RK7 Secure the panel to the NXA RK7 mount by first inserting and then tightening the four 4 40 screws Insert the NXA RK7 with connected NXD unit into the equipment rack making sure to align the screw holes along the sides on the NXA RK7 with the holes in the equipment rack Use a grounded Phillips head screwdriver to secure the NXA RK7 to the equipment rack using 10 32 screws included Place the Faceplate Trim Ring assembly back onto
190. gin dialog 4 Click OK to enter the information and proceed to the Master s Manage WebControl Connections window ee a i 5 This Manage WebControl Connections page FIG 74 is accessed by clicking on the Manage connections link within the Web Control section within the Navigation frame Once activated this page displays links to G4 panels running the latest G4 Web Control feature previously setup and activated on the panel EET Manage WebControl Connections Compatible devices field showing G4 WebControl links G4 panels Compression Options FIG 74 Manage WebControl Connections page populated with compatible panels 6 Click on the G4 panel name link associated with the target panel A secondary web browser window appears on the screen FIG 75 Do you mant to inital and nn AMX G4 Wiaboorirg Sped on 10 22 2003 9 11 AM ard cetibatnd by AMS Comasan Publisher authenticity verted by VerSign Clots 3 Cose Tgog X0 CA Caumon AMX Comerahon anet that he contert sae You shoud oriy insta viee this cartant pou mutt AMX Comeran to nahe thal arserten IT djraays must content trom AM Corporation E Opening page hetps 192 152 192 OPA WebCortroi pe 5 irino Zone FIG 75 Web Control VNC installation and Password entry screens 7 Click Yes from the Security Alert popup window to agree to the installation of the G4 WebControl application on your computer This applica
191. gs so that you can make any necessary cutout adjustments 1 Prepare the area by removing any screws or nails from the drywall before beginning the cutout process 2 Cut out the surface for the NXD Wall Mount unit using the dimensions shown in FIG 38 Be sure to cut out the three notches along the sides to accommodate the three corresponding drywall expansion clips included TN ATS NT PLAT AA ae Na 1 oO MOUNTING USING DRYWALL EXPANSION CLIPS FIG 38 NXD CV7 Wall Mount panel dimensions using expansion clips 3 Remove the Faceplate bezel A in FIG 39 from the main NXD unit B in FIG 39 by gripping the faceplate and pulling with gentle outward force Thread the incoming power RJ 45 Ethernet USB and any optional audio video wiring from their terminal locations through the surface opening Leave enough slack in the wiring to accommodate any re positioning of the panel Connect all data and power wiring connectors to their corresponding locations along the left side of the un powered NXD touch panel e Verify that the terminal end of the power cable is not connected to a power source before plugging in the 2 pin power connector e The USB connectors can be from a either a USB extension cable or a wireless USB RF transmitter 3 notches are requ
192. has taken place if WEP encryption has also been enabled then the client will still require the WEP key to encrypt and decrypt packets in order to communicate successfully with the network Save Cancel e Use the Save button to store the new security information incorporate it and then return to the previous Wireless Settings page e Use the Cancel button to cancel any updates to the security parameters and return to the previous Wireless Settings page Wireless Settings Page Security Options WPA PSK A WPA PSK security method is designed for environments where its desirable to use WPA or WPA2 but an 802 1x authentication server is not available PSK connections are more secure than WEP and are simpler to configure since they implement dynamic keys but share a key between the WAP and the panel client Refer to the Configuring a Wireless Connection section on page 57 for further details on these security options Refer to the Using the Site Survey tool section on page 59 for more information on using this feature Pressing the Static WEP button opens the Static WEP Settings dialog FIG 103 WREABSK Required Information EE reee a D SSID Network Name used by the Target WAP Password Pass Phrase Save Cancel FIG 103 Wireless Settings page WPA PSK security method eee ai Wireless Security WPA PSK Settings SSID Service Set Identifier The SSID is the unique name used on the WAP and then ass
193. he Edit Settings window e Stop communication on the Virtual Master by going to Settings gt Stop Communications Click Yes to stop communication e Select the System Number from the Online Tree tab and use a right mouse click to select Refresh System This re establishes communication with the Virtual Master e Plug in the mini USB cable into the corresponding port on the panel e Wait a few seconds and refresh the system This re establishes communication with the Virtual Master The panel should now appear in the list of available devices Troubleshooting Information Cont Symptom Solution My Connection Status button isn t blinking and it says the USB is connecting My on screen mouse cursor doesn t appear USB Connecting is displayed when the panel is trying to establish USB communication with the PC either within the NetLinx Studio or TPDesign4 applications e Remove the USB connector from the panel and close any AMX applications e Reboot the panel e Launch the AMX application and attempt reconnect to the panel e If using Studio for Virtual Master communication establish a Virtual Master connection verify the correct System number stop communication with the Virtual Master and then re establish communication by refreshing the system e After the panel powers up reconnect the USB connector to the panel e Verify that you have a valid USB connection from within your System Tray
194. he Time amp Date Setup page FIG 86 allows you to alter set the time and date information on the NetLinx Master If either the Time Date is modified on this page then updated to the Master by pressing the Set Time button all devices communicating to that target Master will then be updated to reflect the new information Time Display fields Currently selected Date Display fields FIG 86 Time and Date Setup page The only way to modify a panel s time without altering the Master is to use NetLinx Code NOTE The elements of the Time amp Date Setup page are described in the table below Time amp Date Setup Page Elements Back Returns you to the previously active touch panel page without saving changes to save changes use the Set Time button Connection Status icon This visual display of the connection status allows the user to have a current visual update of the panel s connection status regardless of what page is currently active A Lock only appears on the icon if the panel has established a connection with a currently secured target Master requiring a username and password Time Date Refresh Set This section provides you with two options The Get Time Date button retrieves the Time and Date information from the Master e The Set Time Date button sets the Master to retain and save any time date modifications made on the Time and Date Setup page Time Display fields
195. he default password before accessing the Protected Setup page NOTE 4 Press Done when finished 5 Press the G4 WebControl button to open the G4 Web Control page FIG 72 agp G4 Web Control m b G4 Web Control Settings G4 Web Control Timeout lt 4 b n mn 30 g E ED FIG 72 G4 Web Control page 6 Press the Enable Enabled button until it toggles to Enabled light blue color 7 The Network Interface Select field is read only and displays the method of communication to the web Verify you have selected the proper interface connection as this field does not auto detect the connection type being used see below e Wired is used when a direct Ethernet connection is being used for communication to the web This is the default setting if either no wireless interface card is detected or if both an Ethernet and wireless card connection is detected by the panel e Wireless is used when a wireless card is detected within the internal card slot This method provides an indirect communication to the web via a pre configured Wireless Access Point 8 Press the Web Control Name field to open the Web Name keyboard 9 From the Web Name keyboard enter a unique alpha numeric string to identify this panel This information is used by the NetLinx Security Web Server to display on screen links to the panel The on screen links use the IP Address of the panel and not the name for communication FIG 73 10 Press Done after y
196. his device is connected to the computer it will appear as a new hardware device and will need to be associated again with the driver refer to Step 2 Confirm the Installation of the USB Driver on the PC section on page 51 Step 4 Use the USB to Configure a Virtual Master using NetLinx Studio PC ONLY the USB connection option must be selected within the Type field Since When configuring your panel to communicate via USB with a Virtual Master on your this is a direct connection the PC s IP Address is not needed NOTE Before beginning 1 Verify the panel has been configured to communicate via USB within the System Settings page and that the USB driver has been properly configured Refer to the previous section for more information 2 Launch NetLinx Studio 2 x default location is Start gt Programs gt AMX Control Disc gt NetLinx Studio 2 gt NetLinx Studio 2 a 3 Select Settings gt Master Communication Settings from the Main menu to open the Master Communication Settings dialog FIG 56 Master Communication Settings Available System s Configuration Settings lt No Active System Default Settings gt System lt Teminal Settings gt lt No Active System Defauk Settings gt Configuration Communication Settings Platform Selection Transport Connection Option OK Cancel Netline Master C TCPAP Edt Settings Axcess Master Serial Modem r Virtual NetLinx Master i OK Cancel
197. his procedure both loosens the rear Tilt Bracket cover plate with the AMX logo and Hinge brackets and provides greater flexibility for the removal of the outer housing Without this step the Hinge brackets FIG 17 present an obstacle to the removal of the outer housing and restrict access to the circuit board 7 Tilt the LCD panel back up to gain better access to the Tilt Bracket cover plate 8 Ina single motion carefully pull both the Tilt Bracket cover plate and outer housing up and then out away from the LCD panel to expose the internal circuit board FIG 18 Tilt Bracket cover plate must be removed first Outer housing installation holes located on front panel FIG 18 Removal of the outer housing and wireless card location Step 2 Install the Compact Flash Memory card upgrade 1 Discharge any static electricity from your body by touching a grounded metal object and then locate the existing 64 MB Compact Flash card on the main board FIG 19 lt lt Tilt Bracket cover plate Front of panel Wireless CF Card Slot 2 Compact Flash Memory Card Slot 1 Card Removal Grooves Card removal grooves FIG 19 Location and orientation of the card slots both CV7 panels 2 Insert the tip of a grounded flat head screwdriver into one of the card removal grooves located on either side of the existing card and gently pry the card out of the slot FIG 20 Repeat this process on the opposite card remova
198. his profile should have the pre defined level of access configuration rights Refer to the Step 2 Choose a Master Connection Mode Setting section on page 69 for more detailed information on using the System Settings page Programming DP WARNING NOTE Overview You can program the touch panel using the commands in this section to perform a wide variety of operations using Send_Commands and variable text commands A device must first be defined in the NetLinx programming language with values for the Device Port System in all programming examples Panel is used in place of these values and represents all Modero panels Verify you are using the latest NetLinx Master and Modero firmware Verify you are using the latest version of NetLinx Studio and TPD4 Button Assignments e Button Channel Range 1 4000 Button push and Feedback per address port Button Variable Text range 1 4000 per address port e Button States Range 1 256 0 All states for General buttons 1 Off state and 2 On state Level Range 1 600 Default level value 0 255 can be set up to 1 65535 Address port Range 1 100 These button assignments can only be adjusted in TPD4 and not on the panels themselves Page Commands These Page Commands are used in NetLinx Programming Language and are case insensitive Page Commands APG Add the popup page to a group if it does not already exist If the new popup is added to a
199. ies and other AMX equipment 2 Carefully remove the panel from the shipping box Carefully peel the protective plastic cover from the LCD If the protective plastic LCD cover is not removed the panel may not respond LI properly to touch points on the LCD or allow proper screen calibration LJ NOTE Installing the Internal Components Installation of the internal components such as the upgraded Compact Flash Memory card and the NXA WC80211GCF Wireless card are described in detail within the following sections NXA WC80211GCF 802 11g Wireless Card FG2255 07 section on page 14 NXA CFSP Compact Flash FG2116 3x section on page 17 Installing the No Button Trim Ring The NXD CV7 panel is shipped from AMX with the default Button Trim Ring already installed The unit is also shipped with an included Trim Ring containing no button openings a No Button Trim Ring that allows you if desired to change the default configuration of the NXD panel Faceplate to that with no button openings In order to install this included No Button Trim Ring you must first remove the factory installed default Button Trim Ring the six small buttons and associated two clear light pipes 1 The Faceplate is secured to the panel with plastic latches To remove the Faceplate simply pull it away from the panel by gently tugging it outwards until the entire Faceplate comes away from the panel Turn the Faceplate over to expose the inside surface and vie
200. igned to all panels in a wireless network that are communicating to the same target WAP e This is required by the WAP before the panel is permitted to join the wireless network e It is case sensitive and must not exceed 32 characters which may be any keyboard character Make sure this setting is the same for all points in your wireless network e This unique string identifies the network and is the same string for all users on the same network e Use the on screen keyboard s Clear button to completely erase any previously stored SSID information Password Pass Phrase When pressed the panel displays an on screen keyboard which allows you to enter a passphrase password e This alpha numeric string must use a minimum of 8 characters and a maximum of 63 Note The exact pass phrase string including capitalization must be entered on the target WAP e Use the on screen keyboard s Clear button to completely erase any previously stored passwords Save Cancel e Use the Save button to store the new security information incorporate it and then return to the previous Wireless Settings page e Use the Cancel button to cancel any updates to the security parameters and return to the previous Wireless Settings page Wireless Settings Page Security Options EAP LEAP EAP Extensible Authentication Protocol is a Enterprise authentication protocol that can be used in both a wired and wireless network environment
201. ilar to the Password used for network access Cance FIG 104 Wireless Settings page EAP LEAP security method Wireless Security EAP LEAP Settings SSID Service Set Identifier The SSID is the unique name used on the WAP and then assigned to all panels in a wireless network that are communicating to the same target WAP e This is required by the WAP before the panel is permitted to join the wireless network e Itis case sensitive and must not exceed 32 characters which may be any keyboard character Make sure this setting is the same for all points in your wireless network e This unique string identifies the network and is the same string for all users on the same network e Use the on screen keyboard s Clear button to completely erase any previously stored SSID information e Note In all cases the SSID of the WAP must be entered If it is left blank the panel will try to connect to the first access point which can be found that supports EAP In this situation however a successful connection is not guaranteed because the identified WAP may be connected to a RADIUS server which does not support the specified EAP type and or may not have the proper user identities configured Identity When pressed the panel displays an on screen keyboard which allows you to enter an EAP Identity string which is how the panel identifies itself to the Authentication RADIUS Server e This information is similar to a usern
202. illed out for you IE e In an Open security mode when a target WAP is selected and the connect to the SSID name of the selected WAP is saved for the open security mode Ina Static WEP security mode when a WEP Access Point is selected and then connected to the user is then redirected back to the Static WEP security screen where the SSID field is already filled out and the user is only required to enter in the remaining WEP key settings e A similar process occurs for WPA PSK access points For any other case the firmware switches back to the previous page and security and connection parameters must be entered in as normal Step 2 Configure the Card s Wireless Security Settings The second step to successfully setting up your wireless card is to configure the Wireless Settings section of the Wireless Settings page The section configures both the communication and security parameters from the internal wireless card to the WAP The procedures outlined within the following sections use an 802 11g card to configure a common security configuration to a target WAP navigate to the System Settings page and configure the communication parameters for the target Master Until those parameters are configured your Connection Status NOTE icon will remain red indicating that there is no current connection to a Master Once you have completed setting up the wireless card parameters you must then Configuring the Modero s wireless card for un
203. ine Tree tab in the Workspace window to view the devices on the System The default System value is one 1 aE ai 20 Right click the associated System number and select Refresh System This establishes a new connection to the specified System and populates the list with devices on that system The communication method is then highlighted in green on the bottom of the NetLinx Studio window Step 2 Prepare the panel for communication via an IP 1 Press the blue Type field from the Master Connection section until the choice cycles to the word Ethernet 2 Press the blue Mode field until the choice cycles to the word URL e By selecting URL the System Number field becomes read only grey because the panel pulls this value directly from the communicating target Master virtual or not A Virtual Master system value can be set within the active AMX software applications such as NetLinx Studio TPD4 or IREdit 3 Press the red Master IP URL field to open a Keyboard and enter the NetLinx Master s IP Address obtained from the Diagnostics Networking Address dialog of the NetLinx Studio application 4 Click Done to accept the new value and return to the System Configuration page 5 Do not alter the Master Port Number value this is the default value used by NetLinx 6 Press the Back button to return to the Protected Setup page and press the on screen Reboot button to restart the panel and save any changes Step 3 Verify and U
204. ing action causes the card to wiggle away from the on board connector pins 3 Grip the old card by its sides and then carefully pull it out of the slot 4 Remove one of the included alcohol pads and use it to thoroughly clean both the CF metal cover FIG 21 and the metal plate on the underside of the terminal antenna These surfaces must be properly cleaned to provide good adhesion for the later installation of the wireless antenna Tilt Bracket cover plate Front of panel Wireless CF Card Slot 2 Compact Flash Memory Card Slot 1 CF metal plate with antenna shown installed Card Removal Grooves FIG 21 Location and orientation of the card slots both CV7 CV10 panels 5 Remove the new NXA WC80211G CF card from it s anti static bag 6 Grip the sides of the new wireless card and insert it firmly into the slot opening until the contact pins are completely inside the card and securely attached to the pin sockets C You must precisely align the double sided tape to the surface of the antenna s metal plate in order to properly secure the antenna within to the CF metal cover plate NOTE 7 Carefully peel off one side of the included double sided tape and adhere the adhesive side to the surface of the antenna s metal plate 8 Grip the antenna by its sides and carefully peel off the remaining protective film on the double sided tape 9 Align the antenna atop the CF metal cover plate and press down firmly
205. installation of the battery base to the Modero panel verify the Modero panel has the latest firmware Only the latest build incorporates the necessary updates for using the Modero with the NXA BASE 1 From the Battery Base page verify that the battery base is loaded with the latest NXA BASE 1 firmware v2 xx or higher Checking the NXT BP charge 1 Press the Battery Life Indicator button FIG 26 once to illuminate the Battery Life LEDs and display the percent charge remaining on the battery this indication lasts a few seconds Battery Life Charge Display Battery Life Indicator button FIG 26 NXT BP Battery Pack showing the battery life indicator and button 2 Charge the NXT BP battery by either inserting it into the battery base or from within the optional NXT CHG charger which can sequentially charge up to two batteries It is recommended to fully charge this battery before using it to power an NXT CV7 panel If the 25 LED indicator is blinking recharge your battery immediately This blinking indicates there is less than 5 of a charge remaining on the battery Installing an NXT BP into the NXA BASE 1 The base does not directly connect to a power supply Instead it receives the power necessary to charge the battery from the Modero panel through the Panel Interface connector 1 Install the NXT BP battery into the base s battery compartment with the label side facing up 2 Align the battery connector w
206. invert 0 3 0 1 0 Normal 1 Invert horizontal axis 2 Invert vertical axis 2 3 3 Invert both axis locations For a bargraph 1 Invert 0 Non Invert Example SEND_COMMAND Panel GIV 500 3 Inverts the joystick axis origin to the bottom right corner AGLH Change the bargraph upper limit Syntax GLH lt vt addr range gt lt bargraph hi gt Variable variable text address range 1 4000 bargraph limit range 1 65535 bargraph upper limit range Example SEND_COMMAND Panel GLH 500 1000 Changes the bargraph upper limit to 1000 AGLL Change the bargraph lower limit Syntax GLL lt vt addr range gt lt bargraph low gt Variable variable text address range 1 4000 bargraph limit range 1 65535 bargraph lower limit range Example SEND_COMMAND Panel GLL 500 150 Changes the bargraph lower limit to 150 AGRD Change the bargraph ramp down time in 1 10th of a second Syntax A4GRD lt vt addr range gt lt bargraph ramp down time gt Variable variable text address range 1 4000 bargraph ramp down time In 1 10th of a second intervals Example SEND_COMMAND Panel GRD 500 200 Changes the bargraph ramp down time to 20 seconds A Button Commands Cont bargraph slider color or joystick cursor color AGRU Syntax Change the AGRU lt vt addr range gt lt bargraph ramp up time gt ba
207. ion or exclusion of the Limited Warranty may not apply This Limited Warranty gives the owner specific legal rights The owner may also have other rights that vary from state to state The owner is advised to consult applicable state laws for full determination of rights EXCEPT AS EXPRESSLY SET FORTH IN THIS WARRANTY AMX MAKES NO OTHER WARRANTIES EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED INCLUDING ANY IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AMX EXPRESSLY DISCLAIMS ALL WARRANTIES NOT STATED IN THIS LIMITED WARRANTY ANY IMPLIED WARRANTIES THAT MAY BE IMPOSED BY LAW ARE LIMITED TO THE TERMS OF THIS LIMITED WARRANTY EXCEPT AS OTHERWISE LIMITED BY APPLICABLE LAW AMX RESERVES THE RIGHT TO MODIFY OR DISCONTINUE DESIGNS SPECIFICATIONS WARRAN TIES PRICES AND POLICIES WITHOUT NOTICE AMX Software License and Warranty Agreement LICENSE GRANT AMX grants to Licensee the non exclusive right to use the AMX Software in the manner described in this License The AMX Software is licensed not sold This license does not grant Licensee the right to create derivative works of the AMX Software The AMX Software consists of generally available programming and development software product documenta tion sample applications tools and utilities and miscellaneous technical information Please refer to the README TXT file on the compact disc or download for further information regarding the components of the AMX Software The AMX Software is sub ject
208. ions SA lt path gt Set Directory path The path must be a valid HTTP URL minus the protocol host and filename The only exception to this is the inclusion of special escape sequences and in the case of FTP protocol regular expres sions RAF RMF Embedded Codes Cont Parameter Embedded Code Description refresh SR lt refresh 1 65535 gt The number of seconds between refreshes in which the resource is downloaded again Refreshing a resource causes the button displaying that resource to refresh also The default value is 0 only download the resource once newest SN lt 0 1 gt Set the newest file A value of 1 means that only the most recent file matching the pattern is downloaded Note The newest file option only applies to FTP Dynamic Images and only those that have pattern matching as part of their filename Neither newest file nor pattern matching apply to HTTP Dynamic Images When set the panel will first pull a list of files matching the given pattern from the specified FTP server and path The timestamps of the items in the list will be compared with the newest one being displayed on the panel This is useful for source devices that place a uniquely named still image ina folder at constant intervals allowing the panel always to display the most recent one preserve SV lt 0 1 gt Set the value of the preserve flag Default is 0 Currently preserve has no function
209. ired to accommodate the three expansion clips included Install the 3 included drywall clip sets into these locations Drywall Clip 3 Mounting Tab B Main NXD unit consists of the touch panel and back box A Faceplate Trim Ring FIG 39 Wall Mount panel NXD installation configuration for drywall surfaces 6 Test the incoming wiring by attaching the panel connections to their terminal locations and applying power Verify the panel is receiving power and functioning properly to prevent repetition of the installation 7 Disconnect the terminal end of the power cable from the connected power supply C Don t disconnect the connectors from the touch panel The unit must be installed with A the attached connectors before being inserted into the drywall NOTE 8 Install the three sets of drywall screws and expansion clips into the three oval notch locations along both sides of the main unit B in FIG 39 9 Carefully insert the main unit with expansion clips into the cutout until the Mounting Tabs on the NXD unit lie flush against the wall The drywall clip set must be re ordered from AMX if the drywall clip is bent accidentally during an installation or removed during a re installation WARNING 10 Tighten all three drywall clip sets screws and clips until the entire Mounting Tab is securely fastened and flush against the wall 11 Place the Faceplate Trim Ring assembly A in FIG 39 ba
210. is available and to reply with a connection failure instantly if it is not Without using the ping feature you will still attempt to make a connection but a failure will take longer to be recognized Some firewalls and networks do not allow pinging though and the ping will then always result in a failure e When connecting to a NetLinx Master controller via TCP IP the program will first try to ping the controller before attempting a connection Pinging a device is relatively fast and will determine if the device is off line or if the TCP IP address that was entered was incorrect If you decide NOT to ping for availability and the controller is off line or you have an incorrect TCP IP address the program will try for 30 45 seconds to establish a connection Note f you are trying to connect to a master controller that is behind a firewall you may have to uncheck this option Most firewalls will not allow ping requests to pass through for security reasons Troubleshooting Information Cont Symptom Solution I have more that one Modero panel Multiple NetLinx Compatible devices such as Modero panels can be connected to my System Master associated for use with a single Master Each Modero panel comes and only one shows up with a defaulted Device Number value of 10001 When using multiple panels it can become very easy to overlook the need to assign different Device Number values to each panel e Press and hold the grey
211. is not changed Syntax BSO lt vt addr range gt lt button states range gt lt sound name gt Variable variable text address range 1 4000 button states range 1 256 for multi state buttons 0 All states for General buttons 1 Off state and 2 On state sound name blank sound cleared not matched button sound not changed Example SEND_COMMAND Panel BSO 500 1 amp 2 music wav Assigns the sound music wav to the button Off On states ABSP Set the button size and position Set the button size and its position on the page Syntax BSP lt vt addr range gt lt left gt lt top gt lt right gt lt bottom gt Variable variable text address range 1 4000 left left side of page top top of page right right side of page bottom bottom of page Example SEND_COMMAND Panel BSP 530 left top Sets the button with variable text 530 in the left side top of page A Button Commands Cont Set the computer control remote host for the specified address ABVL Syntax Log On Log Off ABVL lt vt addr range gt lt connection gt the computer Variable Feta variable text address range 1 4000 connection 0 Log Off connection and 1 Log On connection Example SEND_COMMAND Panel BVL 500 0 Logs off the computer control connection of the button ABVN Syntax SEND_COMMAND lt DEV gt BVN lt vt addr range gt lt remote host gt Va
212. is the unique name used on the WAP and then assigned to all panels in a wireless network that are communicating to the same target WAP e This is required by the WAP before the panel is permitted to join the wireless network e It is case sensitive and must not exceed 32 characters which may be any keyboard character Make sure this setting is the same for all points in your wireless network e This unique string identifies the network and is the same string for all users on the same network e Use the on screen keyboard s Clear button to completely erase any previously stored SSID information e Note In all cases the SSID of the WAP must be entered If it is left blank the panel will try to connect to the first access point which can be found that supports EAP In this situation however a successful connection is not guaranteed because the identified WAP may be connected to a RADIUS server which does not support the specified EAP type and or may not have the proper user identities configured Identity When pressed the panel displays an on screen keyboard which allows you to enter an EAP Identity string which is how the panel identifies itself to the Authentication RADIUS Server e This information is similar to a username used to login to a secured server or workstation This works in tandem with the Password string which is similar to the password entered to gain access to a secured workstation Note Typically this is in
213. ith its corresponding battery connector port located in the battery compartment shown in FIG 27 NXT BP Battery Battery Connector Battery Connector Port FRONT FIG 27 Battery installation 3 Carefully insert the NXT BP into the base until the battery securely fits onto the Battery Connector Port Installing the NXA BASE 1 below an NXT CV7 Panel 1 Power Off the panel before attempting to attach the NXA BASE 1 2 Place the battery base with battery onto a flat level surface 3 Turn the battery locking slider FIG 28 to one side until the locking mechanism is horizontal to the base going left to right and the rear battery latch is pointing directly outward away from the LCD Alignment pegs 2 Panel Interface connector male Battery locking mechanism Battery locking slider Battery not shown for illustration purposes Front Insert holes for NXT CV7 feet Securing pegs 2 FIG 28 NXA BASE 1 showing Panel Interface and connector locations 4 Carefully angle the NXT CV7 panel over the front alignment pegs FIG 29 The pegs assist in both aligning and securing the panel to the base the locking mechanism secures the base to panel when done 5 Insert the alignment pegs into their corresponding holes below the front of the panel 6 Verify the alignment of the Panel Interface connectors between the panel female connector and base male connector FIG 29 7 Align the rear pegs and
214. ithin the web browser These read only values are pulled from some of the other user configurable Configuration Utility pages By default wireless Modero panels are configured for unsecured communication to a Wireless Access Point To properly setup both the WAP200G and panel for secure communication you must first prepare the Modero panel and then use the information provided to fill out the fields within the WAP s browser based Basic Wireless Configuration page Since the code key generator on Modero panels use the same key generation formula all panels will generate identical keys for the same Passphrase The generators used on WAPs will not produce the same key as the Modero generator even if you use the same Passphrase For this reason we recommend FIRST creating the Current Key on the Modero and then entering that information into the appropriate NXA WAP200G fields 1 Provide power to the panel this allows it to detect the internal wireless card 2 Press the Protected Setup button located on the lower left of the panel page to open the Protected Setup page and display an on screen keypad 3 Enter 1988 into the Keypad s password field and press Done when finished Press the Wireless Settings button located on the lower left to open the Wireless Settings page 5 Locate the Wireless Security section FIG 63 Wireless Security Wireless Security EAP TILS O ar Text EPP Tits EAP ILS Static W EAP ILS EAP LEAP EAP
215. l groove This alternating action causes the card to wiggle away from the on board connector pins 3 Grip the old card by its sides and then carefully pull it out of the slot gt Remove the new CF memory card from it s anti static bag 5 Grip the sides of the new CF memory card and firmly insert it into slot opening with the arrow facing towards the pins until the contact pins are completely inside the flash card and it is then securely attached to the pin sockets 6 To complete the upgrade process either upgrade the remaining wireless card Step 3 or close and re secure the enclosure using the procedures in Step 4 Close and Resecure the NXT Panel Enclosure section on page 21 Card removal grooves On board Compact Flash connector with pins Insert with arrow facing towards the pins Connector opening FIG 20 Removing installing a Compact Flash Memory card Any new internal card upgrade is detected by the panel only after power is cycled NOTE Step 3 Install the new 802 11g CF Card and Antenna 1 Discharge any static electricity from your body by touching a grounded metal object and then locate the wireless card slot on the main board FIG 21 2 Insert the tip of a grounded flat head screwdriver into one of the card removal grooves located on either side of the existing card and gently pry the card out of the slot FIG 21 Repeat this process on the opposite card removal groove This alternat
216. l is now configured to communicate directly with the PC The mini USB connector MUST be then plugged into an already active panel before the PC can recognize the connection and assign an appropriate USB driver This driver is part of both the NetLinx Studio and TPDesign4 software application installations t kd NOTE 11 Launch the Certificate Upload Utility and confirm the utility has detected the new USB connection to the panel Click on the Local Address field s drop down arrow Confirm the new USB entry shows up in the list as 10 XX XX 1 How to Upload a Certificate File 1 10 11 Install the latest AMX USB LAN LINK driver onto your computer by installing the latest versions of either TPDesign4 or NetLinx Studio2 This USB driver prepares your computer to properly communicate with a directly connected G4 touch panel MVP CV7 CV 10 Refer to Step 1 from within the previous Step 1 Setup the Panel and PC for USB Communication section on page 195 Access the target panel s Protected Setup firmware page and configure the USB communication parameters Refer to Step 2 from within the previous Step 2 Confirm the Installation of the USB Driver on the PC section on page 196 With the panel successfully communicating with target computer launch the Certificate Upload Utility Familiarize yourself with the User Interface options Certificate Utility User Interface Locate your certificate file by using the Bro
217. laid out and how it is constructed e Wireless Equivalent Privacy WEP Security is a method by which WLANs protect wireless data streams A data stream encrypted with WEP can still be intercepted or eavesdropped upon but the encryption makes the data unintelligible to the interloper The strength of WEP is measured by the length of the key used to encrypt the data The longer the key the harder it is to crack 802 11b implementations provided 64 bit and 128 bit WEP keys This is known respectively as 64 bit and 128 bit WEP encryption 64 bit is generally not regarded as adequate security protection Both key lengths are supported by the Modero product line Whichever level of WEP you use it s crucial to use identical settings CASE SENSITIVE the key length and the key itself on all devices Only devices with common WEP settings will be able to communicate Similarly if one device has WEP enabled and another doesn t they won t be able to talk to each other OL Although the calculations required to encrypt data with WEP can impact the performance of your wireless network it s generally seen only when running benchmarks and not large enough to be noticeable in the course of normal network usage Terminology e 802 1x e IEEE 802 1x is an IEEE standard that is built on the Internet standard EAP Extensible Authentication Protocol 802 1x is a standard for passing EAP messages over either a wired or wireless LAN Additionally 802
218. le Top Cable Modero phone 800 530 8998 or 1 719 388 75 18 When building a custom Table Top cable please refer to the table below to calculate the maximum length of the cable for your particular installation setup Maximum Table Top Cable Lengths for Modero Panels Panel Sizes 7 Panel 10 Panel 12 Panel 15 Panel 17 Panel Setup l Using a panel without a battery base Maximum cable length 150 45 72 m 150 45 72 m 49 14 94 m 39 11 89 m 10 3 05 m Setup II Using a panel with a battery base Maximum cable length 56 17 07 m 56 17 07 m 25 7 62m 15 4 57m 10 3 05 m The total Modero cable run from the 13 5 V power source The total Modero cable run from the 13 5 V power source 12 VDC compliant power supply FIG 11 shows the top and cross section views of the Table Top cable 6 inches 3 inches 4 gt gt 3 Et tas 3 20 A 2 1 H To Touch Panel To Breakout Box Connector 1 used for Audio Video Black Connector 3 used for Power Connector 2 used for Ethernet White FIG 11 Modero Table Top cable top and cross section views ee The following table provides the wiring information color coding for each of the three available cable connectors on each side of the Modero Table Top Cable Modero Table Top Cable Wiring Table
219. lie flush against the rough in box C in FIG 37 7 Insert and secure four 4 40 Mounting Screws included into their corresponding holes located along the sides of the NXD ce 8 Place the Faceplate Trim Ring assembly A in FIG 37 back onto the main NXD unit B in FIG 37 Make sure to align the Microphone Light and PIR Motion sensor locations to their respective openings on the front faceplate bezel 9 Reconnect the terminal RJ 45 Ethernet USB and any optional audio video wiring to their respective locations outside the rough in box on either the NXA AVB ETHERNET Breakout Box Ethernet port or NetLinx Master 10 Reconnect the terminal power connector on the 12 VDC compliant power supply and apply power Installing the NXD into drywall using Expansion Clips Expansion clips are mounted through the three oval holes located along the rim of the NXD CV7 As the screw is tightened the clip bends toward the insertion hole and into the wall This bending creates a grip on the wall by either pressing onto the wall or by securing the drywall between the housing and the drywall clip The most important thing to remember when mounting the NXD is that the outer frame Mounting Tabs must be installed flush against the mounting surface e Refer to SP 2258 01 for detailed installation dimensions reproduced in FIG 38 e Itis recommended that you cutout the surface slightly smaller than what is outlined in the installation drawin
220. llation and Upgrade of the Internal NXT Components ssseseseeeeeeeeeeees 18 Step 1 Remove the existing NXT Outer Housing cccccccssscssssssssssssssceessesessesseees 18 Step 2 Install the Compact Flash Memory card Upgrade csssssssseseesesssssessssenees 20 Step 3 Install the new 802 11g CF Card and Antenna cccssessssssessseceeeesessssseseees 21 Step 4 Close and Resecure the NXT Panel Enclosure ccccsccsscsscsecssssessessssssessseesees 21 Installation and Upgrade of the Internal NXD Components csseeseeeeeeeeees 22 Step 1 Remove the existing NXD Outer Housing scccccccssssssesesssssssesseeeessessseees 22 Step 2 Install the new Compact Flash Memory card NXD ccccccccccssereeesseeseeeeeeeees 23 Step 3 Install the new 802 11g Wireless Compact Flash card NXD ssssseeeeees 23 Step 4 Close and Resecure the NXD Panel Enclosure cccecccccssceeceeeeeeseeesessessseeeees 23 NXT BP Power Pack FG2255 10 scsssscssssccics cancsavncatanccwssaancheerexncbansantunneeonanensavansounts 24 NXA BASE 1 Battery Base Kit FG2255 05K sesssssssseessesssssssesossssssssssosesssssssees 24 Checking the NXT BP charge si cccc scss5c cc vedsesessosvedescccecscatenscesessepsencectcecensedeasvenseossees 25 Installing an NXT BP into the NXA BASE 1 ssscccccssessscscssssssssssscccesssssessssessnssseeees 25 Installing the NXA BASE 1 below an NX
221. logging onto a TCP IP network from a DHCP server e Static IP is a permanent IP Address that is assigned to a node in a TCP IP network Note If DHCP is selected the following fields become read only IP Address Subnet Mask Gateway Primary DNS Secondary DNS and Domain IP Address Sets the secondary IP Address assigned to the panel Subnet Mask Sets a subnetwork address to the panel e Subnetwork mask is the technique used by the IP protocol to filter messages into a particular network segment subnet Gateway Sets a gateway value to the panel Gateway is a computer that either performs protocol conversion between different types of networks applications or acts as a go between for two or more networks that use the same protocols Host Name Sets the host name of the panel PRIMARY DNS sets the address of the primary DNS server being used by the Modero panel for host name lookups DNS Domain Name System is software that lets users locate computers on a local network or the Internet TCP IP network by host and domain The DNS server maintains a database of host names for its domain and their corresponding IP Addresses e SECONDARY DNS sets the secondary DNS value to the panel Primary DNS Sets the address of the primary DNS server used by the panel for host name lookups Secondary DNS Sets the secondary DNS value to the Modero panel Domain Sets the unique name on the Internet to the
222. low you to replace them The text entry code operates as if it is in the overwrite mode If the cursor is When operating with a mask the mask should be displayed with placeholders The display where you should enter a character The arrow keys will move between the positioned on a character already entered and you type in a new and valid character the new character replace the old character There is no shifting of characters When working with ranges specified by the mask the keyboard allows you to enter a number between the values listed in the ranges If a user enters a value that is larger than the max the maximum number of right most characters is used to create a new acceptable value e Example 1 If you type 125 into a field accepting 0 100 then the values displayed will be 1 12 25 e Example2 If the max for the filed was 20 then the values displayed will be 1 12 5 When data overflows from a numerical field the overflow value is added to the previous field on the chain if the overflow character was specified In the above example if the overflow flag was set the first example will place the 1 into the previous logical field and the second example will place 12 in the previous logical field If the overflow filed already contains a value the new value will be inserted to the right of the current characters and the overflow field will be evaluated Overflow continues to work until a filed with no overfl
223. lt vt addr range gt lt button states range gt lt icon index gt Variable variable text address range 1 4000 button states range 1 256 for multi state buttons 0 All states for General buttons 1 Off state and 2 On state icon index range 0 9900 a value of 0 is clear Example SEND_COMMAND Panel ICO 500 504 amp 510 515 1 amp 2 1 Sets the icon for On and Off states for buttons with variable text ranges of 500 504 amp 510 515 AJSB Set bitmap picture alignment using a numeric keypad layout for those buttons with a defined address range The alignment of 0 is followed by lt left gt lt top gt The left and top coordinates are relative to the upper left corner of the button Syntax 7SB lt vt addr range gt lt button states range gt lt new text alignment gt Variable variable text address range 1 4000 button states range 1 256 for multi state buttons 0 All states for General buttons 1 Off state and 2 On state new text alignment Value of 1 9 corresponds to the following locations 0 1 2 3 4 15 Zero can be used for an absolute position 7 8 J9 Example SEND_COMMAND Panel JSB 500 504 amp 510 515 1 amp 2 1 Sets the off on state picture alignment to upper left corner for those buttons with variable text ranges of 500 504 amp 510 515 AJSI Set icon alignment using a numeric keypad layout for those but
224. m DSSS 802 11b 11M wireless PC card with detachable Antenna Features e Wired Equivalent Privacy WEP 64 bit and 128 bit data encryption e Diversity Antenna Connectors automatically select the best available signal e Supports infrastructure Communications to wired networks via Access Points and roaming standard IEEE 802 11b compliant Antenna e 2 Ceramic Diversity Supported Certifications FCC United States e IC Canada e CE Europe e TELEC Japan Host Interface Compact Flash Type Interoperability e Interoperable with Wi Fi WECA certified products LED Indicators e Power Link activity Modulation e DSSS DBSK DQSK CCK Network Standard IEEE 802 11b Number of Channels 14 Operating Voltage 5 3 3V Operating Channels e 11 Channels USA Canada e 13 Channels Europe e 14 Channels Japan 4 Channels France S 802 11b Wireless Interface Card Specifications Cont Operating Environment Temperature 0 C 70 C non operating and 15 80 C storage e Humidity non condensing 5 95 RH Power Consumption TX power consumption lt 265 mA RX power consumption lt 165 mA Sleep Mode 2 mA 15 mA Radio Data Rate 1Mbps 2Mbps 5 5Mbps 11Mbps Auto Rate Receive Sensitivity PER lt 8 11 Mbps 83 dBm max 5 5 Mbps 86 dBm max 2 Mbps 89 dBm max 1 Mbps 92 dBm
225. mber field G4 Web Control Timeout Sets the length of time in minutes the panel can remain idle no cursor movements before the session is closed and the user is disconnected e Minimum value 0 minutes panel never times out Maximum value 240 minutes panel times out after 240 minutes 4hours Refer to the Using G4 Web Control to Interact with a G4 Panel section on page 74 for more detailed instructions on how to use the G4 Web Control page with the new web based NetLinx Security application NOTE G4 Web Control V CIVIS CITIT NETE 4 TaT FIG 95 Sample relationship between G4 Web Control and Mange WebControl Connections window Sensor Setup The Sensor Setup page FIG 96 allows you to adjust the Light and Motion Sensor parameters on a Modero touch panel ight Sensor Sensor Setup Motion Sensor b Wake lsh Ory Moton Sense Dim Mode Minimum Brightness so an Ay Ca FIG 96 Sensor Setup page A light level value between the Minimum and Maximum DIM Mode values delivers an average light level The DIM mode Min Level can never exceed the DIM Mode Max Level The elements of the Sensor Setup page are described in the table below Sensor Setup Page Elements Back Saves the changes and returns you to the previously active touch panel page Connection Status icon This visual display of the connection status allows the user to have a current visual update of the pa
226. mbers for colors fonts and borders Colors can be used to set the colors on buttons sliders and pages The lowest color number represents the lightest color specific display the highest number represents the darkest display For example 0 represents light red and 5 is dark red RGB Triplets and Names For Basic 88 Colors RGB Values for all 88 Basic Colors Index No Name Red Green Blue 00 Very Light Red 255 0 0 01 Light Red 223 0 0 02 Red 191 0 0 03 Medium Red 159 0 0 04 Dark Red 127 0 0 05 Very Dark Red 95 0 0 06 Very Light Orange 255 128 0 07 Light Orange 223 112 0 08 Orange 191 96 0 09 Medium Orange 159 80 0 10 Dark Orange 127 64 0 11 Very Dark Orange 95 48 0 12 Very Light Yellow 255 255 0 13 Light Yellow 223 223 0 14 Yellow 191 191 0 15 Medium Yellow 159 159 0 16 Dark Yellow 127 127 0 17 Very Dark Yellow 95 95 0 18 Very Light Lime 128 255 0 19 Light Lime 112 223 0 20 Lime 96 191 0 21 Medium Lime 80 159 0 22 Dark Lime 64 127 0 23 Very Dark Lime 48 95 0 24 Very Light Green 0 255 0 25 Light Green 0 223 0 26 Green 0 191 0 27 Medium Green 0 159 0 28 Dark Green 0 127 0 29 Very Dark Green 0 95 0 30 Very Light Mint 0 255 128 31 Light Mint 0 223 112 32 Mint 0 191 96 33 Medium Mint 0 159 80 34 Dark Mint 0 127 64 35 Very Dark Mint 0 95 48 36 Very Light Cyan 0 255 255 37 Light Cyan 0 223 223
227. me to test jpg and the path to Lab_Test Images Note that the 5F in the file path is actually encoded as 5F ARSR Change the refresh rate for a given resource Syntax RSR lt resource name gt lt refresh rate gt Variable resource name 1 50 ASCII characters refresh rate Measured in seconds Example SEND_COMMAND Panel RSR Sports_Image 5 Sets the refresh rate to 5 seconds for the given resource Sports_Image ARAF RMF Embedded Codes The RAF and RMF commands add and modify any and all resource parameters by sending embedded codes and data RAF lt resource name gt lt data gt lt RMF lt resource name gt lt data gt The lt data gt variable uses the embedded codes described in the following table ARAF RMF Embedded Codes path Parameter Embedded Code Description protocol SP lt 0 1 gt Set protocol HTTP 0 or FTP 1 user SU lt user gt Set Username for authentication password S lt password gt Set Password for authentication host SH lt host gt Set Host Name fully qualified DNS or IP Address file SF lt file gt Full path to the location of the file or program that will return the resource The path must be a valid HTTP URL minus the protocol and host The only exception to this is the inclusion of special escape sequences and in the case of FTP protocol regular expres s
228. ment and Authentication method e Refer to the following Wireless Settings Page Security Options Overview section on page 113 for further details on these security options A WPA PSK security method is designed for environments where is it desirable to use WPA or WPA2 but an 802 1x authentication server is not available PSK connections are more secure than WEP and are simpler to configure since they implement dynamic keys but share a key between the WAP and the panel client Pressing the WPA PSK button opens the WPA PSK Settings dialog FIG 103 Although the button is labeled WPA PSK the encryption on the WAP could either be WPA or WPA2 The firmware in the panel will connect to the access point using the correct encryption automatically The WPA encryption type is configured in the access point not in the firmware WAPs do not show WPA or WPA2 on their configuration screens WPA is normally displayed on an WAP as TKIP WPAZ2 is normally displayed on an WAP as AES CCMP The following fields are required SSID and Password Pass Phrase The values that need to be entered are the SSID of the WAP anda pass phrase that is a minimum of 8 characters and a maximum of 63 The exact same pass phrase including capitalization must be entered in the access point Whenever entering a password on any screen touch the password field to pop up the keyboard press Clear to completely erase the previous password and the
229. n this allows a user to set the sleep mode and leave the panels detection range In this way the panel doesn t awake immediately after the sleep is active and you move away Making the most of the Automated Brightness Control feature DIM Mode Please follow the steps below to set up Automated Brightness Control 1 2 Set the lighting conditions in the room to maximum turn On all the lights Set the Maximum Panel Brightness from the Setup page to a comfortable level Sitting in front of the panel you should be able to comfortably see someone sitting behind the panel without being blinded by the panel 3 4 Open the Sensors Setup page FIG 96 from the Protected Setup menu section Move around the panel and block the direct or indirect light from the room fixtures with your body Take note of the drop in the lighting level being detected by the panel in response to your movements Set the Maximum brightness of the Dimmer Dim Mode Max Level below the detected drop This will make sure that the panel does not react to variations in the lighting conditions of a normal working environment The maximum upper level of the dimmer should be at least 15 lower than the maximum detected level Set the minimum lighting conditions in the room not complete darkness but the minimal lighting setup unless complete darkness is an operational option for the room Set the Minimum Dimmer Brightness Dim Mode Min L
230. n enter the new password e Refer to the following Wireless Settings Page Security Options Overview section on page 113 for further details on these security options Wireless Settings Page Elements Cont Wireless Security Cont EAP PEAP An EAP PEAP security method is designed for wireless environments where its necessary to securely transmit data over a wireless network e Pressing the EAP PEAP button opens the EAP PEAP Settings dialog FIG 108 The following fields are required SSID Identity Password PEAP Version and Inner Authentication Type e Refer to the following Wireless Settings Page Security Options Overview section on page 113 for further details on these security options For more information on uploading a certificate file refer to the AMX Certificate Upload Utility section on page 195 EAP TTLS An EAP TTLS security method is designed for wireless environments where its necessary to first have the Radius server directly validate the identity of the cli ent panel before allowing it access to the network This validation is done by tunneling a connection through the WAP and directly between the panel and the Radius server By initially keeping the network out of the picture there is far more security validation going on behind the scenes before any possible access to the network is granted to the client Once the client is identified and then validated the Radius server disconnects the
231. n opens the EAP LEAP Settings dialog FIG 104 The following fields are required SSID Identity and Password Refer to the following Wireless Settings Page Security Options Overview section on page 113 for further details on these security options Wireless Settings Page Elements Cont Wireless Security Cont EAP FAST An EAP FAST security method is designed for wireless environments where both security and ease of setup are balanced together e Pressing the EAP FAST button opens the EAP FAST Settings dialog FIG 106 The following fields are required SSID Identity Anonymous Identity and Password e Refer to the following Wireless Settings Page Security Options Overview section on page 113 for further details on these security options Site Survey The Site Survey tool allows installers to see all of the WAPs within the panel s communication detection area e The information displayed includes SSID Channel Signal Strength Security Type if detectable and MAC address of the WAP From the site survey tool a user can then select and connect to a WAP although proper configuration of the security settings may still be required e Refer to the Using the Site Survey tool section on page 59 for more information on using this feature RF Link Info Sets the communication values for the internal wireless interface card SSID Displays the currently used SSID of the target WAP
232. n with the network via the target WAP Touching any of the eight available connection method buttons launches a new connection specific dialog page which allows the user to define the communication parameters specific to that type of connection Some connection methods can be chosen Refer to the following Wireless Settings Page Security Options Overview section on page 113 for further details on these security options An Open security method does not utilize any encryption methodology but does require that an SSID alpha numeric be entered This entry must match the Network Name SSID entry of the target WAP because the panel must know what device its using to bridge the communication gap between itself and the network e Using this method causes network packets to be sent out as unencrypted text Pressing the Open Clear Text button opens the Open Clear Text Settings dialog FIG 101 The following fields are required SSID e Refer to the following Wireless Settings Page Security Options Overview section on page 113 for further details on these security options A Static WEP security method requires that both a target WAP be identified and an encryption method be implemented prior to establishing an active communication session e Pressing the Static WEP button opens the Static WEP Settings dialog FIG 102 The following fields are required SSID Encryption method Passphrase WEP Key assign
233. nel s connection status regardless of what page is currently active A Lock only appears on the icon if the panel has established a connection with a currently secured target Master requiring a username and password Sensor Setup Page Elements Cont Light Sensor Allows you to monitor and alter the sensitivity of the Modero panel light sensor The Light Sensor Level field indicates the level used to report the light sensor level back to the NetLinx Master set in TPD4 read only The Light Sensor Level Port field indicates the port used to report the light sensor level back to the NetLinx Master set in TPD4 read only The Light Sensor Channel field indicates the level used to report the sensor channel back to the NetLinx Master set in TPD4 It is On when you are below the Maximum dim mode level read only e The Light Sensor Channel Port field indicates the port used to report the sensor channel back to the NetLinx Master set in TPD4 read only The Light Level field provides a numeric value representing the current value of the light level detected by the on board photo sensor The Light Level bargraph displays a horizontal bargraph indicating the current value of the light level detected by the on board photo sensor This bargraph provides a visual representation of the numeric value displayed within the Light Level field Use the Dim Mode Max Level bargraph to alter the Maximum DIM level value
234. nes Ethernet 10 100 port e RJ 45 port for 10 100 Mbps communication The Ethernet port automatically negotiates the connection speed 10 Mbps or 100 Mbps and whether to use half duplex or full duplex mode e CV7 panels communicate with the NetLinx Master using the ICSP protocol over Ethernet Ethernet 10 100 LEDs e LEDs show communication activity and connection information A activity Yellow LED lights when receiving or transmitting Ethernet data packets L link Green LED lights when the Ethernet cables are connected and terminated correctly USB connector Type A USB port can connect an external keyboard or mouse device for use with Virtual PC applications Note External USB input devices keyboard or mouse must be plugged into the rear side USB connector before the unit is powered up The panel will not detect these USB input devices until the unit cycles power Audio Video connector RJ 45 connector for communication of differential audio video signals to from the touch panel panel type dependant This connector receives Composite video Stereo left right audio and microphone audio e Video is received via the NXA AVB ETHERNET Breakout Box Configuring video windows for playback is done using TPDesign4 In bound audio from the breakout box gets directed to the speakers Out bound audio is sent from the on board microphone on the front panel Selecting audio files for playback is configured throu
235. nistrator or a DHCP Address from the IP Settings of the System Settings page e The DHCP Static field in the IP Settings section of the System Settings page must be set to DHCP to get Dynamic IP information for the panel e Press the on screen Reboot from the Protected Setup page to both save any changes and restart the panel e After power up press the grey Front Setup Access button for 3 seconds to access the Setup page e Navigate to the Setup gt Protected Setup gt System Settings page and note the newly obtained Dynamic IP Address information from the IP Settings section This information is then entered into the URL List for the connected NetLinx Master 2 Toggle the Type field until Ethernet is selected from the Master Connection section of the System Settings page 3 Press the Mode field to set the connection Mode until the choice cycles to the word Listen The System Number and Master IP URL fields are then greyed out 4 Enter a username and password into their respective fields if the target Master has been previously secured 5 Select the OnLine Tree tab from the Workspace window 6 Select Diagnostics gt URL Listing from the Main menu FIG 71 7 Enter the System and Device number for the specific Master associated with your panel as seen in the OnLine Tree tab 8 Click Add and enter the IP Address of the Modero touch panel into the Add URL dialog 9 Click OK to enter your IP Address and add it to
236. nnection with a currently secured target Master requiring a username and password In Panel Password Accesses the alphanumeric values associated to particular password sets Change PASSWORD 1 2 3 4 5 protected buttons open a keyboard where you can enter alphanumeric values associated to a selected password group e Clearing Password 5 removes the need to enter a password before accessing the Protected Setup page NOTE Calibration Page This page FIG 98 allows you to calibrate the touch panel using a pre selected touch driver e Press and hold the grey Front Setup Access button below the Modero LCD for 6 seconds to access the Calibration page e Press the crosshairs to calibrate the panel and return to the last active firmware page Calibrate The request to touch the crosshairs is the first on screen message Calibration successful is the second on screen message that appears Touch each target in turn to calibrate after the calibration process is completed continue On screen crosshairs used for calibration of the touch device FIG 98 Calibration page actually 3 separate screens If the calibration was improperly set and you cannot return to the Calibration page through the panel s firmware you can access this firmware page via G4 WebControl where you can navigate to the Protected Setup page and press the Calibrate button through your VNC window This action causes the panel to go
237. nnection section Virtual Master communication over Ethernet 65 71 Master Connection section NetLinx Master Ethernet IP Address URL Mode 72 Master Connection section NetLinx Master Ethernet IP Address Listen Mode 73 Master Connection section NetLinx Master Ethernet IP Address Auto Mode 74 Using G4 Web Control to Interact with a G4 Panel cece eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 74 Using your NetLinx Master to control the G4 panel csseeseseseeeeeeeeeeeenens 76 Upgrading Modero Firmware sciencascansaseavncacsaessexenenantorenncenennenontndexennsvacncnsumwinne 79 FOV GI VIO poiniei asina ae sn ENESE E EESE EEEREN EN TEESE NEE SEENEN 79 Upgrading the Modero Firmware via the USB port sssseseseseseseeeeeeeeeeeeees 79 Step 1 Configure the panel for a USB Connection Type ssssssssssssesssessssssssseseesseeeese 79 Step 2 Prepare NetLinx Studio for communication via the USB port esee00 80 Step 3 Confirm and Upgrade the firmware via the USB port sccccceeeeseeeeeeeees 81 Upgrading the Modero Firmware via Ethernet IP Address ssssesceseseeeeeees 83 Step 1 Prepare the Master for communication via an IP ssesccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeee 83 Step 2 Prepare the panel for communication via an IP ssseeeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 85 Step 3 Verify and Upgrade the panel firmware via an IP s
238. nt es teis Kedisi rss oskie 6 CV7 Touch Panel Accessories ssiiuissccssuaspnussnedessasvadavonteduavebannsebinnsvedsevabadianseasonsbine 7 OVOPVIOW E E EE cuoseedentessaees 7 NXA AVB ETHERNET Breakout Box FG2254 10 ssssssssssesesesesecsesesessesssssssssssss 7 PROAUCtS peCifICATIONS 2 25 55 ceccess sSeseecesssccccecss4 sence sdesessevors cosoueceeesussutceceeeveseserecevsouscetedses 7 Installing the NXA AVB ETHERNET sssssesssssssssccesessssscesssssssseeseseeeeesessesssssessseeeees 8 Wiring the NXA AVB ETHERNET connectors and cables ssscsccccccesesesssssssssseeeeeees 9 Wiring the NXA AVB ETHERNET for Unbalanced Audio seecssesssseeeesessssseeeeeseeee 10 Wiring the NXA AVB ETHERNET for Balanced AUudio cccssseccsssssseeeeessssseeeeesseseees 10 Modero Table Top Cable CA2250 50 sseeeceeeesesssesseeeesssssseseseeseeeseeeeeeeeeeeens 11 Product Specifications sssri n eaer cauri A Eas aae eaae SEE e 11 Wiring information for the Modero Table Top cable cccccsssesccssssssseeessssseeeeesseseees 11 NXA WC80211B CF 802 11b Wireless Card FG2255 03 ssseesseeeesseeeeeeees 13 NXA WC80211GCF 802 11g Wireless Card FG2255 07 s seeesesseseseeeeeeeees 14 NXA CFSP Compact Flash FG2116 3X esesesesesssesssssesessessessocccesesesesessesssessssess 17 Before Upgrading the Wireless Card Read This scscccccccssssssssssssssseeeeeeessens 18 Insta
239. ny info home asp Active Server Page The exact meaning of this name on the host machine is both protocol dependent and host dependent The information normally resides in a file but it could be generated dynamically This component of the URL is called the file component even though the information is not necessarily in a file A URL can optionally specify a port which is the port number to which the TCP connection is made on the remote host machine If the port is not specified the default port for the protocol is used instead For example the default port for http is 80 An alternative port could be specified as http www amx com 8080 company info home asp Any legal HTTP syntax can be used Special escape sequences The system has only a limited knowledge of URL formats in that it transparently passes the URL information onto the server for translation A user can then pass any parameters to the server side programs such as CGI scripts or active server pages However the system will parse the URL looking for special escape codes When it finds an escape code it replaces that code with a particular piece of panel button or state information For example http www amx com img asp device DV would become http www amx com img asp device 10001 Other used escape sequences include Escape Sequences Sequence Panel Information DV Device Number SY System Number IP IP Address
240. o the Master Connection section of the System Settings page NOTE Using your NetLinx Master to control the G4 panel Refer to your particular NetLinx Master s instruction manual for detailed information on how to download the latest firmware from www amx com This firmware build enables SSL certificate identification and encryption HTTPS communication ICSP data encryption and disables the ability to alter the Master security properties via a TELNET session gt In order to fully utilize the SSL encryption your web browser should incorporate the an encryption feature This encryption level is displayed as a Cipher strength NOTE Once the Master s IP Address has been set through NetLinx Studio version 2 x or higher 1 Launch your web browser 2 Enter the IP Address of the target Master ex http 198 198 99 99 into the web browser s Address field 3 Press the Enter key on your keyboard to begin the communication process between the target Master and your computer e Initially the Master Security option is disabled from within the System Security page and no username and password is required for access or configuration Both HTTP and HTTPS Ports are enabled by default via the Manage System gt Server page e Ifthe Master has been previously configured for secured communication click OK to accept the AMX SSL certificate if SSL is enabled and then enter a valid username and password into the fields within the Lo
241. of its products to perform This includes any lost profits lost savings incidental damages or consequential damages AMX is not liable for any claim made by a third party or by an AMX Autho rized Partner for a third party This Limited Warranty does not apply to a any AMX product that has been modified altered or repaired by an unauthorized agent or improperly transported stored installed used or maintained b damage caused by acts of nature including flood erosion or earth quake c damage caused by a sustained low or high voltage situation or by a low or high voltage disturbance including brownouts sags spikes or power outages or d damage caused by war vandalism theft depletion or obsolescence This limitation of liability applies whether damages are sought or a claim is made under this warranty or as a tort claim including negligence and strict product liability a contract claim or any other claim This limitation of liability cannot be waived or amended by any person This limitation of liability will be effective even if AMX or an authorized representative of AMX has been advised of the possibility of any such damages This limitation of liability however will not apply to claims for personal injury Some states do not allow a limitation of how long an implied warranty last Some states do not allow the limitation or exclusion of inci dental or consequential damages for consumer products In such states the limitat
242. of the AMX Software has resulted from accident abuse or misapplication Any replace ment AMX Software will be warranted for the remainder of the original warranty period or thirty 30 days whichever is longer Outside the United States these remedies may not available NO LIABILITY FOR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES IN NO EVENT SHALL AMX BE LIABLE FOR ANY DAMAGES WHATSOEVER INCLUDING WITHOUT LIMITATION DAMAGES FOR LOSS OF BUSINESS PROFITS BUSINESS INTERRUPTION LOSS OF BUSINESS INFORMATION OR ANY OTHER PECUNIARY LOSS ARISING OUT OF THE USE OF OR INABILITY TO USE THIS AMX SOFTWARE EVEN IF AMX HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES BECAUSE SOME STATES COUNTRIES DO NOT ALLOW THE EXCLUSION OR LIMITATION OF LIABILITY FOR CONSEQUENTIAL OR INCIDENTAL DAMAGES THE ABOVE LIMITA TION MAY NOT APPLY TO LICENSEE U S GOVERNMENT RESTRICTED RIGHTS The AMX Software is provided with RESTRICTED RIGHTS Use duplication or disclosure by the Government is subject to restrictions as set forth in subparagraph 1 ii of The Rights in Technical Data and Computer Software clause at DFARS 252 227 7013 or subparagraphs 1 and 2 of the Commercial Computer Software Restricted Rights at 48 CFR 52 227 19 as applicable SOFTWARE AND OTHER MATERIALS FROM AMX COM MAY BE SUBJECT TO EXPORT CONTROL The United States Export Control laws prohibit the export of certain technical data and software to certain territories No software from this Site may be downloaded
243. ollowing section to setup the Virtual Master and refresh the System from the Online Tree This action sends out a request to the panel to respond and completes the communication turning the System Connection icon green 8 Navigate back to the System Settings page Step 2 Prepare NetLinx Studio for communication via the USB port 1 Launch NetLinx Studio 2 x default location is Start gt Programs gt AMX Control Disc gt NetLinx Studio 2 gt NetLinx Studio 2 2 Select Settings gt Master Communication Settings from the Main menu to open the Master Communication Settings dialog FIG 77 Master Communication Settings Available Systems Configuration Settings lt No Active System Default Settings gt System lt Temninal Settings gt lt No Active System Defauk Seltings gt Platform Selection Transport Connection Option NetLinx Master TCPAP Edit Settings Axcess Master C Serial C Modem r Virtual NetLinx Master i OK Cancel Virtual NetLinx Master Settings The Virtual NetLinx Master connection allows G4 touch panels to connect directly to NetLinx Studio instead of a physical NetLinx Master for file transfers System Number i To use set the panels to connect ether via USB if availd TCP IP to System 0 or to the above System Number and a following IP addresses IP Address of computer not needed as this is a direct USB connection NOTE Changes to the Sys
244. on Type When pressed this field cycles through the choices of available Inner Authentication mechanisms supported by the Devicescape Secure Wireless Client The most commonly used are MSCHAPv2 and GTC e MSCHAPv2 used with PEAPvO0 e TLS e GTC used with PEAPV1 OTP e MD5 Challenge Save Cancel e Use the Save button to store the new security information incorporate it and then return to the previous Wireless Settings page e Use the Cancel button to cancel any updates to the security parameters and return to the previous Wireless Settings page Wireless Settings Page Security Options EAP TTLS EAP Extensible Authentication Protocol is a Enterprise authentication protocol that can be used in both a wired and wireless network environment EAP requires the use of an 802 1x Authentication Server also known as a Radius server Most of the configuration fields described below take variable length strings as inputs Whenever these fields are selected an on screen keyboard appears which allows the string to then be entered TTLS EAP Tunneled Transport Layer Security was an authentication method like PEAP that does not use a client certificate to authenticate the panel This method is more secure than PEAP in that it does not broadcast the identity of the user The setup although similar to PEAP differs in the following areas e An anonymous identity MUST be specified until the secure tunnel between the panel
245. on between the PC and the panel prior to installing the Step 1 Configure the panel for a USB Connection Type 1 After the installation of the USB driver has been completed confirm the proper installation of the large Type A USB connector to the PC s USB port and restart your machine 2 After the CV7 panel powers up press and hold the grey Front Setup Access button for 3 seconds to continue with the setup process and proceed to the Setup page el 3 Select Protected Setup gt System Settings located on the lower left to open the System Settings page 4 Toggle the blue Type field from the Master Connection section until the choice cycles to USB C ALL fields are then greyed out and read only but still display any previous network information NOTE 5 Press the Back button on the touch panel to return to the Protected Setup page 6 Press the on screen Reboot button to both save any changes and restart the panel Remember that the panel s connection type must be set to USB prior to rebooting the panel and prior to inserting the USB connector 7 ONLY AFTER the unit displays the first panel page THEN insert the mini USB connector into the Program Port on the panel It may take a minute for the panel to detect the new connection and send a signal to the PC indicated by a green System Connection icon e Ifa few minutes have gone by and the System Connection icon still does not turn green complete the procedures in the f
246. on is pulled by the panel from AMX IR Receivers section of the TPD4 Project Properties gt IR Emitters amp Receivers tab e For IR reception this is the port that reports a push on for the corresponding IR code IR receivers and transmitters on G4 panels share the device address number of the panel Project Information Page Elements Cont AMX IR 455k Assigned Port Displays the AMX 455 kHz IR channel port used by the IR receiver on the panel This information is pulled by the panel from AMX IR Receivers section of the TPD4 Project Properties gt IR Emitters amp Receivers tab e For IR reception this is the port that reports a push on for the corresponding IR code IR receivers and transmitters on G4 panels share the device address number of the panel NOTE This feature is unavailable in NXT CV7 panels sold after January 1 2011 Build Number Displays the build number information of the TPD4 software used to create the project file Creation Date Displays the project creation date Revision Date Last Save Date Displays the last revision date for the project Displays the last date the project was saved Blink Rate Displays the feedback blink rate 10th of second Job Comments Displays any comments associated to the job These comments are taken from the TPD4 project file Panel Information Page The Panel Information page FIG 85 centers ar
247. on parameters through the System Settings page This type of communication can be established either via either a Dynamic IP Address DHCP or via a pre reserved Static IP Address typically provided by your System Administrator IP Settings section Configuring a DHCP Address over Ethernet 1 Select Protected Setup gt System Settings located on the lower left to open the System Settings page 2 Locate the IP Settings section of this page appear on the two separate System Settings and Wireless Settings pages the information populating these fields is identical WARNING If the information within one of these fields is altered the change is reflected on both pages within the altered field Example Domain is altered on Wireless Settings page the value is then also changed within the Domain field of the System Settings page A Even though the Host Gateway Primary DNS Secondary DNS and Domain fields 3 Toggle the DHCP Static field from the IP Settings section until the choice cycles to DHCP DHCP will register the unique MAC Address factory assigned on the panel and once the communication setup process is complete reserve an IP Address Subnet Mask and Gateway values from the DHCP Server ic NOTE 4 Press the optional Host Name field to open a Keyboard and enter the Host Name information 5 Press Done after you are finished assigning the alpha numeric string of the host name 6 Do not alter any of the remaining grey
248. on the screen to continue and return to the Setup page If the calibration was improperly set and you cannot return to the Calibration page through the panel s firmware you can then access this firmware page via G4 WebControl where you can navigate to the Protected Setup page and press the Calibrate button through your VNC window This action causes the panel to go to the Calibration page seen above where you can physically recalibrate the actual touch panel again using the above procedures Testing your Calibration 1 Press and hold down the on screen Calibration button for 6 seconds to enter the Calibration Test page FIG 48 Calibrate Test On screen crosshairs is used to verify a proper calibration of the panel FIG 48 Calibration Test page 2 Press anywhere on this page to confirm the on screen crosshairs match your touch points 3 If the crosshairs do not appear directly below your LCD touch points press the Back button and recalibrate the panel using the above steps 4 Exit this Calibration Test page by pressing the Back button to return to the Protected Setup page Configuring Communication Overview Communication between the Modero panel and the Master is done using either USB or ETHERNET DHCP or Static IP Ethernet communication can be achieved through either a direct connection Ethernet or through the use of the optional NXA WC802 11GCF wireless CF card firmware Verify you are using the latest ve
249. one correspondence The following table shows the possible file extension used for each certificate type Certificates and their Extensions Certificate Type Possible File Extensions PEM cer pem pvk DER cer der PKCS12 pfx It is important to note which certificate types are supported by the different certificate fields used on the configuration screens PEAP TTLS and TLS The following table outlines the firmware fields and their supported certificate types Certificate Types Supported by the Modero Firmware Configuration Field Name Certificate File Type Supported Certificate Authority field PEM and DER Client Certificate field PEM and DER Private Key field PEM DER and PKCS12 System Settings Page The System Settings page FIG 111 sets the Secondary DNS Address information with its corresponding IP communication parameters NetLinx Master communication settings and reads the device number assigned to the Modero panel System Settings IP Settings 00 00 AD IP Settings section v Master Connection Master Connection section NetLinx Master properties Master Connection features do not take effect until the panel is rebooted Red fields are user editable Blue fields cycle through choices Grey fields are read only FIG 111 System Settings page showing default values reads and assigns values to the panel and Master The elements of the System Settings
250. ontrol of your panel via the web An external PC running a VNC client installed during the initial communication to the G4 panel makes this possible G G4 Web Control b GJEN Gontro Settings GAWEN Gontro mimeont 4 m FeaT FIG 94 G4 Web Control page Each panel supports the open standard Virtual Network Computing VNC interface These panels contain a VNC server that allows them to accept a connection from any other device running a VNC client Once a connection is established to that target device the client can control the touch panel remotely The elements of the G4 Web Control page are described in the table below G4 Web Control Page Elements Back Saves the changes and returns you to the previously active touch panel page Connection Status icon This visual display of the connection status allows the user to have a current visual update of the panel s connection status regardless of what page is currently active A Lock only appears on the icon if the panel has established a connection with a currently secured target Master requiring a username and password G4 Web Control Settings Sets the IP communication values for the touch panel and contains Enable Enabled The Enable Enabled button allows you to toggle between the two G4 activation settings Enable deactivates the G4 Web Control feature on the panel Enabled activates the G4 Web Control feature on the panel and allows an
251. opulated If the SSID Network Name and WEP fields have not previously been configured the Wireless Settings page will not work until the panel is rebooted Ethernet Communication from the panel can be direct using an Ethernet cable or indirect through the NXA WC80211GCF AMX Wireless Card communicating to a Wireless Access Point WAP such as the NXA WAP200G The Wireless Access Point communication parameters must match those of the installed wireless CF card inside the panel In determining the Ethernet method of communication the panel will always default first to the direct Ethernet communication If no direct connection is detected the panel will first check to see if there is an installed wireless interface card and then communicate to the WAP using the Wireless Settings assigned within the Wireless Settings page The WAP communication parameters must match those of the pre installed wireless interface card installed within the panel These touch panels allow users to connect to a wireless network through their use of the optional AMX 802 11g Wi Fi CF card The WAP communication parameters must match those of the pre installed wireless interface card installed within the panel This internal card transmits data wirelessly using the 802 11x signals at 2 4 GHz For a more detailed explanation of the new security and encryption technology refer to the section of the document entitled Appendix B Wireless Technology section on page 189
252. opup is displayed On show effect time Given in 1 10ths of a second Example SEND_COMMAND Panel PST Popup1 50 Sets the Popup1 show effect time to 5 seconds PAGE Flip to a specified page Flips to a page with a specified page name If the page is currently active it will not redraw the page Syntax PAGE lt page name gt Variable page name 1 50 ASCII characters Name of the page the popup is displayed On Example SEND_COMMAND Panel PAGE Pagel Flips to page1 Page Commands Cont PPOF Deactivate a specific popup page on either a specified page or the current page If the page name is empty the current page is used see example 2 If the popup page is part of a group the whole group is deactivated This command works in the same way as the Hide Popup command in TPDesign4 Syntax PPOF lt popup page name gt lt page name gt Variable popup page name 1 50 ASCII characters Name of the popup page page name 1 50 ASCII characters Name of the page the popup is displayed On Example SEND_COMMAND Panel PPOF Popup1 Main Deactivates the popup page Popup1 on the Main page Example 2 SEND_COMMAND Panel PPOF Popup1 Deactivates the popup page Popup on the current page PPOG Toggle a specific popup page on either a specified page or the current page If the page name is empty the current page is used see example 2 Toggling refers
253. ou are finished assigning the alpha numeric string for the Web Control name 11 Press the Web Control Password field to open the Web Password keyboard 12 From the Web Password keyboard enter a unique alpha numeric string to be assigned as the G4 Authentication session password associated with VNC web access of this panel 13 Press Done after you are finished assigning the alpha numeric string for the Web Control password 14 Press the Web Control Port field to open the Web Port Number keypad 15 Within the keypad enter a unique numeric value to be assigned to the port the VNC Web Server is running on The default value is 5900 16 Press Done when you are finished entering the value The remaining fields within the G4 Web Control Settings section of this page are read only and cannot be altered OT G4 Web Control GEVI Cone Settings y GENE Contra Timeott 4 7 cp 7 FIG 73 Sample relationship between G4 Web Control and Mange WebControl Connections window 17 Press the Up Down arrows on either sides of the G4 Web Control Timeout field to increase or decrease the amount of time the panel can remain idle no cursor movements before the session is closed and the user is disconnected 18 Press the Back button to open the Protected Setup page 19 Press the on screen Reboot button to save any changes and restart the panel C Verify your NetLinx Master s IP Address and System Number have been properly entered int
254. ould be ButtonGet Id 529 Type 1004 Flag VALUE1 VALUE2 VALUE3 TEXT TEXT LENGTH 0 I E HoH OO Button Query Commands Cont TEC Syntax Get the current TEC lt vt addr range gt lt button states range gt text effect color Variable variable text address range 1 4000 button states range 1 256 for multi state buttons 0 All states for General buttons 1 Off state and 2 On state custom event type 1009 Flag Zero Value1 Button state number Value2 Actual length of string should be 9 Value3 Zero Text Hex encoded color value ex 000000FF Text length Color name length should be 9 Example SEND COMMAND Panel TEC 529 1 Gets the button OFF state text effect color information The result sent to the Master would be ButtonGet Id 529 Type 1009 Flag 0 VALUE1 1 VALUE2 9 VALUE3 0 TEXT 5088F2AE TEXT LENGTH 9 TEF Syntax Get the current OTEF lt vt addr range gt lt button states range gt text effect name Variable variable text address range 1 4000 button states range 1 256 for multi state buttons 0 All states for General buttons 1 Off state and 2 On state custom event type 1008 Flag Zero Value1 Button state number Value2 Actual length of string Value3 Zero Text String that represents the text effect name Text length Text effect name length Example SEND COMMAND Panel T
255. ound Modero panel properties such as resolution used on board memory firmware address channel information and string information Panel Information Ed 5 This information is retrieved from the Modero panel FIG 85 Panel Information page takes its information from the touch panel The elements of the Panel Information page are described in the table below Panel Information Page Elements Back Returns you to the previously active touch panel page Connection Status icon This visual display of the connection status allows the user to have a current visual update of the panel s connection status regardless of what page is currently active A Lock only appears on the icon if the panel has established a connection with a currently secured target Master requiring a username and password Panel Type Displays the model of the Modero panel being used Firmware Version Displays the G4 firmware version being used by the panel e Verify you have the latest version from www amx com Panel Information Page Elements Cont Setup Port Displays the setup port information value being used by the panel High Port Displays the high port port count value for the panel High Address Displays the high address address count value for the panel High Channel Displays the high channel channel count value for the panel High Level Displays the high level level
256. our included secure the NXD to the Rough In Box Stud B Main NXD unit consists of the touch panel and back box housing A Faceplate Trim Ring default Faceplate comes with buttons FIG 37 NXD CV7 panel installation into a CB TP7 pre wall construction 2 Verify the incoming power RJ 45 audio video Ethernet and USB cables have been properly threaded through the wiring knockouts on the left of the rough in box Leave enough slack in the wiring to accommodate any re positioning of the panel 3 Connect all data and power wiring connectors to their corresponding locations along the side of the un powered NXD touch panel e Verify that the terminal end of the power cable is not connected to a power source before plugging in the 2 pin power connector e The USB connectors can be from either a USB extension cable or a wireless USB RF transmitter 4 Test the incoming wiring by connecting the panel connections to their terminal locations and applying power Verify that the panel is receiving power and functioning properly to prevent repetition of the installation 5 Disconnect the terminal end of the power cable from the connected power supply Don t disconnect the connectors from the touch panel The unit must be installed with at the attached connectors before being inserted into the rough in box 6 Carefully slide the main NXD CV7 unit B in FIG 37 into the rough in box so that all Mounting Tabs
257. ource Manager tab Slots section l lt icon 01 9900 0 clear gt Set the icon using values of 01 9900 icon numbers are assigned in the TPDesign4 Resource Manager tab Slots section J lt alignment of text 1 9 gt As shown the following telephone keypad alignment chart 0 1 2 3 4 5 16 Zero can be used for an absolute position 7 8 J9 JT lt alignment of text 0 9 gt As shown the above telephone keypad alignment chart BUT the 0 zero is absolute and followed by lt left gt lt top gt JB lt alignment of bitmap picture 0 9 gt As shown the above telephone keypad alignment chart BUT the 0 zero is absolute and followed by lt left gt lt top gt JSl lt alignment of icon 0 9 gt As shown the above telephone keypad alignment chart BUT the 0 zero is absolute and followed by lt left gt lt top gt For some of these commands and values refer to the RGB Values for all 88 Basic Colors table on page 139 CF lt on fill color gt Set Fill Color CB lt on border color gt Set Border Color CT lt on text color gt Set Text Color SW lt 1 or 0 gt Show hide a button SO lt sound gt Set the button sound EN lt 1 or 0 gt Enable disable a button WW lt 1 or O gt Word wrap On Off GH lt bargraph hi gt Set the bargraph upper limit GL lt bargraph low gt Set the bargraph lower limit
258. ousing and angle it over to the side of the unit where the wires are connected to the circuit board 7 Gently lay the back box to one side of the unit This exposes the internal circuit board FIG 23 Take care not to place undue strain on the speaker cables Step 2 Install the new Compact Flash Memory card NXD Complete the procedures outline within Step 2 Install the Compact Flash Memory card upgrade section on page 20 and then continue with the following Step 3 Step 3 Install the new 802 11g Wireless Compact Flash card NXD Complete the procedures outline within Step 3 Install the new 802 11g CF Card and Antenna section on page 21 and then continue with the following Step 4 Step 4 Close and Resecure the NXD Panel Enclosure 1 Gently place the outer housing back onto the panel and align the four pan head Housing Screws holes along the edges of the outer housing 2 Insert and secure the four pan head Housing Screws back into their pre drilled holes by using a grounded Phillips head screwdriver 3 Slip the connector overlay back into the connector opening by inserting the top of the overlay into the connector opening in an upwards direction 4 Align the connectors to their respective locations and secure the overlay by pushing it towards the connectors until the overlay securely snaps back into the overlay release latches 5 Re install the faceplate back onto the panel Refer to the Installing the Button Trim Ring section
259. out DHCP will register the unique MAC Address factory assigned on the panel and once the communication setup process is complete assign IP Address Subnet Mask and Gateway values from the DHCP Server 5 Press the optional Host Name field to open a Keyboard and enter the Host Name information IP Settings DHGP Static DHCP IPAddtess 192 192 292 92 Moder ode Subnet Mask 255 255 255 0 connection IP info Gateway 192 192 292 90 Bost ame i Primary ONS 192 192 92 7 Secondary ONS 192 192 92 5 Domain techpubs internal MACAdArESS 00 C0 00 B C1 00 ERE Wireless Access Point A 00 11 22 3A 45 50 60D ie Site Survey Button FIG 58 Wireless Settings page IP Settings section 6 Press Done after you are finished assigning the alpha numeric string of the host name 7 Do not alter any of these remaining greyed out fields in the IP Settings section Once the panel is rebooted these values are obtained by the unit and displayed in the DNS fields after power up This information can be found in either the Workspace System name gt Define Device section of your code that defines the properties for your panel or in the Device Addressing Network Addresses section of the Tools gt NetLinx Diagnostics dialog 8 Setup the security and communication parameters between the wireless card and the target WAP by configuring the Wireless Settings section on this page Refer to Step 2 Configure the Card s Wireless Security S
260. ow value is set or there are no more fields left i e reached first field If a character is typed and that characters appear in the Next Field list the keyboard should move the focus to the next field For example when entering time a is used as a next field character If you hit 1 2 the 1 is entered in the current field hours and then the focus is moved to the next field and 2 is entered in that field When entering time in a 12 hour format entry of AM and PM is required Instead of adding AM PM to the input mask specification the AM PM should be handled within the NetLinx code This allows a programmer to show hide and provide discrete feedback for AM and PM Input mask output examples The following are some common input masking examples Output Examples Common Name Input Mask Input IP Address Quad 0 255 Any value from 0 to 255 Hour 1 12 Any value from 1 to 12 Minute Second 0 59 Any value from 0 to 59 Frames 0 29 Any value from 0 to 29 Phone Numbers 999 000 0000 555 555 5555 Zip Code 00000 9999 75082 4567 NOTE URL Resources A URL can be broken into several parts For example the URL http Avww amx com company info home asp This URL indicates that the protocol in use is http HyperText Transport Protocol and that the information resides on a host machine named www amx com The image on that host machine is given an assignment by the program name of compa
261. p g communication 04 Ch 10 13 France 11 Ch 1 11 North America 13 Ch 1 13 Europe ETSI 13 Ch 1 13 Japan 802 119 14 Ch 1 14 Japan 802 11b Note To alter the card s default country code North America please contact an AMX Technical Support representative for detailed procedures and information OO ne NXA WC80211GCF Specifications Cont Operating Environment Temperature 0 C 45 C 32 F to 113 F operating and 20 C 70 C 4 F to 158 F storage e Humidity non condensing 5 90 RH operating and non condensing 5 95 RH storage Operating Voltage Power Consumption 3 3V 5 I O supply voltage 802 11b communication RX 270 mA TX 435 mA Standby 240 mA 802 11g communication RX 270 mA TX 460 mA Standby 240 mA Radio Data Rate 802 11g compliant 1 2 5 5 11 DSSS CCk 6 9 12 18 24 36 48 and 54 OFDM Mbps data rates Radio Technology Receiver Sensitivity Using 802 11b communication DSSS Direct Sequence Spread Spectrum CCK Complementary Code Keying Using 802 119 communication DSSS CCK OFDM Orthogonal Frequency Division Multiplexing Using 802 11b communication FER lt 8 1 Mbps 94 dBm max 2 Mbps 93 dBm max 5 5 Mbps 92 dBm max 11 Mbps 90 dBm max Using 802 11g communication PER lt 10 6 Mbps 87 dBm max 9 Mbps 86 dBm max 12 Mbps 86 dBm max 18 Mb
262. p to the least secure at the bottom of the list EAP Method Characteristics Method Credential Type Authentication Pros Cons EAP TLS Certificates e Certificate is based ona e Highest e Difficult to two way authentication Security deploy EAP TTLS e Certificates Client authentication is e High Security Moderately Fixed Passwords done via password and difficult to certificates deploy e One time passwords oo Server authentication is tokens i his done via certificates EAP PEAP e Certificates Client authentication is e High Security Moderately Fixed Passwords done via password and difficult to certificates deplo One time passwords ploy tokens e Server authentication is done via certificates EAP LEAP e Certificates e Authentication is based on Easy e Susceptible to Fixed Passwords MS CHAP and deployment dictionary MS CHAPv2 attacks One time passwords tokens EAP FAST Certificates N A e N A N A Fixed Passwords authentication protocols One time passwords tokens Ol EAP communication overview EAP Authentication goes a step beyond just encrypting data transfers but also requires that a set of credentials be validated before the client panel is allowed to connect to the rest of the network FIG 114 Below is a description of this process It is important to note that there is no user intervention necessary during this process It proceeds au
263. p aster Communication Serge Platten Selection Tiaragon Correction Option x cast Neliraita F TCPAP Aseem Masa Sonal Modam Vid Meet roe Masis _ om Virtual MetLinx Master Settings Enter this IP Faai a Niatna Sao naai e aAA into the EE Master IP URL Tona sl he paraka to covect ciha Va USS fan field on the Mioa aiana n s renata et System Settings IP Addresses of computer page NOTE Charges ta he Solem Hurt of ihe Vatu Nellin M also obtained by using the sim wd not tah eflect urai sl commursc anon have been wopped and revues Start gt Run gt cmd commana FIG 69 Assigning Communication Settings and TCP IP Settings for a Virtual Master 4 Click the Communications Settings button to open the Communications Settings dialog 5 Click on the NetLinx Master radio button from the Platform Selection section to indicate that you are working as a NetLinx Master 6 Click on the Virtual Master radio box from the Transport Connection Option section to indicate you are wanting to configure the PC to communicate with a panel Everything else such as the Authentication is greyed out because you are not going through the Master s UI 7 Click the Edit Settings button on the Communications Settings dialog to open the Virtual NetLinx Master Settings dialog FIG 69 8 From within this dialog enter the System number default is 1 and note the IP Address of the target PC
264. panel for DNS look up MAC Address This value is factory set by the manufacturer of the wireless Ethernet card Access Point MAC This value is factory set by the manufacturer of the Wireless Access Point Address WAP e Site Survey button Clicking this button launches a page which allows a user to sniff out all transmitting Wireless Access Points within the detection range of the internal NXA WC80211GCF this feature is not available with the 802 11b Wi Fi card The Site Survey page contains categories such as Network Name SSID Wireless Access Point names Channel RF Channel currently being used by the WAP Wireless Access Point Security Type security protocol enabled on the WAP if detectable such as WEP OPEN and UNKNOWN Signal Strength None Poor Fair Good Very Good and Excellent MAC Address Unique identification of the transmitting Access Point e Refer to the Using the Site Survey tool section on page 59 for more detailed information on the Slte Survey page e When communicating with a WAP200G enter the MAC Address BSSID of the target WAP as the Access Point MAC Address Refer to the WAP200G Instruction Manual for more detailed information on the interaction between these two product lines Wireless Settings Page Elements Cont Wireless Security Open Clear Text Static WEP WPA PSK Sets the wireless security method being used by the Modero panel to establish communicatio
265. pgrade the panel firmware via an IP 1 Click the OnLine Tree tab in the Workspace window to view the devices on the System The default System value is one 2 Right click the associated System number from the Workspace window and select Refresh System to detect of all devices on the current system establish a new connection to the Master and refresh the System list with devices on that system 3 After the Communication Verification dialog window verifies active communication between the PC and the Master verify the panel appears in the OnLine Tree tab of the Workspace window FIG 78 on page 82 The default Modero panel value is 10001 C The panel firmware is shown on the right of the listed panel NOTE 4 Ifthe panel firmware being used is not current download the latest Kit file by first logging in to www amx com and then navigate to Tech Center gt Firmware Files and from within the Modero section of the web page locate your Modero panel Only CV7 firmware should be loaded onto ithis specific panel type This new firmware also provides both backwards compatibility with the previous NOTE 802 11b cards and new security protocols for the new 802 11g wireless CF card O The latest CV7 firmware kit file is now panel specific 5 Click on the desired Kit file link and after you ve accepted the Licensing Agreement verify you have downloaded the Modero Kit file to a known location 6 From within Studio select Tools gt Firm
266. ple SEND COMMAND Panel RPP Resets the protected Setup page password to 1988 AVOL Syntax Set the panel VOL lt volume level gt volume Variable volume level 0 100 100 is maximum volume setting Example SEND_COMMAND Panel VOL 50 Set the panel volume to 50 Dynamic Image Commands The following table describes Dynamic Image Commands Dynamic Image Commands ABBR Set the bitmap of a button to use a particular resource Syntax ABBR lt vt addr range gt lt button states range gt lt resource name gt Variable variable text address range 1 4000 button states range 1 256 for multi state buttons 0 All states for General buttons 1 Off state and 2 On state resource name 1 50 ASCII characters Example SEND_COMMAND Panel BBR 700 1 Sports_Image Sets the resource name of the button to Sports_Image ARAF Add new resources Adds any and all resource parameters by sending embedded codes and data Since the embedded codes are preceded by a character any character contained in the URL must be escaped with a second character see example The file name field indicated by a F embedded code may contain special escape sequences as shown in the RAF RMF Embedded Codes table below Syntax lt RAF lt resource name gt lt data gt Variables e resource name 1 50 ASCII characters data Refers to the emb
267. power supply If battery power or wireless connection fails during a firmware upgrade the panel WARNING flash file system may become corrupted A It is recommended that firmware Kit files only be transferred over a direct Ethernet The process of updating firmware involves the use of a communicating NetLinx Master The required steps for updating firmware to a Modero panel are virtually identical to those necessary for updating Kit files to a NetLinx Master except the target device is a panel instead of a Master Refer to either your Master s literature or Studio 2 x Help file for those procedures communicate with a secured Master If you are updating the firmware on or through a panel which is not using a username or password field you must first remove the WARNING Master Security feature to establish an unsecured connection A A touch panel which is not using a valid username and password will not be able to Upgrading the Modero Firmware via the USB port Before beginning with this section verify your panel is both powered and the Type A USB connector is securely inserted into the PC s USB port The panel must be powered on before connecting the mini USB connector to the panel latest NetLinx Studio and TPDesign4 applications will cause a failure in the USB driver installation WARNING This driver must first be saved to the PC as part of the new NetLinx Studio and TPDesign4 application installations A Establishing a USB connecti
268. ps 84 dBm max 24 Mbps 82 dBm max 36 Mbps 78 dBm 48 Mbps 74 dBm max 54 Mbps 72 dBm max RF Frequency Ranges Using 802 11b amp g communication Europe ETSI 2 412 2 472 GHz France 2 457 2 472 GHz Japan 802 11b 2 412 2 484 GHz Japan 802 119 2 412 2 472 GHz North America 2 412 2 462 GHz Standard Conformance IEEE 802 11b e IEEE 802 119 e IEEE 802 11e e IEEE 802 111 e Wi Fi WPA and WPA2 Transmit Output Power 802 11b communication 12 1 dBm 1 2 5 5 11 Mbps 802 11g communication 12 1 dBm 6 9 12 18 24 36 48 and 54 Mbps NOTE NXA WC80211GCF Specifications Cont Wireless LAN Security EAP FAST EAP LEAP EAP PEAP e EAP TLS EAP TTLS e WEP 64 amp 128 WPA PSK Touch Panel e MVP 7500 FG5965 01 Compatibility e MVP 8400 FG5965 02 e NXD CV10 FG2259 02 e NXT CV10 FG2259 01 03 e NXD CV7 FG2258 02 e NXT CV7 FG2258 01 Included Accessories e Double sided adhesive tape Mounting Template cutout 62 2255 04 e NXA WC80211GCF Installation Guide Two Alcohol cleaning pads e Wireless CF card with wireless antenna Other AMX Equipment e NXA WAP250G Modero Wireless Access Point FG2255 50 Upgrade Compact Flash memory factory programmed with firmware NXA CFSP128M 128 MB compact flash card FG2116 36 NXA CFSP256M 256 MB compact flash card FG2116 37 NXA CFSP512M 512 MB compact flash card F
269. pter 2 Connect the power adapter to the provided power cord with plug 3 Provide power to the unit by connecting the power cord with plug into a power outlet that meets the requirements outlined in the Specifications section for the NXT CHG Reading the NXT CHG LED Indicator FIG 31 shows the components on the NXT CHG Smart Battery Charger Slot 1 recalibration Slot 2 Slot 1 LED Slot 2 LED Recalibrate Pushbutton FIG 31 Component locations on the NXT CHG T T here is one LED indicator on the front of each battery slot that indicates the status of that slot he blink patterns for these LEDs are described in the following table e Off No battery detected e Green Flashing Fast charging e Green Solid Fully charged Yellow Flashing Recalibration in process Yellow Green Recalibration complete e Yellow Solid Standby waiting for other battery to charge Red Flash Error problem with either the battery connection to the internal slot or with the battery itself Charging the NXT BP batteries using the NXT CHG 1 Review the Checking the NXT BP charge section on page 25 to confirm the percentage of charge remaining on the batteries 2 Provide power to the charger as outlined in the Powering the NXT CHG section on page 28 3 Align the battery connector with the corresponding charge slot 4 Firmly insert the battery into the desired slot until the battery is both securely located within
270. r the word AMXPanel using a 128 bit hex digit encryption After pressing Done the on screen Current Key field displays a long string of characters separated by colons which represents the encryption key equivalent to the word AMXPanel This series of hex digits 26 hex digits for a 128 bit encryption key should be entered as the Current Key into both the WAP and onto other communicating Modero panels by using the WEP Key dialog FIG 67 WEP KEY HI 3e 22 fb 22 9b 38 22 c8 22 60 22 5b fa_ Clear Delete Home FIG 67 WEP Key Keyboard 13 Write down this Current Key string value for later entry into your WAP s WEP Key field typically entered without colons and into other communicating panel s Current Key field FIG 67 14 If you are entering a Current Key generated either by your target WAP or another Modero panel within the WEP Keys section touch the Key button to launch the WEP Key keyboard FIG 67 enter the characters and press Done when finished e This Key value corresponds to the Default WEP Key number used on the Wireless Access Point and selected in the Default Key field described in the previous step P NOTE t kd NOTE If your target Wireless Access Point does not support passphrase key generation and has previously been setup with a manually entered WEP KEY you must manually enter that same WEP key on your panel 15 16 17 18 The remaining Current Key and Auth
271. receivers and transmitters on G4 panels share the device address number of the panel Front setup access button e Provides both access to the Setup and Calibration page and toggles the panel between a sleep or wake state When wired sleep status means the backlight is Off When battery operated wireless sleep status means the touch panel base is either Off or suspended Microphone e Used for intercom applications requires the NXA AVB ETHERNET Breakout Box for analog communication Speakers e Stereo output with a frequency response of 500 Hz 7 KHz LEDs NXD panels only 6 blue LEDs support On and Off Both the LEDs and pushbuttons are only available when using the default Button Trim Ring on the NXD panel Buttons NXD panels only 6 programmable pushbuttons Rear Panel Components Side panel location on NXD Wall Mount panels Mini USB connector e 5 pin Mini USB connector used for programming firmware update and touch panel file transfer between the PC and the target panel Note When connecting the panel to PC using a CC USB or compatible cable be sure to power the panel On before attempting to connect the USB cable from the PC to the mini USB port on the panel Refer to the Configuring and Using USB with a Virtual Master section on page 51 for more information Stereo Output connector e Stereo output through a 3 5mm mini jack for use with external speakers or headpho
272. red determines the level of WEP encryption employed Either 64 bit or 128 bit 128 bit keys may also be entered and are used if supported by the internal wireless card Wireless Security Static WEP Cont Current Key Displays the current WEP key in use Keys may also be examined by touching the key buttons and noting the keyboard initialization text e When working with a single panel and a single WAP it is recommended that you manually enter the Current Key from the WAP into the selected WEP Key e When working with a single WAP and multiple panels it is recommended that you generate a Current Key using the same passphrase on all panels and then enter the panel produced WEP key manually into the Wireless Access Point e Use the on screen keyboard s Clear button to completely erase any previously stored key information Authentication Toggles between the two authentication modes Open WEP or Shared WEP The choice here is whether or not the SSID is broadcast publicly or encrypted e An Open system WEP network allows connections from any client without authenticating whether that client has permission to associate with the network A Shared key WEP network requires the client to submit a key which is shared by the network Wireless Access Point before it is given permission to associate with the network In this case the key is the same as the WEP encryption key e In both cases even after association
273. ress of 150 A Button Commands Cont ABMF Syntax Set any all button ABMF lt vt addr range gt lt button states range gt lt data gt parameters by Variables sending embedded codes variable text address char array 1 4000 and data button states range 1 256 for multi state buttons 0 All states for General buttons 1 Off state and 2 On state level range 1 600 level value is 1 65535 data B lt border style gt Set the border style name See theBorder Styles table on page 141 B lt border 0 27 40 41 gt Set the borer style number See theBorder Styles table on page 141 DO lt 1 5 gt lt 1 5 gt lt 1 5 gt lt 1 5 gt lt 1 5 gt Set the draw order Listed from bottom to top Refer to the BDO command on page 146 for more information F lt font 1 8 10 11 20 29 32 xx gt Set the font See theDefault Font Styles and ID Numbers table on page 141 F lt font 01 08 10 11 20 29 32 xx gt Set the font See theDefault Font Styles and ID Numbers table on page 141 Ml lt mask image gt Set the mask image Refer to the BMI command on page 151 for more information T lt text gt Set the text using ASCII characters empty is clear P lt bitmap gt Set the picture bitmap filename empty is clear l lt icon 01 9900 0 clear gt Set the icon using values of 01 9900 icon numbers are assigned in the TPDesign4 Res
274. ress range 1 4000 button states range 1 256 for multi state buttons 0 All states for General buttons 1 Off state and 2 On state unicode text 1 50 ASCII characters Unicode characters must be entered in Hex format Example SEND_COMMAND Panel BAU 520 1 00770062 Appends Unicode text 00770062 to the button s OFF state ABCB Only if the specified border color is not the same as the current color Set the border Note Color can be assigned by color name without spaces number or R GB value color to the RRGGBB or RRGGBBAA specified color Syntax BCB lt vt addr range gt lt button states range gt lt color value gt Variable variable text address range 1 4000 button states range 1 256 for multi state buttons 0 All states for General buttons 1 Off state and 2 On state color value Refer to theRGB Values for all 88 Basic Colors table on page 139 for more information Example SEND_COMMAND Panel BCB 500 504 amp 510 1 12 Sets the Off state border color to 12 Yellow Colors can be set by Color Numbers Color name R G B alpha colors RRGGBBAA and R G amp B colors values RRGGBB Refer to the RGB Values for all 88 Basic Colors table on page 139 ABCF Only if the specified fill color is not the same as the current color Set the fill color to Note Color can be assigned by color name without spaces number or R GB value the specified RRGGBB or RRGGBBA
275. rews using a grounded Phillips head screwdriver in their respective locations as shown in FIG 16 on page 18 7 Replace any adhesive plastic feet that might have been removed during the removal process of the outer housing These feet must be placed back onto their original locations so they can fit into their provided openings on the Battery Base 8 Grasp both the LCD and housing and then rotate the entire unit back onto a flat surface 9 Insert all connectors and apply power Installation and Upgrade of the Internal NXD Components Upgrading the cards within the WallMount panel involves removing the rear plastic outer housing back box removing the existing card replacing it with the 802 11g upgrade and then placing the back box back onto the NXD panel as described in the following sections These panels do not come factory installed with the NXA WC802 11GCF wireless interface card This card must be ordered separately from AMX as part of the 802 11g upgrade kit FG2255 07 Step 1 Remove the existing NXD Outer Housing 1 Carefully detach all connectors from the side of the touch panel and remove the Faceplate from the front of the panel 2 Place the LCD facedown on a soft cloth to expose the under side of the unit FIG 22 This step helps prevent scratching of the LCD Two 2 connector overlay release latches Unscrew these
276. rgraph Variable Via i variable text address range 1 4000 second bargraph ramp up time In 1 10th of a second intervals Example SEND_COMMAND Panel GRU 500 100 Changes the bargraph ramp up time to 10 seconds AGSC A user can also assign the color by Name and R G B value RRGGBB or RRGGBBAA Change the Syntax GSC lt vt addr range gt lt color value gt Variable variable text address range 1 4000 color value Refer to the RGB Values for all 88 Basic Colors table on page 139 Example SEND_COMMAND Panel GSC 500 12 Changes the bargraph or joystick slider color to Yellow AGSN Change the bargraph slider name or joystick cursor name Slider names and cursor names can be found in the TPDesign4 slider name and cursor drop down list Syntax GSN lt vt addr range gt lt bargraph slider name gt Variable variable text address range 1 4000 bargraph slider name See table below Bargraph Slider Names None Ball Circle L Circle M Circle S Precision Rectangle L Rectangle M Rectangle S Windows Windows Active Joystick Cursor Names None Arrow Ball Circle Crosshairs Gunsight Hand Metal Spiral Target View Finder Example SEND_COMMAND Panel GSN 500 Ball Changes the bargraph slider name or the Joystick cursor name to Ball A Button Commands Cont ICO Set the icon toa button Syntax TCO
277. riables variable text address range 1 4000 remote host 1 50 ASCII characters Example SEND_COMMAND Panel BVN 500 191 191 191 191 Sets the remote host to 191 191 191 191 for the specific computer control button ABVP Set the network password for the specified address Syntax BVP lt vt addr range gt lt network password gt Variable variable text address range 1 4000 network password 1 50 ASCII characters Example SEND_COMMAND Panel BVP 500 PCLOCK Sets the password to PCLOCK for the specific PC control button ABVT Set the computer control network port for the speci fied address Syntax BVT lt vt addr range gt lt network port gt Variable variable text address range 1 4000 network port 1 65535 Example SEND_COMMAND Panel BVT 500 5000 Sets the network port to 5000 ABWW Set the button word wrap feature to those buttons with a defined address range By default word wrap is Off Syntax lt BWW lt vt addr range gt lt button states range gt lt word wrap gt Variable variable text address range 1 4000 button states range 1 256 for multi state buttons 0 All states for General buttons 1 Off state and 2 On state word wrap 0 Off and 1 On Default is Off Example SEND_COMMAND Panel BWwW 500 1 1 Sets the word wrap on for the button s Off state A Button Commands Cont
278. rim Ring 9 Firmly press down around the Button Trim Ring until all of the latches are securely inserted into their openings on the Faceplate and the Button Trim Ring is securely fastened Verify the Button Trim Ring is firmly inserted onto the Faceplate and that there are no gaps between this Trim Ring and the outer surface of the Faceplate 10 Place the Faceplate back onto the main NXD CV7 unit Make sure to align the Microphone Light and PIR Motion sensor locations on the main unit to their respective openings on the Faceplate assembly Pre Wall Installation of the Rough In Box Wall Mount panels NXDs are contained within an outer housing back box This back box is not removed when installing the NXD into a Rough In Box CB TP7 The back box is only removed to gain access for the replacement of the internal components MOUNTING TABS TO ACCOMMODATE THE DRYWALL or SHEETROCK This gap allows the installation of the drywall or sheetrock after the CB TP7 Rough In WARNING Box has been installed A INSTALLER LEAVE A GAP BETWEEN THE STUD AND ROUGH IN BOX The CB TP7 is an optional metallic box that is secured onto a stud beam in a pre wall setting where no walls are present Installation procedures and configurations can vary depending on the installation environment This section describes the installation procedures for the most common installation scenario The most important thing to remember when mounting this rough in box is that th
279. ring 999 222 1211 with prompt text Enter Phone Number TPAGEON This command turns On page tracking whereby when the page or popups change a Turn On page string is sent to the Master This string may be captured with a CREATE_BUFFER tracking command for one panel and sent directly to another panel Syntax TPAGEON Example SEND COMMAND Panel TPAGEON Turns On page tracking TPAGEOFF Syntax Turn Off page TPAGEOFF tracking Example SEND COMMAND Panel TPAGEOFF Turns Off page tracking VKB Syntax Popup the VKB virtual Example keyboard SEND COMMAND Panel VKB Pops up the virtual keyboard WAKE Syntax Force the panel WAKE out of screen Example saver mode SEND COMMAND Panel WAKE Forces the panel out of the screen saver mode Input Commands These Send Commands are case insensitive Input Commands ACAL Put panel in calibration mode AKPS Set the keyboard passthru AVKS Send one or more virtual key strokes to the G4 application Syntax ACAL Example SEND COMMAND Panel CAL Puts the panel in calibration mode Syntax KPS lt pass data gt Variable pass data lt blank empty gt Disables the keyboard 0 Pass data to G4 application default This can be used with VPC or text areas 1 4 Not used 5 Sends out data to the Master Example SEND COMMAND Panel KPS 5 Sets the keyboard passthru to the Mas
280. river 3e Unplug or Eject Hardware 2 x Select the device you want to unplug or eject and then click Stop When Windows notifies you that it is safe to do so unplug the device from your computer Hardware devices Hg AMX USB LAN LINK Device type Network adapters Manufacturer AMX Location AMX USB Device Device status This device is working properly If you are having problems with this device click Troubleshooter to start the troubleshooter AMX USB LAN LINK at AMX USB Device KA i 5 a Device usage detection I Display device components icon I Show Unplug Eject icon on the taskbar FIG 55 USB Properties windows the hardware devices section of the Unplug or Eject Hardware window stop and close the USB operation Reconnect the USB cable to the panel and repeat the setup NOTE procedures Refer to the Troubleshooting section on page 201 for more detailed information If there is a yellow exclamation point next to the AMX USB LAN LINK device within To remove the USB driver association from a previously connected touch panel you must navigate back to the Device Manager right click on the panel s USB driver example AMX USB LAN LINK 2 and select Uninstall from the context menu and then OK Once the system completes the removal of the device the Device Manager window will refresh and the device will no longer appear e The next time t
281. rop Shadow 2 Soft Drop Shadow 3 Soft Drop Shadow 4 Soft Drop Shadow 5 Soft Drop Shadow 6 Soft Drop Shadow 7 Soft Drop Shadow 8 Medium Drop Shadow 1 Medium Drop Shadow 2 Medium Drop Shadow 3 Medium Drop Shadow 4 Medium Drop Shadow 5 Medium Drop Shadow 6 Medium Drop Shadow 7 Medium Drop Shadow 8 Hard Drop Shadow 1 Hard Drop Shadow 2 Hard Drop Shadow 3 Hard Drop Shadow 4 Hard Drop Shadow 5 Soft Drop Shadow 6 with outline Soft Drop Shadow 7 with outline Soft Drop Shadow 8 with outline Medium Drop Shadow 1 with outline Medium Drop Shadow 2 with outline Medium Drop Shadow 3 with outline Medium Drop Shadow 4 with outline Medium Drop Shadow 5 with outline Medium Drop Shadow 6 with outline Medium Drop Shadow 7 with outline Medium Drop Shadow 8 with outline Hard Drop Shadow 1 with outline Hard Drop Shadow 2 with outline Hard Drop Shadow 3 with outline Hard Drop Shadow 4 with outline Hard Drop Shadow 5 with outline Hard Drop Shadow 6 with outline Hard Drop Shadow 7 with outline Hard Drop Shadow 8 with outline Button Query Commands Button Query commands reply back with a custom event There will be one custom event for each button state combination Each query is assigned a unique custom event type The following example is for debug purposes only NetLinx Example CUSTOM_EVENT device Address Custom event type DEFINE_EVENT CUSTOM_EVENT TP 529 1001
282. rough in box the NXD mounting tabs must lie flush against the outside of the sheetrock 4 Thread the incoming power RJ 45 audio video Ethernet and USB wiring through the knockouts use of the left wiring knockouts are recommended with this installation Leave enough slack in the wiring to accommodate any re positioning of the panel 5 Install the drywall sheetrock before inserting the main NXD unit into the CB TP7 Installation of an NXD Touch Panel The NXD CV7 can be installed either directly into the optional CB TP7 or other solid surface environment using the two different mounting options drywall clips or solid surface screws The following sections describe mounting the touch panel directly into a pre wall rough in box a solid surface or drywall and optional NXA RK7 Rack Mount Kit Installing the NXD panel within a Rough In Box The rough in box must be mounted prior to continuing this section Refer to the procedures in the Pre Wall Installation of the Rough In Box section on page 34 for detailed pre wall installation instructions Verify that all necessary cables have been threaded through the knockouts on the left of the rough in box and the connections have been tested prior to installation of the NXD CV7 1 Remove the Faceplate bezel A in FIG 37 from the main NXD unit B in FIG 37 by gripping the faceplate and pulling with gentle outward force C Optional CB TP7 rough in wallbox 4 40 Mounting Screws f
283. rsions of AMX s NetLinx Studio and H Before commencing verify you are using the latest NetLinx Master and Modero panel TPDesign4 programs WARNING G4 panel is powered up The panel will not detect a USB connection of this type until USB input devices must be plugged into the rear or side USB connectors before the after the unit cycles power NOTE Modero Setup and System Connection 1 Press the grey Front Setup Access button for 3 seconds to open the Setup page FIG 49 i Setup A Connection Status Gonnecton Status pisparz neok lt Red Connection Status Icon indicates no connection A Yv ED to a Master Encrypted 4 Green Connection Status icon Gormectedyialetienve Innsstiviey aya Flip Tinis indicates communication T to a Master Gonnected To System Bw v ap A A m d 4 ce a Yellow Connection Status icon Fanel Brightness ey indicates an unreliable am network connection TaT Battery Base button doesn t appear until NXT is connected to a BASE 1 FIG 49 Setup page 2 Press the Protected Setup button located on the lower left of the panel page to open the Protected Setup page and display an on screen keypad 3 Enter 1988 into the Keypad s password field and press Done when finished Clearing Password 5 from the initial Password Setup page removes the need for you to enter the default password before accessing the Protected Setup page NOTE 4 Press the red Device Numb
284. s a binary choice as to whether or not Protected Access Credential provisioning is enabled or disabled e When pressed this field toggles between Enabled automatic or Disabled manual e If Enabled is selected the following PAC File Location field is then greyed out because the search for the PAC file is automatically done If Disabled is selected the user is required to manually locate a file containing the PAC shared secret credentials for use in authentication In this case the IT department must create a PAC file and then transfer it into the panel using the AMX Certificate upload application PAC File Location This field is used when the previous Automatic PAC Provisioning option has been Disabled e When pressed the panel displays an on screen PAC File Location keyboard which allows you to enter the name of the file containing the PAC shared secret credentials for use in authentication e This field is only valid when the automatic PAC provisioning feature has been enabled via the previous field Save Cancel e Use the Save button to store the new security information incorporate it and then return to the previous Wireless Settings page e Use the Cancel button to cancel any updates to the security parameters and return to the previous Wireless Settings page REGARDING AUTOMATIC PROVISIONING Even when automatic provisioning is enabled the PAC certificate is only downloaded the first time that th
285. s associated with connection to a WAP arise because the SSID was not entered properly You must maintain the same case when entering the SSID information ABC is not the same as Abc 10 Click Done when you ve completed typing in the information 11 From the Open Clear Text Settings page FIG 62 press the Save button to incorporate your new information into the panel and begin the communication process 12 Verify the fields in the JP Settings section have been properly configured Refer to Step 1 Configure the Panel s Wireless IP Settings section on page 58 for detailed information 13 Press the Back button to return to the Protected Setup page and press the on screen Reboot button to both save any changes and restart the panel Remember that you will need to navigate to the System Settings page and configure the connection to a target Master 14 After the panel restarts return to the Wireless Settings page s RF Link Info section and verify the Link Quality and Signal Strength The descriptions are None Poor Fair Good Very Good and Excellent FIG 62 The signal strength field should provide some descriptive text regarding the strength of the connection to a Wireless Access Point If there is no signal or no IP Address displayed configuration of your network could be required Configuring the Modero s wireless card for secured access to a WAP200G After logging into the WAP200G the default Status page appears w
286. s report Syntax PON lt vt addr range gt lt button states range gt lt font value gt Variable variable text address range 1 4000 button states range 1 256 for multi state buttons 0 All states for General buttons 1 Off state and 2 On state font value Range 1 XXX Refer to theDefault Font Styles and ID Numbers table on page 141 Example SEND_COMMAND Panel FON 500 504 amp 510 515 1 amp 2 4 Sets the font size to font ID 4 for the On and Off states of buttons with the variable text range of 500 504 amp 510 515 Note The Font ID is generated by TPD4 and is located in TPD4 through the Main menu Panel gt Generate Programmer s Report gt Text Only Format gt Readme txt A Button Commands Cont joystick axis to move the origin to another corner AGDI Syntax Change the AGDI lt vt addr range gt lt bargraph drag increment gt bargraph drag Variable ngremeni variable text address range 1 4000 bargraph drag increment The default drag increment is 256 Example SEND_COMMAND Panel GDI 7 128 Sets the bargraph with variable text 7 to a drag increment of 128 AGIV Parameters 1 2 and 3 will cause a bargraph or slider to be inverted regardless of Invert the orientation Their effect will be as described for joysticks Syntax 4GTV lt vt addr range gt lt joystick axis to invert gt Variable variable text address range 1 4000 joystick axis to
287. se all three audio terminals and GND then connect the terminal to the live signal the terminal to the return signal and the GND terminal to the ground signal Ground signal GND Ret iana Out e urn signa Balanced OUT OUT Line signal FIG 9 Wiring the rear MIC OUT connector for use with Balanced Audio Modero Table Top Cable CA2250 50 The Table Top Touch Panel comes with a standard 10 3 048 m Modero cable CA2250 50 that supports Ethernet Audio Video and Power connections The cable comes terminated with two RJ45 connectors Ethernet and Audio Video and a single 2 pin mini Phoenix connector for power ar FIG 10 10 Foot Modero Table Top Cable Product Specifications Modero Table Top Cable Specifications Dimensions HWD e Length 10 feet 3 048 m Connectors e Ethernet RJ 45 connector White routes Ethernet signals between the touch panel and the NXA AVB ETHERNET Breakout Box Audio Video RJ 45 connector Black routes differential audio video signals between the touch panel and the box 2 pin 3 5 mm mini Phoenix power connector to route power from the external breakout box to the target panel Included Accessories Modero Table Top Cable CA2250 50 Wiring information for the Modero Table Top cable If your installation requires custom cable configurations you can purchase bulk non terminated cable from Liberty Wire and Cable under the nomenclature AMX Tab
288. se fields are populated differently for each query command The text length String Encode field is not used in any command Button Query Commands BCB Syntax Get the current 2BCB lt vt addr range gt lt button states range gt border color Variable variable text address range 1 4000 button states range 1 256 for multi state buttons 0 All states for General buttons 1 Off state and 2 On state custom event type 1011 Flag zero Value1 Button state number Value2 Actual length of string should be 9 Value3 Zero Text Hex encoded color value ex 000000FF Text length Color name length should be 9 Example SEND COMMAND Panel BCB 529 1 Gets the button OFF state border color information The result sent to the Master would be ButtonGet Id 529 Type 1011 Flag 0 VALUE1 1 VALUE2 9 VALUE3 0 TEXT 222222FF TEXT LENGTH 9 BCF Syntax Get the current fill 2BCF lt vt addr range gt lt button states range gt color Variable variable text address range 1 4000 button states range 1 256 for multi state buttons 0 All states for General buttons 1 Off state and 2 On state custom event type 1012 Flag Zero Value1 Button state number Value2 Actual length of string should be 9 Value3 Zero Text Hex encoded color value ex 000000FF Text length Color name length should be 9 Example SEND COMMAND Panel BCF 529 1 Gets
289. secured access to a WAP200G been upgraded to a wireless panel via the installation of the NXA WC80211GCF Prior to beginning the configuration of the wireless settings verify that the panel has wireless CF card NOTE 1 Power down the panel and follow the wireless card installation procedures outlined in the Installation and Upgrade of the Internal NXT Components section on page 18 and Installation and Upgrade of the Internal NXD Components section on page 22 2 Power up the panel this allows it to detect the card 3 Press the Protected Setup button located on the lower left of the panel page to open the Protected Setup page and display an on screen keypad 4 Enter 1988 into the Keypad s password field and press Done when finished 5 Press the Wireless Settings button located on the lower left to open the Wireless Settings page IP Settings MVP Sr T AP TILS i s connection 5 P P Wireless IP info a gt a card security settings J None p yore 2 Ee sao Fair s a Good Very Good ae umer ree Excellent FIG 60 Wireless Settings page showing a sample unsecured configuration OO n 6 Enter the SSID information by either Automatically having it filled in by pressing the Site Survey button and from the Site Survey page choosing an Open WAP from within the Site Survey page and then pressing the Connect button Site Survey Wireless Networks Pores Yon Y ver Y eci J coones00 F625
290. sn t The battery base CAN NOT be hot swapped This swapping being recognized by the NXT occurs when an NXT panel is currently being powered by a PSN and touch panel then is connected to a battery base containing NXT BP batteries Introducing a new power source onto an existing configuration can damage the NXA BASE Solution If your base is not being recognized by the touch panel but is still pro viding power e Launch the latest NetLinx Studio e Refresh the particular System from within the OnLine Tree tab Identify the NXT panel using the battery base e From the Main menu go to Tools gt Firmware Transfers gt Send to NetLinx Device e Locate and select the 2255 XXX_v2_00 KIT file for the battery base e Enter the Device and System values verify the method of communication IP recommended e Click Send to reload the new base KIT file onto the NXA BASE 1 If this above steps do not cause the base to be recognized by the NXT touch panel on the Setup page contact AMX Technical Support for further assistance OO i Troubleshooting 206 7 Modero Touch Pa Troubleshooting 7 Modero Touch Panels 207 al EA It s Your World Take Control 3000 RESEARCH DRIVE RICHARDSON TX 75082 USA 800 222 0193 e 469 624 8000 469 624 7153 fax 800 932 6993 technical support www amx com 7 12 2012 AMX All rights reserved AMX and the AMX logo are registered trademarks of AMX AMX reserves
291. soonoosessssssssssssssssssseeesssesss 85 Firmware Pages and Descriptions ccsessccsesccescccecccceeccececcceeceeeceeeeeeeeeeseees 87 Set p Navigation BUTTONS wis cicsssiesssnsnsinesncuscatasscounneanpinsy eens saisin s annene iassa isre 87 Set p Page scsesssccctecccsnticvecscasadedinsccseseasecectsccecsassscesvecovetasheeseceassieesseavsecscsectcesevedcasees 88 Project Information Page c icccccestoccnceccetcedssevessaceeecevstsueseessoesndeesedocupbieecesssantensenseuaeseeikee 90 Panel information Page iii c ccissids vs cessticeeessscckberdecessabeceetscecsossessdsasvesssvoctdecegessecececeseess 91 Time amp Date Setup Page ccccscccceesseseseeeeeeeeesseeeaeeaeeececcessssesseeeeeseseeesesseeeeeeeeeaags 92 Volume Page E A A E S E E 94 Supported sampling rates for WAV cccccsseseseseeseeeceeeeeeeeeeceeeseseeecseceeeeeeeeeeseseeeteees 95 Protected Setup Page ieicvcccssccccssseccesscceccrebesevecsssuectesecsccetesnseclsessseasuenccedereseosevevsvssesupessc 95 Video Adjustment Page ciissisatcciceccescedeeiids eseduusestecenvveusaveuseveesuendecsesteueedesserveesssocucentoeds 95 Battery Base Page sssssssccsssssssssssccseccesssescsscceeesesscseeeceesessesseeeessesssseceesessessseoeees 96 OO E L Protected Setup Navigation Buttons sccccsssssscssssssssssseeeceeessessssssssssseeeeeeeees 98 Protected Setup Page icc iisicscsscnscnscosecscevessnsssunssncesvesssavenscnestesesseneswesosveceae
292. sphrase generator is case sensitive Default Key Cycles through the four available WEP key identifiers in order to select a WEP key to use As the Default Key value is altered through selection the corresponding Current Key is displayed Each of these corresponds to a WEP key e This feature is useful for accessing different networks without having to re enter that networks WEP key e Itis also sometimes used to set up a rotating key schedule to provide an extra layer of security WEP Keys This feature provides you with another level of security by selecting a Key value Both ASCII and HEX keys are supported A single button is available for each WEP key up to a maximum of four keys e Pushing any of these buttons brings up an on screen keyboard Keys should be entered in hexadecimal notation It is common practice for every two characters representing a single byte to be separated by a colon e Since both ASCII and HEX keys are supported it is important to note that up to four keys can be configured for both An ASCII key utilizes either 5 or 13 ASCII characters A HEX key utilizes either 10 or 26 Hexidecimal characters e Press Done to accept any changes and save the new value e Ex 01 0A 67 F3 56 although this is not necessary and the key may be entered by omitting the colons A 64 bit key will be 10 characters in length while a 128 bit key will be 26 characters in length The length of the key ente
293. splay P 32 A out of R 32 out of 100 A of O R 32 of 0 100 V of L H 532 of 500 600 es NOTE Text Area Input Masking Text Area Input Masking can be used to limit the allowed correct characters that are entered into a text area For example in working with a zip code a user could limit the entry to a max length of only 5 characters but with input masking you could limit them to 5 mandatory numerical digits and 4 optional numerical digits A possible use for this feature is to enter information into form fields The purpose of this feature is to e Force you to use correct type of characters i e numbers vs characters e Limit the number of characters in a text area e Suggest proper format with fixed characters e Right to Left e Required or Optional e Change Force a Case e Create multiple logical fields e Specify range of characters number for each field With this feature it is NOT necessary to e Limit you to a choice of selections Handle complex input tasks such as names days of the weeks or months by name e Perform complex validation such as Subnet Mask validation Input mask character types These character types define what information is allowed to be entered in any specific instance The following table lists what characters in an input mask will define what characters are allowed in any given position Character Types Character Masking Rule 0 Digit 0
294. ssword Certificate Authority MSCHAPv2 Save Cancel FIG 109 Wireless Settings page EAP TTLS security method Wireless Security EAP TTLS Settings SSID Service Set Identifier The SSID is the unique name used on the WAP and then assigned to all panels in a wireless network that are communicating to the same target WAP e This is required by the WAP before the panel is permitted to join the wireless network e Itis case sensitive and must not exceed 32 characters which may be any keyboard character Make sure this setting is the same for all points in your wireless network e This unique string identifies the network and is the same string for all users on the same network e Use the on screen keyboard s Clear button to completely erase any previously stored SSID information e Note In all cases the SSID of the WAP must be entered If it is left blank the panel will try to connect to the first access point which can be found that supports EAP In this situation however a successful connection is not guaranteed because the identified WAP may be connected to a RADIUS server which does not support the specified EAP type and or may not have the proper user identities configured OO i Wireless Security EAP TTLS Settings Cont Identity When pressed the panel displays an on screen keyboard which allows you to enter an EAP Identity string which is how the panel identifies itself to the Au
295. stablish a connection to a Modero panel via USB the target computer must have the appropriate AMX USB driver installed This installation is bundled into the latest TPDesign4 software setup process or can be downloaded independently from the main Application Files page on Wwww amx com Step 1 Setup the Panel and PC for USB Communication 1 If you do not currently have the latest version of TPDesign4 navigate to www amx com gt Tech Center gt Downloadable Files gt Application Files gt NetLinx Design Tools section of the website and locate the AMX USB Driver executable AMX USBLAN Setup exe 2 Download this executable file to a known location on your computer 3 Launch the Setup exe and follow the on screen prompts to complete the installation Step 2 Confirm the Installation of the USB Driver on the PC The first time each AMX touch panel is connected to the PC it is detected as a new hardware device and the USBLAN driver becomes associated with it panel specific Each time thereafter the panel is recognized as a unique USBLAN device and the association to the driver is done in the background When the panel is detected for the first time some user intervention is required during the association between panel and driver 1 After the installation of the USB driver has been completed confirm the proper installation of the large Type A USB connector to the PC s USB port and restart your machine If the panel is already powered
296. tab of the Workspace window The default Modero panel value is 10001 INS NetLinx Studio File Edit wiew Project Build Diagnostics Debug Tools S4 Virtual Master firmware version and device number fm System 1 Devices E 00000 VNM AMX Corp ONM Version 1 0 JE 32001 NSX Application AMX Corp 2 30 lt NetLinx Studio JB 10001 NX CV7 AMX Corp v2 55 43 version number Modero panel firmware Masters Devices Ports version and device number 1 3 0 Display Ci Workspace T Online Tree FIG 78 NetLinx Workspace window showing the panel connection via a Virtual NetLinx Master Only CV7 firmware should be loaded onto ithis specific panel type This new firmware also provides both backwards compatibility with the previous NOTE 802 11b cards and new security protocols for the new 802 119 wireless CF card The latest CV7 firmware kit file is now panel specific 5 If the panel firmware being used is not current download the latest Kit file by first logging in to www amx com and then navigate to Tech Center gt Firmware Files and from within the Modero section of the web page locate your Modero panel 6 Click on the desired Kit file link and after you ve accepted the Licensing Agreement verify you have downloaded the Modero Kit file to a known location 7 From within Studio select Tools gt Firmware Transfers gt Send to NetLinx Device from the Main menu to open the Send to NetLinx De
297. tem Number of the Virtual NetLinx Master will not take effect until al communications have been stopped and estarted N Co coes FIG 77 Assigning Communication Settings for a Virtual Master aE E a t kd NOTE NOTE 10 Click the Communications Settings button to open the Communications Settings dialog Click on the NetLinx Master radio button from the Platform Selection section to indicate that you are working as a NetLinx Master Click on the Virtual Master radio box from the Transport Connection Option section to indicate you are wanting to configure the PC to communicate directly with a panel Everything else such as the Authentication is greyed out because you are not going through the Master s UI Click the Edit Settings button on the Communications Settings dialog to open the Virtual NetLinx Master Settings dialog FIG 77 From within this dialog enter the System number default is 1 Click OK three times to close the open dialogs save your settings and return to the main NetLinx Studio application Click the OnLine Tree tab in the Workspace window to view the devices on the Virtual System The default System value is one Right click on the Empty Device Tree System entry and select Refresh System to re populate the list The panel will not appear as a device below the virtual system number in the Online Tree tab until both the system number used in step 7 for the Virtual NetLinx Master VNM
298. ter Option 5 sends keystrokes directly to the Master via the Send Output String mechanism This process sends a virtual keystroke command VKS to the Master Example 2 SEND COMMAND Panel KPS 0 Disables the keyboard passthru to the Master The following point defines how the parameters within this command work e Accepts keystrokes from any of these sources attached USB keyboard or Virtual keyboard Key presses and key releases are not distinguished except in the case of CTRL ALT and SHIFT Refer to theEmbedded Codes table on page 178 that define special characters which can be included with the string but may not be represented by the ASCII character set Syntax VKS lt string gt Variable string Only 1 string per command only one stroke per command Example SEND COMMAND Panel VKS 8 Sends out the keystroke backspace to the G4 application Embedded codes The following is a list of G4 compatible embedded codes Embedded Codes Decimal numbers Hexidecimal values Virtual keystroke 8 08 Backspace 13 0D Enter 27 1B ESC 128 80 CTRL key down 129 81 ALT key down 130 82 Shift key down 131 83 F1 132 84 F2 133 85 F3 134 86 F4 135 87 F5 136 88 F6 137 89 F7 138 8A F8 139 8B F9 140 8C F10 141 8D F11 142 8E F12 143 8F Num
299. ter the time value in minutes available on the battery for use before the panel displays a very low battery warning This indicates a near term panel shutdown Range 3 15 default 5 min This value can never exceed the Low Battery Warning value e When the NXT BP battery installed within the NXA BASE 1 battery base reaches a point where it needs to be recalibrated Arecalibration pop up screen appears to ask whether or not you choose to recalibrate the battery at this time Battery Base Page Elements Cont Battery Status fields This section provides the ability to monitor the current battery charge level and charge quality e The Battery One Charge Status bargraph indicates the power charge available on the Slot 1 internal battery connection bargraph range 0 100 e The Battery One Quality bargraph indicates the physical capacity quality of the battery Quality is the percentage of actual capacity vs its rated capacity For optimal performance a battery should be replaced when the quality rating drops below 80 The Base Version field indicates the firmware version being used by the NXA BASE 1 Battery Base connected to the NXT CV7 panel The Battery Level Port field indicates the port being used to report the charge status level back to the NetLinx Master on set in TPD4 The Battery Level field indicates the level being used to report the charge status level back to the NetLinx Master on
300. tes e WAP Site Survey Refer to the Configuring a Wireless Connection section on page 57 for more detailed information of setting up the MVP panel for wireless network access using the different types of security options Wireless Settings g IP Settings section Settings Wireless Security J e Wireless Settings section Red fields are user editable lt E Blue fields cycle through choices Grey fields are read only 192 168 1687 192 168 168 9 RE Cine live 00 10 00 43 00 24 00 00 00 41 00 00 FIG 100 Wireless Settings page reads from and assigns values to the WAP The elements of the Wireless Settings page are described in the table below Wireless Settings Page Elements Back Saves the changes and returns you to the previously active touch panel page Connection Status icon This visual display of the connection status allows the user to have a current visual update of the panel s connection status regardless of what page is currently active A Lock only appears on the icon if the panel has established a connection with a currently secured target Master requiring a username and password Wireless Settings Page Elements Cont IP Settings Sets the IP communication values for the touch panel and contains DHCP STATIC Sets the panel to either DHCP or Static communication modes DHCP Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol assigns IP Addresses to client stations
301. tes for General buttons 1 Off state and 2 On state name of bitmap picture 1 50 ASCII characters Example SEND_COMMAND Panel BMP 500 504 amp 510 515 1 bitmap png Sets the OFF state picture for the buttons with variable text ranges of 500 504 amp 510 515 OO A Button Commands Cont ABNC Clear current TakeNote annotations Syntax BNC lt vt addr range gt lt command value gt Variable variable text address range 1 4000 command value 0 clear 1 clear all Example SEND_COMMAND Panel BNC 973 0 Clears the annotation of the TakeNote button with variable text 973 ABNN Set the TakeNote network name for the specified Syntax ABNN lt vt addr range gt lt network name gt Variable variable text address range 1 4000 Set the TakeNote network port for the specified Addresses network name Use a valid IP Address Example SEND_COMMAND Panel BNN 973 192 168 169 99 Sets the TakeNote button network name to 192 168 169 99 ABNT Syntax BNT lt vt addr range gt lt network port gt Variable variable text address range 1 4000 Set the button opacity Addresses network port 1 65535 Example SEND_COMMAND Panel BNT 973 5000 Sets the TakeNote button network port to 5000 ABOP The button opacity can be specified as a decimal between 0 255 where zero 0 is invisible and 255 is opaque or as a HEX code as used
302. the panel tries to connect to it The field name associated with this file is Certificate Authority If a server certificate is used it should first be downloaded into the panel and the Certificate Authority field should then be set to the name of that certificate file No file path should be used for this setting as all certificates are stored in a specific directory that the user cannot control or change The most secure connection method uses a server certificate If no server certificate will be used then this field should be left blank If the field contains a file name then a valid certificate file with the same file name must be previously installed on the panel Otherwise the authentication process will fail Wireless Settings Page Security Options EAP PEAP EAP Extensible Authentication Protocol is a Enterprise authentication protocol that can be used in both a wired and wireless network environment EAP requires the use of an 802 1x Authentication Server also known as a Radius server Most of the configuration fields described below take variable length strings as inputs Whenever these fields are selected an on screen keyboard appears which allows the string to then be entered PEAP Protected Extensible Authentication Protocol was developed by both Cisco Systems and Microsoft as a way to securely transmit authentication information such as passwords over a wireless network environment PEAP uses only server side public k
303. thentication RADIUS Server e This information is similar to a username used to login to a secured server or workstation This works in tandem with the Password string which is similar to the password entered to gain access to a secured workstation Note Typically this is in the form of a username such as jdoe amx com e Use the on screen keyboard s Clear button to completely erase any previously stored identity username information Anonymous Identity When pressed the panel displays an on screen keyboard which allows you to enter an IT provided alpha numeric string which is similar to the username used as the identity but does not represent a real user e This information is used as a fictitious name which might be seen by wireless preying eyes such as sniffer programs during the initial connection and setup process between the panel and the Radius server In this way the real identity username will never be seen by anyone Note Typically this is in the form of a fictitious username such as anonymous amx com e Use the on screen keyboard s Clear button to completely erase any previously stored identity username information Password When pressed the panel displays an on screen keyboard which allows you to enter the network password string specified for the user entered within the Identity field This is also how the panel identifies itself to the Authentication RADIUS Server e This information is similar to th
304. tificate and private key can both be incorporated into one file or split into two separate files In addition the file format used by these files could be PEM DER or PKCS12 These formats are described later in this section The following table describes how to fill in the fields for each possible case Client Certificate Configuration Certificate Configuration Client Certificate Field Private Key Field Single file contains both the client certificate Enter the file name Enter the same file name and private key Format is PEM or DER First file contains the client certificate and the Enter the first file name Enter the second file name second file contains the private key Format is PEM or DER Single file contains both the client certificate Leave this field blank Enter the file name and the private key Format is PKCS12 First file contains the client certificate and the This configuration is not This configuration is not second file contains the private key supported supported Format is PKCS12 AMX supports the following security certificates within three different formats e PEM Privacy Enhanced Mail e DER Distinguished Encoding Rules e PKCS12 Public Key Cryptography Standard 12 PKCS12 files are frequently generated by Microsoft certificate applications Otherwise PEM is more common Certificate files frequently use 5 file extensions It can be confusing because there is not a one to
305. tification information The result sent to the Master would be ButtonGet Id 529 Type 1005 Flag VALUE1 VALUE2 VALUE3 TEXT TEXT LENGTH 0 D U H Oo Button Query Commands Cont 2JSI Syntax Get the current 27SI lt vt addr range gt lt button states range gt Icon Variable justification variable text address range 1 4000 button states range 1 256 for multi state buttons 0 All states for General buttons 1 Off state and 2 On state custom event type 1006 Flag Zero Value1 Button state number Value2 1 9 justify Value3 Zero Text Blank Text length Zero Example SEND COMMAND Panel JSI 529 1 Gets the button OFF state icon justification information The result sent to the Master would be ButtonGet Id 529 Type 1006 Flag 0 VALUE1 1 VALUE2 6 VALUE3 0 TEXT TEXT LENGTH 0 2JST Syntax Get the current 27ST lt vt addr range gt lt button states range gt text justification Variable variable text address range 1 4000 button states range 1 256 for multi state buttons 0 All states for General buttons 1 Off state and 2 On state custom event type 1004 Flag Zero Value1 Button state number Value2 1 9 justify Value3 Zero Text Blank Text length Zero Example SEND COMMAND Panel JST 529 1 Gets the button OFF state text justification information The result sent to the Master w
306. tion is part of the IEEE 802 11i encryption standard for wireless LANs TKIP provides per packet key mixing message integrity check and re keying mechanism thus ensuring every data packet is sent with its own unique encryption key Key mixing increases the complexity of decoding the keys by giving the hacker much less data that has been encrypted using any one key e WEP e Short for Wired Equivalent Privacy WEP is a scheme used to secure wireless networks Wi Fi A wireless network broadcasts messages using radio which are particularly susceptible to hacker attacks WEP was intended to provide the confidentiality and security comparable to that of a traditional wired network As a result of identified weaknesses in this scheme WEP was superseded by Wi Fi Protected Access WPA and then by the full IEEE 802 111 standard also known as WPA2 e WPA e Wi Fi Protected Access WPA and WPA2 is a class of system used to secure wireless Wi Fi computer networks It was created in response to several serious weaknesses researchers had found in the previous WEP system WPA implements the majority of the IEEE 802 111 standard and was intended as an intermediate measure to take the place of WEP while 802 11i was prepared WPA2 WPA is designed to work with all wireless network interface cards but not necessarily with first generation wireless access points To resolve problems with WEP the Wi Fi Alliance released WPA FIG 112 which int
307. tion contains the necessary Active X and VNC client applications necessary to properly view and control the panel pages from your computer communication Once the application is installed this popup will no longer appear This popup will only appear if you are connecting to the target panel using a different NOTE computer The G4 Web Control application is sent by the panel to the computer that is used for 8 In some cases you might get a Connection Details dialog FIG 76 requesting a VNC Server IP Address This is the IP Address not the IP of the Master but of the target touch panel Depending on which method of communication you are using it can be found in either the ie e Wired Ethernet System Settings gt IP Settings section within the ZP Address field e Wireless Wireless Settings gt IP Settings section within the IP Address field If you do not get this field continue to step 9 JE VNC server LOK J Ce Sea IP Address of touch panel a e ere obtained from IP Settings section of the System Wireless Settings page Use host duplay FIG 76 Connection Details dialog 9 Ifa WebControl password was setup on the G4 WebControl page a G4 Authentication Session password dialog box appears on the screen within the secondary browser window 10 Enter the Web Control session password into the Session Password field FIG 75 This password was previously entered into the Web Control Password field within the G4
308. to 9 entry required plus and minus signs not allowed 9 Digit or space entry not required plus and minus signs not allowed Digit or space entry not required plus and minus signs allowed L Letter A to Z entry required Letter A to Z entry optional A Letter or digit entry required a Letter or digit entry optional amp Any character or a space entry required C Any character or a space entry optional The number of the above characters used determines the length of the input masking box Example 0000 requires an entry requires digits to be used and allows only 4 characters to be entered used Refer to the following Send Commands for more detailed information BIM Sets the input mask for the specified addresses see the B M section on page 147 BMF subcommand MK sets the input mask of a text area see the BMF section on page 149 Input mask ranges These ranges allow a user to specify the minimum and maximum numeric value for a field Only one range is allowed per field Using a range implies a numeric entry ONLY Input Mask Ranges Character Meaning Start range End range Range Separator An example from the above table 01255 This allows a user to enter a value from 0 to 255 Input mask next field characters These characters allow you to specify a list of characters that cause the keyboard to move the focus to the next field when
309. to a Modero panel through the front Audio Video CAT5 port ETHERNET RJ 45 connector routes data to the G4 touch panel through the front Ethernet port These connections use a standard CAT5 Ethernet cable to provide communication between the target touch panel breakout box and NetLinx Master PWR 2 pin mini Phoenix connector that connects to a 12 VDC compliant power supply This port can be used to provide power to a Modero panel by sending it through the NXA AVB ETHERNET rear power connector through to the front power connector Wiring the NXA AVB ETHERNET for Unbalanced Audio Most domestic audio equipment has unbalanced audio inputs and outputs This means that the audio output left right or mono appears on a single wire and is referenced to 0 V or Ground Typical connectors used are RCA phono connectors DIN plugs sockets and 0 25 6 3mm or 3 5mm jack plugs sockets Unbalanced audio is adequate for most domestic environments and for line level signals in a typical broadcast studio Problems may occur if the signals are carried over long distances especially if the source and destination have separate main supplies Use the following wiring drawing FIG 8 to configure an unbalanced audio connection Unbalanced IN Left Channel Jumper IN to GND Unbalanced IN Right Channel Jumper IN to GND AUDIO IN MIC OUT Microphone Unbalanced OUT FIG 8 Wiring the rear AUDIO IN and MIC OUT for use
310. to securely adhere it If the CF metal cover plate is not present over the wireless card slot you can use the adhesive tape to secure the terminal antenna to the surface of the new card atop the product label 10 To complete the upgrade process close and resecure the panel enclosure using the procedures in the following step Step 4 Close and Resecure the NXT Panel Enclosure 1 In a single motion gently slide the rear Tilt Bracket cover plate back over the tilt mechanism located below the LCD and while angling the housing downwards slide the outer housing below the Tilt Bracket and towards the LCD at a downward angle 2 Locate the two screw holes at either sides of the front speaker grill and then use a grounded Phillips head screwdriver to both insert and secure the two Tilt Bracket Screws FIG 17 This procedure resecures the rear Tilt Bracket cover plate with the AMX logo and Hinge brackets ee 2 NOTE 3 Press the outer housing forwards until it is aligned over the outer housing installation holes Once installed and secured the tilt bracket prevents any further movement FIG 18 4 Gently press down on the housing toward the base until it is securely positioned over the circuit board and base 5 While holding the circuit board cover in place turn the panel back over until the LCD lies facedown on a soft cloth and the under side of the base is exposed 6 Insert and secure the four Housing Sc
311. to the charger The NXT CHG Slot 1 has the feature of being able to completely discharge and recharge recalibrate a battery Battery Life indicator NXT BP Modero Power Pack battery NXT CHG Modero Power Station charger FIG 30 NXT CHG Kit consists of one NXT CHG charger and two NXT BP batteries NXT BP and NXT CHG Specifications Dimensions HWD e 1 13 x 8 63 x 11 81 2 86 cm x 21 91 cm x 30 00 cm Power Requirements e NXT BP Battery Voltage 11 1 Volts e NXT CHG 90 264 VAC 47 63 Hz Single Phase using the included 24 VDC power supply Weight 0 57 Ibs 0 26 kg Features e Charge time for two depleted batteries 5 hours e Charge Rate 2 5 A 12 VDC e 2 Bays Sequential charging e LED One LED indicator in front of each bay which conveys the status of that bay Refer to the Reading the NXT CHG LED Indicator section for more information e Recalibration pushbutton located between the bays Initiates recalibration sequence in the left bay only e Recalibration Time less than 9 hours Other AMX Equipment NXT CHG Kit FG2250 50K 1 charger and 2 NXT BP batteries NXT BP battery pack FG2255 10 additional Powering the NXT CHG Recalibration improves the reporting accuracy of the battery charge back to the Modero panel The NXT CHG Smart Battery Charger uses an included power supply to charge inserted batteries 1 Connect the rear of the NXT CHG to the power ada
312. to the panel using this port socket number and receive touch release move strings By default the panel disables touch notifications on startup Format of the output is lt Press Release Move gt lt x coordinate gt lt y coordinate gt Example send_command TP SKT 7425 socket 7425 send_command TP notification enables touch notifications on SKT 0 disable touch ATEC Set the text effect color for the specified addresses states to the specified color The Text Effect is specified by name and can be found in TPD4 You can also assign the color by name or RGB value RRGGBB or RRGGBBAA Syntax TEC lt vt addr range gt lt button states range gt lt color value gt Variable variable text address range 1 4000 button states range 1 256 for multi state buttons 0 All states for General buttons 1 Off state and 2 On state color value Refer to the RGB Values for all 88 Basic Colors table on page 139 Example SEND_COMMAND Panel TEC 500 504 amp 510 515 1 amp 2 12 Sets the text effect color to Very Light Yellow on buttons with variable text 500 504 and 510 515 Enables disables touch output to Master ATEF The Text Effect is specified by name and can be found in TPD4 Set the text effect Syntax TEF lt vt addr range gt lt button states range gt lt text effect name gt Variable variable text address range 1 4000 button states range 1 25
313. tomatically based on the configuration parameters entered into the panel 802 1x EAP over Wireless 4m m m m p Authentication Server Client Panel Authenticator RADIUS Server supplicant Wireless Access Point FIG 114 EAP security method in process The client panel establishes a wireless connection with the WAP specified by the SSID 2 The WAP opens up a tunnel between itself and the RADIUS server configured via the access point This tunnel means that packets can flow between the panel and the RADIUS server but nowhere else The network is protected until authentication of the client panel is complete and the ID of the client is verified 3 The WAP Authenticator sends an EAP Request Identity message to the panel as soon as the wireless connection becomes active 4 The panel then sends a EAP Response Identity message through the WAP to the RADIUS server providing its identity and specifying which EAP type it wants to use If the server does not support the EAP type then it sends a failure message back to the WAP which will then disconnect the panel As an example EAP FAST is only supported by the Cisco server 5 If the EAP type is supported the server then sends a message back to the client panel indicating what information it needs This can be as simple as a username Identity and password or as complex as multiple CA certificates 6 The panel then responds with the requested information I
314. ton Commands Cont ABIM Set the input mask for the specified address Syntax BIM lt vt addr range gt lt input mask gt Variable variable text address range 1 4000 input mask Refer to the Text Area Input Masking section on page 184 for character types Example SEND_COMMAND Panel BIM 500 AAAAAAAAAA Sets the input mask to ten A characters that are required to either a letter or digit entry is required ABLN Set the number of lines removed equally from the top and bottom of a composite video signal The maximum number of lines to remove is 240 A value of 0 will display the incoming video signal unaffected This command is used to scale non 4x3 video images into non 4x3 video buttons Syntax BLN lt vt addr range gt lt button states range gt lt number of lines gt Variable variable text address range 1 4000 button states range 1 256 for multi state buttons 0 All states for General buttons 1 Off state and 2 On state number of lines 0 240 Example SEND_COMMAND Panel BLN 500 55 Equally removes 55 lines from the top and 55 lines from the bottom of the video button A Button Commands Cont ABMC Note that the source is a single button state Each state must be copied as a separate command The lt codes gt section represents what attributes will be copied All codes are Button copy 2 char pairs that can be separated by
315. tons with a defined address range The alignment of 0 is followed by lt left gt lt top gt The left and top coordinates are relative to the upper left corner of the button Syntax JSI lt vt addr range gt lt button states range gt lt new icon alignment gt Variable variable text address range 1 4000 button states range 1 256 for multi state buttons 0 All states for General buttons 1 Off state and 2 On state new icon alignment Value of 1 9 corresponds to the following locations 0 1 2 3 4 6 Zero can be used for an absolute position 7 8 9 Example SEND_COMMAND Panel JSI 500 504 amp 510 515 1 amp 2 1 Sets the Off On state icon alignment to upper left corner for those buttons with variable text range of 500 504 amp 510 515 A Button Commands Cont AJST Set text alignment using a numeric keypad layout for those buttons with a defined address range The alignment of 0 is followed by lt left gt lt top gt The left and top coordinates are relative to the upper left corner of the button Syntax 7ST lt vt addr range gt lt button states range gt lt new text alignment gt Variable variable text address range 1 4000 button states range 1 256 for multi state buttons 0 All states for General buttons 1 Off state and 2 On state new text alignment Value of 1 9 corresponds to the following
316. ture Default Off The Interlace button toggles the Interlacing feature Default On Status Displays whether or not a video sync signal is detected Format Allows you to press this blue field and cycle through a choice of available video formats NTSC PAL SECAM or Auto detect Default Auto Brightness Use the UP DN buttons to alter the brightness level of the incoming signal Range 0 255 default 128 Contrast Use the UP DN buttons to alter the contrast level of the incoming signal Range 0 255 default 128 Saturation Use the UP DN buttons to alter the color saturation level of the incoming signal Range 0 255 default 128 Hue Use the UP DN buttons to alter the hue level of the incoming signal Range 0 255 default 128 Battery Base Page This page FIG 89 allows you to alter set the power warning preferences monitor battery status information and alter the display times for the battery warnings The fields on this page are populated with information after the panel is connected to an optional NXA BASE 1 Battery Base containing a single NXT BP battery This page is ONLY available on CV7 Table Top panels NXT using an NXA BASE 1 The elements of the Battery Base page are described in the table below G arge Status Panel Shutdown z Low Battery Warning vas Battery Power Brightness Limit Very low Battery Warning vy aw 7 FIG 8
317. ubnet as itself In this case the Master has its UDP feature enabled This UDP User Datagram Protocol is a protocol within the TCP IP protocol suite that is used in place of TCP when a reliable delivery is not required This UDP enabling is done through a Telnet session on the Master Refer to the particular NetLinx Master manual for more detailed information NOTE D WARNING Step 3 Configure an Ethernet Connection Type When using Ethernet as your communication method the NetLinx Master must first be setup with either a Static IP or DHCP Address obtained from either NetLinx Studio or your System Administrator Before beginning 1 Verify the panel has been configured to communicate either through an Ethernet cable from the panel to a valid Ethernet Hub or to a wirelessly from the panel to a compatible Wireless Access Point WAP Before commencing verify you are using the latest NetLinx Master firmware 2 Verify that the NetLinx Master is receiving power and is communicating via an Ethernet connection with the PC running NetLinx Studio 3 Connect the terminal end of the 12 VDC compliant power supply cable to the power connector on the rear side of the touch panel 4 Verify the green Ethernet LED from the rear Ethernet port on the Master is illuminated indicating a proper connection 5 Verify the yellow LED from the rear Ethernet port on the Master is blinking indicating communication 6 After the p
318. upgradeable to 802 11g communication via the installation of the new NXA WC8011GCF Wi Fi Card Kit FG2255 07 CV7 panels support AMX Computer Control which enables remote viewing and control of any networked computer directly from the panel This gives the user the ability to launch digital music from a PC cruise the Internet check and respond to E mail open software files and launch applications Anything you can do on your PC can be accomplished through these panels The optional wireless solution includes an NXA WC80211GCF internal Wi Fi card that allows the CV7 to communicate with a NetLinx Master via a standard 802 11g Wireless Access Point and an NXA BASE 1 battery base kit that allows the NXT to function off the charge from the included single NXT BP battery CV7 panels feature programmable firmware that can be upgraded via either the Ethernet port wireless interface card or the mini USB port NXT CV7 base 7 Programmable Programmable Sleep Setup Access Button Buttons LEDs Buttons LED 1 3 4 6 Sleep Setup Access Button FIG 2 NXT CV7 and NXD CV7 front views The Button Trim Ring is factory installed only on the F
319. utton to access the Battery Base page where you can modify and monitor NXT BP Modero Power Pack parameters e This button only appears when a Modero Table Top panel NXT is connected to an NXA BASE B battery base Refer to the Battery Base Page section on page 96 for more detailed information Setup Page This page FIG 83 centers around basic Modero panel properties such as Connection Status of the panel Display Timeout Inactivity Page Flip Time Inactivity page file and the Panel Brightness Connection Status a Encrypted Connected via Ethernet Setup y amp Connection Status v TEA Red Connection Status icon z indicates no connection 7 Cio W Y to a Master b lt Green Connection Status icon Irsiy Pasalna Tis indicates communication Vv ap A to a Master Connected To System 1 Panel Brantness FIG 83 Setup page Battery Base button doesn t appear until NXT is connected to a BASE 1 The elements of the Setup page are described in the table below Setup Page Elements Exit Returns you to the Main touch panel page In this case the previous page is the default Main page Connection Status icon This visual display of the connection status allows the user to have a current update of the panel s connection status regardless of what page is currently active A Lock only appears on the icon if the panel has established a connection with a currently secured target M
320. vice dialog B in FIG 79 Verify the panel s System and Device number values match those values listed within the System folder in the OnLine Tree tab of the Workspace window A in FIG 79 AE Ele Edt view Project Buld Diagnostics Debug Tools Settings Window Help oes ngai tela coo aa Seelaae Lk x r Location System 1 Devices JE 00000 VNM AMX Corp VNM Version 1 0 TE 32001 NSX Application AMX Corp 2 30 C Documents and Settings psalvador Desktop 10001 NX CV7 AMX Corp v2 55 43 OID 2 Kernel AMX Corp 2 4 20 59 m Files J OID 3 Root File System AMX Corp v0 03 17 OID 4 Bootrom AMX Corp None OID 5 Sensor AMX Corp v1 24 OID 6 Opt File System AMX Corp 0 02 17 gy OID 7 Battery Base AMX Corp v OID 8 Foga AMX Corp v7 00 1 _CV7_MVPXXO0_v2 Firmware MIPS Bootloader for MVP 7500 MVP 8401 Version v1 05 15 Target MIPS Masterfs Devices Ports A Firmware Linux Kemel for MVP 7500 MVP 8400 NXx J 1 J 3 J 0 Display Version v2 4 20 pre6 0 wi rf Ci Workspace T online Tree J m Target Progress x z 4 Device 100 Pot 1 System 1 Sending file iitrd tsk Comm Virtual NetLinx Master Sys 1 AAI I Reboot Device e alah Status Fna Fies A Find Fies A Fle Transtar Status Neti 4 on Ron Push iced Ready FIG 79 Using U
321. w the Trim Ring latches FIG 32 3 Ina single motion press down and then outwards on the three Trim Ring latches located along the top of the internal surface of the Faceplate to begin removing the Button Trim Ring Removing the Internal Faceplate from the panel exposes the pushbuttons and light pipes along the inside of the Internal Faceplate 4 Gently tug along the edges of the Button Trim Ring and work your way around the edges to remove it from the Faceplate FIG 32 ee Trim Ring Latches Default Button Trim Ring J O a CV7 Panel enclosure i Y Button latch Light Pipe latch black Button and Light Pipe removal showing the internal surface of Faceplate with button openings Faceplate outside surface shown FIG 32 Removing the default Button Trim Ring 5 No Button Trim Ring Hollow button openings From along the internal surface of the Faceplate remove the six buttons by gently bending each Button latch up and pulling the button outwards Remove the pair of clear light pipe strips by bending the two black light pipe latches inwards and pulling out the strip Grasp the No Button Trim Ring on both sides and fit it into the groove along the outside surface of the Faceplate made available by the removal of the previous Trim Ring Gently insert the Trim Ring latches into their corresponding openings on the outer surface of the internal Faceplate FI
322. ware Transfers gt Send to NetLinx Device from the Main menu to open the Send to NetLinx Device dialog FIG 81 Verify the panel s System and Device number values match those values listed within the System folder in the OnLine Tree tab of the Workspace window Se Selected Firmware file Send to NetLinx Devic r Location Description NX CY7 NX CV10 MYP 7500 MVP 82 MVP split screen issue fixed Support for NX CV10 Contents Fimware MIPS Bootloader for MVP 7500 MVP 240 Description field Target MIPS for selected Kit file Firmware Linux Kemel for MVP 7500 MVP B400 NX rf m Target Progress Device tor Port ta Sica ae Sending file initrd tsk TCP IP 192 168 168 99 1319 i a Firmware download status M Adboot Device Send Device and System values listed in the Workspace window must match the System and Device values FIG 81 Send to NetLinx Device dialog showing Modero firmware update via IP 7 Select the panel s Kit file from the Files section FIG 81 8 Enter the Device value associated with the panel and the System number associated with the Master listed in the OnLine Tree tab of the Workspace window The Port field is greyed out 9 Click the Reboot Device checkbox This causes the touch panel to reboot after the firmware update process is complete The reboot of the panel can take up 30 seconds after the firmware process has finished 1
323. with Unbalanced Audio When using unbalanced audio for the AUDIO IN connector FIG 8 the and the GND terminals should be connected together and then connected to the GND of the unbalance audio signal When connecting to an unbalanced audio input from the MIC OUT connector FIG 8 wire the terminal to the signal input and the GND terminal to the signal ground Wiring the NXA AVB ETHERNET for Balanced Audio Professional audio equipment will often use balanced audio inputs and outputs usually on 3 pin XLR connectors A balanced audio signal consists of a pair of wires carrying the audio signal in anti phase with each other if one wire carries a positive voltage the other carries an equal and opposite negative voltage The advantage of balanced audio over unbalanced audio is its ability to reject external interference added as the signal is carried over the wire The receiving equipment takes the voltage difference between the two wires as the input signal Interference will usually get added to both wires equally and so gets cancelled by the receiving equipment The 3 wires used in a typical XLR lead are often referred to as Ground Live Hot and Return Cold Live and Return carry the in phase and out of phase versions of the audio respectively The pins of the XLR plug socket are as follows X Ground e L Live Hot R Return Cold When connecting the MIC OUT connector to a balanced audio input FIG 9 u
324. wse button and navigating to the desired file type Use the drop down arrow in the Local Address field to select communication through either the computer s Ethernet port Internet communication or via the USB port direct connection If using an Ethernet connection skip to step 8 For a USB connection select the 10 XX XX 1 IP Address which corresponds to the virtual IP Address assigned to the USB connection port on the computer For a USB connection navigate to the Add IP Address field bottom right of the interface and enter a value of 1 greater than the virtual USB IP Address For example If the virtual USB IP Address is 10 0 0 1 then you would add an address for the directly connected panel of 10 0 0 2 this is one greater than the USB address value detected by the utility e You can send a certificate to ONLY ONE directly connected panel via USB If using the Ethernet port s IP Address you can send a server certificate to multiple target panels For an Ethernet IP Address connection select the IP Address which corresponds to the local computer s Ethernet address Navigate to the Add IP Address field bottom right of the interface and enter the IP Addresses of the various target touch panels Click the Add button to complete the entry and add the new IP Address to the listing of available device IP Addresses Repeat this process for all subsequent device IP Addresses Once your list is complete click on the File drop down menu and select
325. y See Working With Chameleon Images in TPD4 Help Note If the Border Style properties is set to something other than None no visible change will occur Setting the Border Style to None via BOR or BMF B will reveal the Chameleon image Syntax SEND_COMMAND lt DEV gt BMI lt vt addr range gt lt button states range gt lt mask image gt Variables variable text address range 1 4000 button states range 1 256 for multi state buttons 0 All states for General buttons 1 Off state and 2 On state mask image Chameleon used Example SEND_COMMAND Panel BMI 530 1 amp 2 newMac png Sets the button with variable text 530 ON OFF state mask image to newmac png If this value is set to zero 0 there is no max length The maximum length available is 2000 This is only for a Text area input button and not for a Text area input masking button Syntax BML lt vt addr range gt lt max length gt Variable variable text address range 1 4000 max length 2000 O no max length Example SEND_COMMAND Panel BML 500 20 Sets the maximum length of the text area input button to 20 characters ABMP Assign a picture to those buttons with a defined address range Syntax ABMP lt vt addr range gt lt button states range gt lt name of bitmap picture gt Variable variable text address range 1 4000 button states range 1 256 for multi state buttons 0 All sta
326. your System Administrator and press Done when compete Repeat this process for the Secondary DNS field 11 Press the Domain field to open a Keyboard enter the resolvable domain Address this is provided by your System Administrator and equates to a unique Internet name for the panel and press Done when complete 12 Setup the security and communication parameters between the wireless card and the target WAP by configuring the Wireless Settings section on this page Refer to the following section for detailed procedures to setup either a secure or unsecure connection Using the Site Survey tool This tool allows a user to sniff out all transmitting Wireless Access Points within the detection range of the internal NX A WC80211GCF this feature is not available with the 802 11b Wi Fi card Once pressed the panel displays the Site Survey page which contains categories such as Network Name SSID Wireless Access Point names e Channel RF Channel currently being used by the WAP Wireless Access Point e Security Type if detectable such as WEP OPEN and UNKNOWN security protocol enabled on the WAP e Signal Strength None Poor Fair Good Very Good and Excellent e MAC Address Unique identification of the transmitting Access Point Press the Wireless Settings button located on the lower left to open the Wireless Settings page 2 Navigate to the Access Point MAC Address section of this page and press the on screen Site
327. ype field from the Master Connection section until the choice cycles to the word Ethernet 15 Press the Mode field until the choice cycles to the word URL By selecting URL the System Number field becomes read only grey because the panel pulls this value directly from the communicating target Master virtual or not A Virtual Master system value can be set within the active AMX software applications such as NetLinx Studio TPD4 or IREdit 16 Press the Master IP URL field to open a Keyboard and enter the IP Address of the PC used as the Virtual Master 17 Click Done to accept the new value and return to the System Settings page 18 Do not alter the Master Port Number value this is the default value used by NetLinx 19 Press the Back button to open the Protected Setup page 20 Press the on screen Reboot button to both save any changes and restart the panel Master Connection section NetLinx Master Ethernet IP Address URL Mode In this mode enter the System Number zero for an unknown System Number and the IP URL of the Master Master Port Number is defaulted to 1319 1 Press the blue Type field from the Master Connection section until the choice cycles to the word Ethernet FIG 70 Refer to the System Settings Page section on page 130 for more information about the fields on this page 2 Press the Mode field until the choice cycles to the word URL By selecting URL the System Number field becomes read only
328. zessoossdbeesoeecenssssesecsensbbe 47 Testing your Calibrations cccicisscescseisesidectt ctedenssevsesessssssuteecesdeuevesscessvvevasedscederesteeseeusesveses 48 Configuring Communication sisiiniinsniaiannsunnsciasneninriaynisniemssimsaasaiss 49 OVEPVIEW sees scassciscccccccenssaacsecscitcsoasescedeseccesaassncececseseassecenccacseesssncsoncesocasseasoneecsncsseeens 49 Modero Setup and System Connection cccccccesscsssssssssssceceeecesscessssssssseeseeeeeees 49 Configuring and Using USB with a Virtual Master ccscsesssseeeeeeeeeseeseseseeeees 51 Step 1 Setup the Panel and PC for USB Communication ccccccceseesesessseeseeeeeeeees 51 Step 2 Confirm the Installation of the USB Driver on the PC 0 eeeeseseeeeeeeeeeeeees 51 Step 3 Confirm and View the current AMX USB device connections eeeee 53 Step 4 Use the USB to Configure a Virtual Master using NetLinx Studio 54 Step 5 Confirm and View the current AMX USB device connections seeee 56 Wireless Settings Page Wireless Access Overview cccccccssscsssssssseseseeseesessess 57 IP ROUNO sii cissssctecscas cosscacessecennacasanansesseossausesees deesessaspooeneseacsdeassasasaunseosevansnsadseasessesesss 57 Hot SWapping cccccccsccscsssssssssssssessssssesscesessecsessessessseseeseeeeseceaaeasoesoesesesscessssseeseeseeeeees 57 Configuring a Wireless Connection cssssssssss

AMX NXT-CV7

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents